2 files changed, 9725 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/ntpmp10.txt b/old/ntpmp10.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b4991f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/ntpmp10.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9725 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of On the Pampas, by G. A. Henty
+#10 in our series by G. A. Henty
+
+Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
+copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
+this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
+
+This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
+Gutenberg file.  Please do not remove it.  Do not change or edit the
+header without written permission.
+
+Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
+eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file.  Included is
+important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
+how the file may be used.  You can also find out about how to make a
+donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
+
+
+**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
+
+**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
+
+*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
+
+
+Title: On the Pampas
+
+Author: G. A. Henty
+
+Release Date: September, 2004 [EBook #6472]
+[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
+[This file was first posted on December 18, 2002]
+
+Edition: 10
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ON THE PAMPAS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Prince, Juliet Sutherland, Charles Franks
+and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team.
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: Pampas. THE FIGHT WITH THE PUMA]
+
+ON THE PAMPAS OR THE YOUNG SETTLERS
+
+BY
+
+G. A. HENTY
+
+
+
+TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+Mrs. Hardy's Resolution
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+The Start
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+A New Life
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+The Pampas
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+The Settler's Home
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+A Tale of the Mexican War
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+Seth Continues His Narrative of the Mexican Adventure
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+Farm Work and Amusements
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+Neighborly Visits and Advice
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+The Lost Cattle
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+Quiet Times
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+A Steady Hand
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+The Indian Attack
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+Terrible News
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+The Pampas on Fire
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+At the stake
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+Rescued
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+And last
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+MRS. HARDY'S RESOLUTION.
+
+"What are you thinking of, Frank?" Mrs. Hardy asked her husband one
+evening, after an unusually long silence on his part.
+
+"Well, my dear, I was thinking of a good many things. In the first
+place, I think, I began with wondering what I should make of the
+boys; and that led to such a train of thoughts about ourselves and
+our circumstances that I hardly knew where I was when you spoke to
+me."
+
+Mr. Hardy spoke cheerfully, but his wife saw at once that it was
+with an effort that he did so. She put down the work upon which she
+was engaged, and moved her chair nearer to his by the fire. "It is
+a serious question, Frank, about the boys. Charley is fifteen now,
+and Hubert fourteen. I wonder myself sometimes what we shall do
+with them."
+
+"There seems no opening here in England for young fellows. The
+professions are crowded, even if they were not altogether beyond
+our means; and as to a clerkship, they had better have a trade, and
+stick to it: they would be far happier, and nearly as well paid.
+The fact is, Clara," and here Mr. Hardy paused a little, as if to
+gain courage to say what he feared would be very disagreeable to
+his wife--"the fact is, we are altogether too crowded here. The
+best thing for the children, by far, and I think the best thing for
+ourselves, would be to emigrate."
+
+Mrs. Hardy gave a little sigh, but said nothing, and sat looking
+quietly into the fire, as her husband went on: "You see, my dear, I
+am just, and only just, earning enough for us to live upon. Nor is
+there any strong probability of an increase of business. The boys,
+as you say, are growing up, and I see no prospect of giving them a
+fair start in life. Abroad it is altogether different: we can buy
+land and stock it for next to nothing. We should live roughly,
+certainly; but at least there is no fear for the future, and we
+should start our boys in life with a fair certainty of success.
+Still, Clara, I do not of course mean that I have made up my mind
+upon the subject. It is far too serious a matter to decide upon
+hastily. I only threw out the suggestion; and if you, after
+thinking it over, are against it, there is an end of the matter."
+
+Mrs. Hardy was silent for a little, and a tear sparkled on her
+cheek in the firelight; then she said, "I am not surprised, Frank,
+at what you have said. In fact I have expected it for some time. I
+have observed you looking over books upon foreign countries, and
+have seen that you often sat thoughtful and quiet. I guessed,
+therefore, what you had in your mind. Of course, dear, as a woman,
+I shrink from the thought of leaving all our friends and going to
+quite a strange country, but I don't think that I am afraid of the
+hardships or discomfort. Thousands of other women have gone through
+them, and there is no reason why I should not do the same. I do
+think with you that it would be a good thing for the boys, perhaps
+for the girls too; and that, when we have got over the first
+hardships, we too should be happier and more free from care than we
+are now. So you see, Frank, you will meet with no opposition from
+me; and if, after deliberation, you really determine that it is the
+best thing to do, I shall be ready to agree with you. But it is a
+hard thought just at first, so please do not say any more about it
+to-night."
+
+Mr. Hardy was an architect, as his father had been before him. He
+had not, however, entered the office at the usual age, but when
+eighteen had gone out to the United States, to visit an uncle who
+had settled there. After spending some time with him, the love of
+adventure had taken him to the far West, and there he had hunted
+and shot for nearly three years, till a letter, long delayed on the
+way, entreated him to return to England, as his father's health was
+failing. He at once started for England, and found that his father
+was in a feeble state of health, but was still able to carry on the
+business. Frank saw, however, that he was unequal to the work, and
+so entered the office, working hard to make up for lost time. He
+was a good draughtsman, and was shortly able to take a great burden
+off his father's shoulders.
+
+He had not been long at home, however, before he fell in love with
+Clara Aintree, the daughter of a clergyman; and his father making
+over to him a share in the business, they were married just as
+Frank attained his twenty-fourth year, his wife being about
+nineteen. Two years after the marriage Mr. Hardy senior died, and
+from that time Frank had carried on the business alone.
+
+B--- was a large provincial town, but it scarcely afforded
+remunerative employment for an architect; and although Mr. Hardy
+had no competitor in his business, the income which he derived from
+it was by no means a large one, and the increasing expenses of his
+family rendered the struggle to make ends meet yearly more severe.
+His father had been possessed of a small private fortune, but had
+rashly entered into the mania of railway speculation, and at his
+death had left about fifteen thousand dollars to his son. This sum
+Frank Hardy had carefully preserved intact, as he had foreseen that
+the time might come when it would, for his children's sake, be
+advisable to emigrate. He had long looked forward to this, but
+had abstained from taking any step until his sons were of an age to be
+able to make themselves useful in a life in the bush or upon the
+prairies.
+
+Frank Hardy, at the time our story begins, was about forty. He was
+a tall, active man, and the life he had led in America when young
+had hardened his muscles, and given him the full use of every
+faculty.
+
+Mrs. Hardy was five years younger than her husband, and scarcely
+looked thirty years old. She was a high-spirited woman, well fitted
+to be her husband's companion in the dangers and hardships of a
+settler's life.
+
+The subject of emigration once started, was frequently continued,
+and presently books and maps began to be consulted, and the
+advantages and disadvantages of the various countries and colonies
+to be debated. Finally, Mr. and Mrs. Hardy agreed that the
+Argentine Republic, in its magnificent rivers, its boundless extent
+of fertile land, in its splendid climate, its cheap labor, and its
+probable prospects, offered the greatest advantages.
+
+The decision once arrived at, it was determined to announce it to
+the children, who had up to this time no idea of the great change
+decided upon. Breakfast was over, and the boys, whose holidays had
+just begun, were about to leave the table, when their father said:
+"Wait a moment, boys; there is something we want to talk to you
+about."
+
+The boys resumed their seats. "Your mamma and I have been wondering
+what you boys are to become, and we do not see any openings likely
+to occur here. Now, what should you say to us all emigrating?"
+
+"What, going abroad, papa!" they both exclaimed joyously.
+
+"Yes, boys, settling in the backwoods or in the prairies."
+
+"Oh, that would be jolly," Charley said, "I know, I papa, having
+fights with Indians, and all that sort of thing. Oh, it would be
+glorious!"
+
+"Well, Charley," his father said, smiling, "I do not know that we
+shall have fights with Indians, nor do think it would be very jolly
+if we did. But we should have to rough it, you know; you boys
+would have to work hard, to help me in everything, and to look after
+the cattle and sheep."
+
+"What fun! what fun!" the boys both shouted; "we should like it of
+all things in the world."
+
+"And what do you think of it, Maud and Ethel?" their mamma asked
+the two little girls, who were looking very surprised, but rather
+doubtful as to the pleasure of the fights with Indians which their
+brothers had spoken so delightedly about. "You will have to be two
+very useful little women, and will have to help me just as the boys
+will have to help your papa. Very likely we may not be able to get
+a servant there, and then we shall have to do everything."
+
+"That will be fine, mamma," said Maud, who was rather over twelve,
+while her sister was just eleven. "I don't think I could cook, but
+you should cook, and I could scrub and do all the hard work, and
+Ethel could wash up, and lay the table, and that sort of thing.
+That would be fine, mamma."
+
+Ethel, who almost always agreed with her elder sister, did so now,
+and the four young ones became quite uproarious in their plans for
+making themselves useful. At last Mr. Hardy called for order.
+
+"Now silence all, and listen to me. This affair is a serious
+business; and although I hope and believe that we shall all enjoy
+our life very much, still we must prepare for it, and look upon it
+in earnest, and not as a sort of game. I have business here which I
+cannot finish before another eight or nine months. Let us all make
+the most of our time before we start. In the first place, the
+language of the people among whom we are going is Spanish, and we
+must all learn to speak it well before we leave. For the next three
+months we will work together at grammar and exercises, and then I
+will try and get some Spanish teacher to live in the house, and
+speak the language with us until we go. In the next place, it will
+be well that you should all four learn to ride. I have hired the
+paddock next to our garden, and have bought a pony, which will be
+here to-day, for the girls. You boys have already ridden a little,
+and I shall now have you taught in the riding school. I went
+yesterday to Mr. Saris, and asked him if he would allow me to make
+an arrangement with his head gardener for you to go there to learn
+gardening. He at once agreed; and I have arranged with the gardener
+that you are both to be there every morning at six o'clock, and are
+to work until nine. At nine you will come in to breakfast. From
+breakfast to dinner you will have to yourselves, except upon the
+days you take riding lessons; and I should wish you to spend this
+time at your usual studies, except Latin, which will be of no use
+to you. From two till half-past four you are to learn carpentering.
+I have made an agreement with Mr. Jones to pay him so much to take
+you as a sort of apprentices for the next nine months. In the
+evening we will all work together at Spanish. It will be hard work;
+but if you want to be of any real use to me, it is absolutely
+necessary that you should be able to use a spade and to do rough
+carpentering. As the time draws on, too, I shall ask one of the
+farmers near to let you go out with his men and get some notion of
+plowing. Well, what do you say to all that?"
+
+Hubert looked a little downcast at this recital of the preparatory
+work to be gone through, but Charley said at once, "It sounds
+rather hard, papa, but, as you say, we shall have to work hard out
+there, and it is much better to accustom one's self to it at once;
+besides, of course, we should be of no use at all to you unless we
+knew something about work."
+
+"And what are we to learn, mamma?" Maud asked.
+
+"Not a very great deal, my dear," Mrs. Hardy said. "Spanish to
+begin with, then cooking. I shall teach you at any rate, to make
+simple dishes and puddings, and to boil vegetables properly. I
+shall myself practice until I am perfect, and then I shall teach
+you. Besides that, it will be as well for you to learn to attend to
+poultry; and that is all I know of at present, except that you must
+both take pains to improve yourselves at sewing. We shall have to
+make everything for ourselves out there."
+
+"I suppose we shan't do any more regular lessons, mamma?"
+
+"Indeed you will, Maud. You do not imagine that your education is
+finished, do you? and you cannot wish to grow almost as ignorant as
+the poor Indians of the country. You will give up the piano, and
+learn Spanish instead of French, but that will be all the
+difference; and I shall expect you both to make as much progress as
+possible, because, although I shall take you both out there, and
+shall teach you whenever I find time, your lessons must of
+necessity be short and irregular. And now you can all go out into
+the garden and talk the matter over."
+
+"But you have not told us yet where we are going to, papa," Charley
+said.
+
+"We are going to farm upon the bunks of one of the great South
+American rivers--probably the Parana, in the Argentine Republic."
+
+Mr. and Mrs. Hardy watched their children from the window. They
+went out in a group to the summer-house in the corner of the
+garden, all talking excitedly. Then Maud ran back again to the
+house, and in a minute or two returned with the schoolroom atlas,
+and opening it upon the table, they all clustered over it in eager
+consultation.
+
+Mrs. Hardy turned to her husband with a smile. "You will have to
+get up the subject, Frank, so as to be able to answer the
+innumerable questions you will be asked."
+
+"I shall always refer them to you."
+
+There was quite a talk in B--- when it was known that Mr. Hardy was
+going to emigrate with his wife and family. He, and his father
+before him, had been so long established in the town that there
+were few people who did not know him, more or less.
+
+Emigration in the year 1851 was far less common than it is now, and
+the interest was proportionately greater. Charley and Hubert became
+quite popular characters among their late schoolfellows, who,
+whenever they met them, would always stop to have a talk about the
+distant country to which they were going. The boys, however, had
+now but little time for talking; for upon the week after their
+father had first told them of his intention, they had set-to
+regularly at the work he had laid down for them. They rose every
+morning at five, had a slice of bread and a cup of milk, and were
+off to the gardener's, where they worked hard until half-past
+eight. Mr. Hardy had requested that they should be specially
+instructed in the raising of vegetables, and in the planting and
+pruning of fruit-trees. The culture of flowers could be of no
+utility. The digging made the boys' backs ache at first, and
+blistered their hands, but they stuck to it manfully, and soon
+became accustomed to the work, returning to breakfast with glowing
+cheeks and tremendous appetites.
+
+In the afternoon they might be seen in the carpenter's shop with
+their coats and waistcoats off, working away with saw or plane.
+
+Although both made good progress in both pursuits, yet their tastes
+differed; Charley preferring the carpentering, while Hubert was the
+gardener's most promising pupil. The former was therefore
+christened the head carpenter by his sisters, while the latter was
+promoted to the post of chief gardener.
+
+Four or five months of this work made a visible difference in the
+boys' appearance. They both widened out across the shoulders, their
+arms became strong and muscular, and they looked altogether more
+healthy and robust. Nor did their appearance belie them; for once
+when spending a holiday in the cricket-field with their former
+schoolfellows, wrestling matches being proposed after the game was
+over, they found that they were able to overcome with ease boys
+whom they had formerly considered their superiors in strength.
+
+In the meantime Mr. Hardy had succeeded in obtaining the services
+of a young Spanish lady, who had come to England to learn the
+language, as governess; and of an evening the whole family worked
+at Spanish, and made such progress that they were soon able to
+establish the rule that no other language should be spoken at
+mealtimes. The girls here soon surpassed their brothers, as they
+had the advantage of morning lessons in the language, besides which
+young children can always pick up a language sooner than their
+elders; and they had many a hearty laugh at the ridiculous mistakes
+Charley and Hubert made in their efforts to get through a long
+sentence. In six months, however, all could speak with tolerable
+fluency.
+
+Maud and Ethel were as amused and as diligent at learning household
+work as their brothers were in their departments, and might have
+been seen every afternoon in the kitchen, in their little white
+pinafores, engaged in learning the mysteries of cooking.
+
+One day, after they had been so engaged for about four months, Mrs.
+Hardy said at breakfast: "I am going to try an experiment. I have
+given the cook leave to go out for the day. Mr. and Mrs. Partridge
+are coming to dinner, and I intend handing over the kitchen to the
+girls, and letting them make their first essay. We are going to
+have soup, a leg of mutton with potatoes and spinach, a dish of
+fried cutlets, and a cabinet pudding. I shall tell Sarah to lift
+any saucepan you may want on or off the fire, but all the rest I
+shall leave in your hands. The boys will dine with us. The hour
+will be half-past five, punctually."
+
+The little girls' eyes flashed with pleasure, and they quite
+colored up at the thought of the importance and difficulty of the
+task before them. At lunch the boys pretended to eat an extra
+quantity, saying that they felt very doubtful about their dinner.
+In the afternoon Mrs. Hardy felt strongly tempted to go into the
+kitchen to see how things were getting on; but she restrained
+herself, resolving to let Maud and Ethel have entirely their own
+way.
+
+The dinner was a great success, although the soup was rather hot,
+from Ethel, in her anxiety, having let too much pepper slip in; and
+the cabinet pudding came up all over the dish, instead of
+preserving its shape, it having stuck to the mold, and Maud having
+shaken it so violently that it had come out with a burst and broken
+up into pieces, which had caused a flood of tears on the part of
+the little cook. It did not taste any the worse, however. And when
+the little girls came in to dessert in their white frocks, looking
+rather shy, and very scorched in the face, from their anxious
+peeping into pots to see that all was going on well, they were
+received with a cheer by the boys; and their friends were not a
+little astonished to hear that the dinner they had partaken of had
+been entirely prepared and cooked by these little women.
+
+After four months' gardening, Mr. Hardy placed the boys with a
+farmer who lived a mile distant, and made an arrangement for them
+to breakfast there, so that they now remained at work from six in
+the morning until twelve. Here they obtained some idea of
+harnessing and driving horses, of plowing, and of the other farming
+operations.
+
+They now only went four days a week to the carpenter's, for their
+papa had one day said to them when they were alone with him before
+dinner: "Do not put on your working clothes this afternoon, boys; I
+am going to take you out with me, but do not say anything about it
+at dinner. I will tell you why afterward."
+
+Rather surprised, they did as he told them, wondering where they
+could be going. Their father said nothing on the subject until they
+reached the town, which was a quarter of a mile distant from their
+house. Then he said: "Now, boys, you know we are going out to a
+country of which a great portion is still unsettled; and as land is
+a good deal cheaper at a short distance from the inhabited parts,
+we shall perhaps have no one within many miles of us. Now it is
+just possible that at first the Indians may be disposed to be
+troublesome. I do not suppose that they will, but it is just as
+well to be prepared for everything. There is no reason why you boys
+should not be able to shoot as straightly as a man, and I have
+therefore bought two carbines. They are the invention of an
+American named Colt, and have a revolving breech, so that they fire
+six shots each. There is a spare chamber to each, which is very
+quickly shifted in place of the one discharged; so that each of you
+could fire twelve shots in a very short time. They will carry up to
+five hundred yards. They are a new invention, but all accounts
+agree that they are an excellent one. I have obtained leave from
+Mr. Harcourt, who lives three miles from here, to put up a target
+at the foot of some bare hills on his property, and we will walk
+over there twice a week to practice. I used to be considered a
+first-rate shot with a rifle when I was a young man in America, and
+I have got down a rifle for my own use. I do not want you to speak
+about what we are doing to your mamma, or indeed to any one. We
+shall keep our rifles at a cottage near where we shoot, and no one
+need know anything about it. It is not likely that we shall have
+any trouble with the Indians, and it is of no use making your mamma
+uncomfortable by the thought of the probability of such a thing."
+
+As Mr. Hardy spoke the boys were ready to dance with delight, and
+this was increased when they turned into the gunsmith's shop, and
+were shown the arms which their father had bought for this
+expedition.
+
+Mr. Hardy had already an excellent double-barreled gun, and he had
+now purchased a long and heavy rifle carrying a conical ball. In
+addition to the boys' carbines, he had bought them each a light
+double-barreled gun. Besides these were two brace of Colt's
+revolving pistols. These were all new; but there were in addition
+two or three second-hand double-barreled guns for the use of his
+servants, in case of necessity, and three light rifles of the sort
+used for rook-shooting. Altogether, it was quite an armory. The
+carbines were in neat cases; and the boys carried these and a box
+of cartridges, while Mr. Hardy took his rifle; and so they started
+off to their shooting ground.
+
+Here their father instructed them in the use of their revolving
+carbines, and then, after some practice with caps only, allowed
+them to fire a few shots each. The firing was certainly rather
+wild, owing to the difficulty they felt at first of firing without
+shutting their eyes; but after a few weeks' practice they became
+very steady, and in three or four months could make pretty certain
+of a bull's-eye at three hundred yards. Of all this Mrs. Hardy and
+the girls knew nothing; but there was not the same secrecy observed
+with reference to their shotguns. These they took home with them,
+and Mr. Hardy said that he understood that the plains of South
+America swarmed with game, and that, therefore, it was well that
+the boys should learn how to shoot. He insisted, however, that only
+one gun should be taken out at a time, to diminish the danger of
+accidents. After that the boys took out their guns by turns when
+they went to work of a morning, and many a dead blackbird soon
+attested to their improving skill.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE START.
+
+
+It was nearly a year after he had made up his mind to emigrate
+before Mr. Hardy was able to conclude all his arrangements. Then
+came the great business of packing up. This is no trifling matter
+when a family of six persons are going to make a move to a new
+country. Mr. Hardy had at first thought of taking portable
+furniture with him, but had been told by a friend who knew the
+country that every requisite could be obtained at Buenos Ayres, the
+capital of the Argentine Republic, at a far less price than he
+could convey such heavy articles from England. Still the bulk of
+luggage was very large; and the boys, who had now left off their
+farming and carpentering lessons, worked at home at packing-cases,
+and had the satisfaction of turning their new acquirements to a
+useful purpose. In addition to the personal baggage, Mr. Hardy was
+taking with him plows and agricultural implements of English make,
+besides a good stock of seeds of various kinds. These had been sent
+on direct by a sailing ship, starting a fortnight before
+themselves. When their heavy baggage was packed up it too was sent
+off, so as to be put on board the steamer by which they were to
+sail; and then came a long round of visits to bid farewell to all
+their friends. This was a sad business; for although the boys and
+their sisters were alike excited and delighted at the thought of
+the life before them, still they could not but feel sorrowful when
+the time came to leave all the friends they had known so long, and
+the house they had lived in ever since they could remember.
+
+This over Mrs. Hardy and the children went to Liverpool, where they
+were to embark; while Mr. Hardy remained behind for a day or two,
+to see to the sale of the furniture of the house. The day after he
+joined the family they embarked on board the Barbadoes, for Rio and
+Buenos Ayres. Greatly were the girls amused at the tiny little
+cabin allotted to them and their mother--a similar little den being
+taken possession of by Mr. Hardy and the boys. The smartness of the
+vessel, and the style of her fittings, alike impressed and
+delighted them. It has not been mentioned that Sarah, their
+housemaid, accompanied the party. She had been left early an
+orphan, and had been taken as a nursemaid by Mrs. Hardy. As time
+went on, and the little girls no longer required a nurse, she had
+remained as housemaid, and having no friends, now willingly
+accompanied them. Mr. Hardy had, to her great amusement, insisted
+upon her signing a paper, agreeing, upon her master's paying her
+passage, to remain with him for a year; at the end of which time
+she was to be at liberty to marry or to leave them, should she
+choose.
+
+Knowing the scarcity of young Englishwomen in the country that they
+were going to, and the number of Englishmen doing well in the towns
+or as farmers, Mr. Hardy had considered this precaution to be
+absolutely necessary; as otherwise Sarah might have married and
+left them within a month of her arrival. At the end of a year her
+so doing would not matter so much, as by that time the party would-be
+comfortably settled in their new home; whereas during the
+necessary hardship at first, it would be a great comfort having a
+faithful and reliable servant.
+
+The last looks which the party cast toward England, as the Welsh
+coast sank in the distance, were less melancholy than those of most
+emigrants. The young people were all full of hope and excitement;
+while even Mrs. Hardy felt but little disposed to give way to
+sorrow, as it had been arranged that in three or four years, if all
+went well, she should bring her daughters over to England to finish
+their education.
+
+Very lovely was that first evening, and as they sat in a group
+together upon deck the little girls remarked that they did not
+think that the sea was anything like as terrible as they had
+expected, and that they did not feel the least seasick. Their
+father smiled: "Wait a little, my dears; there is an old proverb,
+'Don't halloo until you are out of the wood.'"
+
+The next day was still perfectly calm; and when, toward evening,
+the children were told that they were now fairly getting into the
+Bay of Biscay, they could scarcely believe the intelligence.
+
+"Why, one would think, Maud," her father said, "that you were
+disappointed at its being calm, and that you really wanted a
+storm."
+
+"Oh, papa, I do think it would be great fun; it would be so curious
+not to be able to walk about, and to see everything rolling and
+tumbling. Don't you think so, boys?"
+
+"Yes, I think so, Maud; great fun," Charley said.
+
+"Well, young people," the captain, who had been standing by
+watching the sun, now fast nearing the horizon, and who had
+overheard their remarks, said, "if it is any satisfaction to you, I
+can tell you that you are very likely to have your wish gratified.
+But I question if you will like it as much as you expect."
+
+"Ah, you expect wind, Captain Trevor?" Mr. Hardy said. "I have been
+thinking myself that the almost oppressive stillness of to-day, and
+the look of the sunset, and these black clouds banking up in the
+southwest, meant a change. What does the glass say?"
+
+"It is falling very rapidly," the captain answered. "We are in for
+a sou'wester, and a stiff one too, or I am mistaken."
+
+Now that it appeared likely that their wishes were about to be
+gratified, the young Hardys did not seem so pleased as they had
+expected, although Charley still declared manfully that he was
+quite in earnest, and that he did wish to see a real storm at sea.
+
+As the sun set the party still leaned against the bulwarks watching
+it, and the great bank of clouds, which seemed every moment to be
+rising higher and higher. There was still nearly a dead calm around
+them, and the heavy beat of the paddles, as they lashed the water
+into foam, and the dull thud of the engine, were the only sounds
+that broke the stillness. Now and then, however, a short puff of
+wind ruffled the water, and then died away again.
+
+"Look at that great cloud, papa," Hubert said; "it almost looks as
+if it were alive."
+
+"Yes, Hubert, it is very grand; and there is no doubt about there
+being wind there."
+
+The great cloud bank appeared to be in constant motion. Its shape
+was incessantly shifting and changing; now a great mass would roll
+upward, now sink down again; now the whole body would seem to roll
+over and over upon itself; then small portions would break off from
+the mass, and sail off by themselves, getting thinner and thinner,
+and disappearing at last in the shape of fine streamers.
+Momentarily the whole of the heaving, swelling mass rose higher and
+higher. It was very grand, but it was a terrible grandeur; and the
+others were quite inclined to agree with Ethel, who shrank close to
+her father, and put her hand in his, saying, "I don't like that
+cloud, papa; it frightens me."
+
+At this moment Mrs. Hardy, who had been down below arranging her
+cabin, came up to the group. "What a dark cloud, Frank; and how it
+moves. Are we going to have a storm, do you think?"
+
+"Well, Clara, I think that we are in for a gale; and if you will
+take my advice, you will go down at once while it is calm, and see
+that the trunks, and everything that can roll about, are securely
+fastened up. I will come down and help you. Boys, you had better go
+down and see that everything is snug in our cabin."
+
+In a quarter of an hour the necessary arrangements were completed,
+but even in that short time they could feel that a change was
+taking place. There was now a steady but decided rolling motion,
+and the young ones laughed as they found it difficult to walk
+steadily along the cabin.
+
+Upon reaching the deck they saw that the smooth surface of the sea
+was broken up by a long swell, that the wind now came in short but
+sharp puffs, that the bank of clouds covered nearly half the sky,
+and that the detached scud was now flying overhead. The previous
+stillness was gone; and between the sudden gusts, the roar of the
+wind in the upper region could be heard. The sun had set now, and a
+pall of deep blackness seemed to hang from the cloud down to the
+sea; but at the line where cloud and water touched, a gleam of dim
+white light appeared.
+
+In preparation for the coming storm, the sailors had put on thick
+waterproof coats. Many of the passengers had gone below, and those
+who remained had followed the sailors' example, and had wrapped
+themselves up in mackintoshes.
+
+Every moment the gusts increased in frequency and power, and the
+regular line of swell became broken up into confused white-headed
+waves. The white gleam under the dark cloud grew wider and broader,
+and at last, with a roar like that of a thousand wild beasts, the
+gale broke upon them. Just before this Mr. Hardy had taken Mrs.
+Hardy and the girls below, promising the latter that they should
+come up later for a peep out, if they still wished it. Charley and
+Hubert were leaning against the bulwark when the gale struck them.
+
+For a moment they were blinded and half-choked by the force and
+fury of the spray and wind, and crouched down behind their shelter
+to recover themselves. Then, with a hearty laugh at their drenched
+appearance, they made their way to the mainmast, and then, holding
+on by the belaying pins, they were able to look fairly out on the
+gale. It was dark--so dark that they could scarcely see as far as
+the foremast. Around, the sea was white with foam; the wind blew so
+fiercely that they could scarcely hear each other's voices, even
+when they shouted, and the steamer labored heavily against the fast
+rising sea. Here Mr. Hardy joined them, and for some little time
+clung there, watching the increasing fury of the gale; then,
+drenched and almost confused by the strife of winds and water that
+they had been watching, they made their way, with great difficulty,
+down into the cabin.
+
+Here the feeling of seasickness, which the excitement of the scene
+had kept off, increased rapidly; and they were glad to slip off
+their upper clothes, and to throw themselves upon their berths
+before the paroxysm of sickness came on.
+
+When questioned afterward as to the events of the next thirty-six
+hours, the young Hardys were all obliged to confess that that time
+was a sort of blank in their memory--a sort of horrible nightmare,
+when one moment they seemed to be on their heads, and the next upon
+their feet, but never lying down in a comfortable position, when
+sometimes the top of the cabin seemed under their feet, sometimes
+the floor over their head. Then, for a change, everything would go
+round and round; the noise, too, the groaning and the thumping and
+the cracking, the thud of the waves and the thump of the paddles,
+and the general quivering, and shaking, and creaking, and
+bewilderment--altogether it was a most unpleasant nightmare. They
+had all dim visions of Mr. Hardy coming in several times to see
+after them, and to give them a cup of tea, and to say something
+cheering to them; and all four had a distinct idea that they had
+many times wished themselves dead.
+
+Upon the second morning after the storm began it showed some signs
+of abating, and Mr. Hardy said to his sons, "Now, boys, make an
+effort and come upon deck; it's no use lying there; the fresh air
+will do you good." Two dismal groans were the only response to this
+appeal.
+
+"Yes, I know that you both feel very bad, and that it is difficult
+to turn out; still it is worth making the effort, and you will be
+very glad of it afterward. Come, jump up, else I shall empty the
+water-jug over you. There, you need not take much trouble with your
+dressing," he went on, as the boys, seeing that he was in earnest,
+turned out of their berths with a grievous moan. "Just hold on by
+something, and get your heads over the basin; I will empty the jugs
+on them. There now you will feel better; slip on your clothes and
+come up."
+
+It was hard work for Charley and Hubert to obey orders, for the
+ship rolled so tremendously that they could only proceed with their
+dressing by fits and starts, and were more than once interrupted by
+attacks of their weary seasickness. However, their father stayed
+with them, helping and joking with them until they were ready to go
+up. Then, taking them by the arm, he assisted them up the stairs to
+the deck.
+
+Miserable as the boys felt, they could not suppress an exclamation
+of admiration at the magnificent scene before them. The sea was
+tossed up in great masses of water, which, as they neared the ship,
+threatened to overwhelm them, but which, as she rose on their
+summits, passed harmlessly under her, hurling, however, tons of
+water upon her deck. The wind was still blowing fiercely, but a
+rift in the clouds above, through, which the sun threw down a
+bright ray of light upon the tossing water, showed that the gale
+was breaking.
+
+The excitement of the scene, the difficulty of keeping their feet,
+and the influence of the rushing wind, soon had the effect which
+their father predicted. The boys' looks brightened, their courage
+returned; and although they still had an occasional relapse of
+sickness, they felt quite different beings, and would not have
+returned to the blank misery of their cabins upon any consideration.
+They were soon able to eat a piece of dry toast, which Mr. Hardy
+brought them up with a cup of tea at breakfast-time, and to enjoy a
+basin of soup at twelve o'clock, after which they pronounced
+themselves as cured.
+
+By the afternoon the force of the wind had greatly abated, and
+although a heavy sea still ran, the motion of the vessel was
+perceptibly easier. The sun, too, shone out brightly and cheeringly,
+and Mr. Hardy was able to bring the little girls, who had not suffered
+so severely as their brothers, upon deck. Two more days of fine
+weather quite recruited all the party; and great was their enjoyment
+as the Barbadoes entered the Tagus, and, steaming between its
+picturesque banks and past Cintra, dropped her anchor off Lisbon.
+
+As our object, however, is to relate the adventures of our young
+settlers upon the Pampas of La Plata, we must not delay to describe
+the pleasure they enjoyed in this their first experience in foreign
+lands, nor to give an account of their subsequent voyage across the
+Atlantic, or their admiration at the superb harbor of Rio. A few
+days' further steaming and they arrived at the harbor of Buenos
+Ayres, where the two great rivers, the Uruguay and the Parana,
+unite to form the wide sheet of water called the river La Plata. It
+was night when the Barbadoes dropped her anchor, and it was not
+until the morning that they obtained their first view of their
+future home.
+
+Very early were they astir, and as soon as it was broad daylight
+all four of the young ones were up on deck. Their first exclamation
+was one of disappointment. The shores were perfectly flat, and,
+seen from the distance at which they were anchored, little except
+the spires of the churches and the roofs of a few of the more lofty
+houses could be seen. After the magnificent harbor of Rio, this
+flat, uninteresting coast was most disappointing.
+
+"What a distance we are anchored from the shore!" Hubert said, when
+they had recovered a little from their first feeling. "It must be
+three or four miles off."
+
+"Not so much as that, Hubert," Maud, who was just a little fond of
+contradicting, said; "not more than two miles, I should think."
+
+Hubert stuck to his opinion; and as the captain came on deck they
+referred the matter to him.
+
+"The distance of objects across water is very deceiving," he said.
+"It is from eight to nine miles to those buildings you see."
+
+Maud looked rather crestfallen, and Charley asked, "Why do we
+anchor such a long way off, captain?"
+
+"Because the shore is so flat that there is no water for us to get
+in any closer. In a couple of hours you will see boats coming out
+to fetch you in; and unless it happens to be high tide, even these
+cannot get to the beach, and you will have to land in carts."
+
+"In carts, Captain Trevor?" they all repeated; "that will be a
+strange way of landing."
+
+"Yes, it is," the captain answered. "I think that we can safely say
+that the Argentine Republic is the only country in the world where
+the only way to land at its chief city is in a cart."
+
+The captain's boat was by this time lowered, and he at once started
+for shore with his papers. Soon after ten o'clock he returned,
+followed by a number of boats. He brought also a letter to Mr.
+Hardy from an old friend who had been settled for some years near
+Buenos Ayres, and whose advice had decided him to fix upon that
+country as the scene of his labors. It contained a warm welcome,
+and a hearty congratulation upon their safe arrival. This letter
+had been written two or three days previously, and had been left at
+the office of the steamship company. It said, however, that the
+writer would hear of the arrival of the steamer, and would have
+everything in readiness to take them out to his place upon their
+landing.
+
+Mr. Hardy had been in frequent communication with his friend from
+the time that he had determined to emigrate, and Mr. Thompson's
+letters had contained the warmest assurance of a welcome, and an
+invitation to make his house their home until they had one of their
+own to go into; and now this kind letter, coming off so instantly
+after their arrival, cheered them all much, and made them feel less
+strange and to some extent at home in the new country at once.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+A NEW LIFE.
+
+
+Tide was fortunately high, and the boat containing the Hardys and
+the lighter portion of their luggage was able to get up to the
+landing place without the carts being called into use. As they
+approached the land they were hailed in a hearty voice, and
+greetings were exchanged between Mr. Hardy and his friend Mr.
+Thompson--a sunburnt-looking man with a great beard--in a Panama
+hat and in a suit of spotless white.
+
+"Why, Mrs. Hardy," he said as they landed, "you hardly look a day
+older than you did when I last saw you--let me see--fourteen years
+ago, just as this big fellow was beginning to walk. And now, if you
+please, we will be off as soon as we can, for my estancia is
+fifteen miles away. I have made the best arrangements I could for
+getting out; but roads are not a strong point in this country, and
+we seldom trust ourselves in wheeled vehicles far out of the town.
+You told me in your letters, Hardy, that the young people could all
+ride. I have horses in any number, and have got in two very quiet
+ones, with side-saddles, which I borrowed from some neighbors for
+your girls; but if they prefer it, they can ride in the trap with
+Mrs. Hardy."
+
+"Oh, no, please," Maud said; "I had much rather ride."
+
+Ethel said nothing, and her mamma saw that she would rather go with
+her. Accordingly, Mrs. Hardy, Ethel. Sarah, and some of the lighter
+bags were packed into a light carriage, Mr. Thompson himself taking
+the reins, as he said he could not trust them to any one but
+himself. Mr. Hardy, the boys, and Maud mounted the horses prepared
+for them, and two of Mr. Thompson's men stowed the heavier trunks
+into a bullock cart, which was to start at once, but which would
+not reach the estancia until late at night.
+
+As the party rode through the town they were struck with the
+narrowness and straightness of the streets, and at the generally
+European look of everything; and Mr. Thompson told them that nearly
+half the population of Buenos Ayres are European. The number of
+people upon horseback also surprised our young travelers; but
+horses cost only thirty shillings or two pounds, and grass is so
+abundant that the expense of their food is next to nothing;
+consequently every one rides--even shepherds look after their sheep
+on horseback. The horses seemed very quiet, for in front of most of
+the offices the horses of the merchants could be seen fastened by a
+head rope to a ring, grooms not being considered a necessity.
+
+Once out of the town, the riding horses broke into a canter; for
+the road was so good that the horses in the light carriage were
+able to go along at full speed. As they proceeded they passed many
+houses of the rich merchants of the place, and all were charmed
+with the luxuriance and beauty of the gardens. Orange and lemon
+trees scented the air with their delicious perfumes; bananas, tree
+ferns, and palms towered above them; lovely butterflies of immense
+size, and bright little humming-birds, flitted about among a
+countless variety of flowers. The delight of the young ones was
+unbounded.
+
+Presently they left the mansions and gardens behind and drove out
+fairly into the country. Upon either side the plains stretched away
+as far as the eye could reach, in some parts under the plow, but
+far more generally carpeted with bright green grass and
+many-colored wild flowers. Everywhere could be seen droves of
+horses and cattle, while dotted here and there over the plain were
+the estancias of the proprietors.
+
+It was a most delightful ride. The horses went very quietly, but
+the boys found, to their surprise, that they would not trot, their
+pace being a loose, easy canter. The last five miles of the
+distance were not so enjoyable to the party in the carriage, for
+the road had now become a mere track, broken in many places into
+ruts, into which the most careful driving of Mr. Thompson could not
+prevent the wheels going with jolts that threatened to shake its
+occupants from their places, and they felt as if every bone in
+their bodies were broken by the time they drew up at their host's
+estancia.
+
+Here Mrs. Thompson came out to greet them. She had been a great
+friend of Mrs. Hardy in their young days, and great was their
+pleasure at again meeting after so long a separation. Mr. Thompson
+had already, explained that his wife would have come over to meet
+them, but that at the time he had left home it was not known that
+the Barbadoes had arrived. She was due, and, as a measure of
+precaution, the horses and cart had for the last two days been in
+readiness, but the exact date of her arrival was of course
+uncertain.
+
+Mr. Thompson's estancia was a large and picturesque building. It
+was entirely surrounded by a wide veranda, so that at all hours of
+the day relief could be obtained from the glare of the sun. In
+front was an extensive garden; and as Mr. Thompson had made it one
+of his first objects when he built his house to plant a large
+number of tropical trees and shrubs, these had now attained a
+considerable size, and afforded a delicious shade. At a short
+distance behind the house were the houses of the men, and the
+corrals, or enclosures, for the cattle.
+
+The interior was handsomely furnished in the European style, except
+that the floors were uncarpeted, and were composed of polished
+boards. Everywhere were signs that the proprietor was a prosperous
+and wealthy man. Mr. Thompson had only one son, a lad of about the
+same age as Charles Hardy. To his care Mrs. Thompson now assigned
+the boys, while she conducted Mrs. Hardy and her daughters to their
+rooms.
+
+In half an hour the party reassembled at dinner, to which they all
+did ample justice, for their long row and ride had given them the
+keenest of appetites. They were waited upon by an Italian
+man-servant; and Mrs. Thompson said that there were a good many of
+this nation in Buenos Ayres, and that, although they were not
+considered good hands for rough work, they made excellent servants
+many of them having been waiters in hotels or stewards on board
+ship before coming out.
+
+During dinner the conversation turned chiefly upon English friends
+and affairs, and upon the events of the voyage. After it was over
+George Thompson proposed to the boys to take a stroll round the
+place before it became dark. The gentlemen lit their cigars and
+took their seats under the veranda; and the two ladies, with Maud
+and Ethel, went out into the garden. The conversation of Mr. Hardy
+and his friend turned, of course, upon the country, its position
+and prospects, and upon the advantage which the various districts
+offered to newcomers. Presently the dusk came on, followed rapidly
+by darkness, and in half an hour Ethel came to summon them to tea.
+The boys had already come in, and were full of delight at the
+immense herds of cattle they had seen. As they sat down to the
+tea-table, covered with delicate English china, with a kettle over
+a spirit-lamp in the center, and lit with the subdued light of two
+shaded moderator lamps, Maud said, "It is not one bit like what I
+expected, papa, after all you have told us about hardships and
+working; it seems just like England, except the trees and flowers
+and butterflies."
+
+"Do not be afraid, Maud," her father said, laughing--for her voice
+had a tinge of disappointment in it--"you won't be cheated out of
+your hardship and your work, I promise you. Mrs. Thompson will tell
+you that it was a very different sort of place when she first came
+here."
+
+"Yes, indeed," Mrs. Thompson said, smiling; "this was considered a
+very lonely place when we first settled here. We had a little hut
+with two rooms, and it was more than six months before I could get
+a woman servant to come out, and then it was only one of our
+shepherds' wives, who knew nothing of cooking, and who was only
+useful in drawing the water and sweeping the floors. In time the
+country became more settled, and there are stations now sixty or
+seventy miles beyond us."
+
+The next week was spent in riding over the estate, which consisted
+of four square leagues--that is to say, was six miles each way--and
+in examining the arrangements of the enclosures for the cattle. At
+the end of that time Mr. Hardy started on a tour of inspection
+through the provinces most likely to suit, provided with numerous
+letters of introduction from his host. While he was away the boys
+were to assist upon the estate, and to accustom themselves to the
+work and duties of the life they were to lead. Into this they
+entered with the greatest zest, and were in the saddle from morning
+till night, getting more and more sunburnt from constant exposure,
+until, as Mr. Thompson told them, they looked like two young
+gauchos. The gauchos are the natives of the country. They are
+fine-looking men, with Spanish faces. Their dress is very
+picturesque. They wear loose calzoncillas or drawers, worked and
+fringed round the bottom. Above this is a sort of shawl, so
+arranged that it has the effect of very loose trousers. These
+shawls are generally of bright colors, woven in stripes, and
+sometimes of black cloth edged with scarlet. The white calzoncillas
+show below this garment, and above a colored flannel shirt is worn.
+The boots are long and are made of undressed leather. They wear a
+broad leathern belt, with pockets in it; in this a knife, too, is
+always stuck. Upon _fete_ days they come out with gay silver
+ornaments upon themselves and their horse-trappings. Their saddles
+are very clumsy and heavy, and are seldom used by Europeans, who,
+as Mr. Hardy had done, generally bring English saddles from home.
+After an absence of a month Mr. Hardy returned with the welcome
+news that he had made his choice, and had bought at the public
+auction a tract of four square leagues, upon a river some twenty
+miles to the south of the town of Rosario, and consequently only a
+few days' journey from Buenos Ayres. Mr. Thompson looked a little
+grave when he heard the location of the property, but he only said
+that he was very glad that his friend had fixed upon a spot which
+would make it easy for the families to see something of each other.
+After the first greetings were over Mr. Hardy proceeded to satisfy
+the curiosity of his hearers as to the new property.
+
+"It is six miles square," he said, "that is, about twenty-five
+thousand acres, and I bought it for about sixpence an acre. There
+is a good-sized stream runs through it; there are a good many
+trees, considering that it is out on the Pampas; there are several
+elevations which give a fine view over the plain, and upon one of
+these our future home will stand. A small stream falls into the
+larger one, and will, I think, be useful. There is an abundance of
+game; ducks, geese, and swans swarm upon the river. I saw a good
+many ostriches out on the plains. And, lastly, the soil appears to
+be excellent. A great point is, that it is only distant twenty
+miles from Rosario, a most rising town; so that the value of the
+land is sure to increase yearly, as new settlers come around us."
+
+"That is a most important point," Mr. Thompson said. "Rosario is
+the most rising town in the country, and the land around it is
+certain to be very much sought after in a few years."
+
+"Are there any settlements near, Frank?" Mrs. Hardy asked.
+
+"The next plot to ours belongs to three young Englishmen, and the
+ground between us and Rosario is also principally occupied by
+English; so that we shall have neighbors near, and I do not suppose
+that it will be long before we have them all round us."
+
+"If the advantages of the place are so great, Frank, how is it that
+you have got it so very cheaply? I understood from Mr. Thompson
+that land in a rising neighborhood, and that was likely to increase
+in value, was worth two or three shillings, or even more, an acre."
+
+Mr. Hardy hesitated. "Well, Clara, the land is at present upon the
+extreme verge of the settlements, and the Indians are apt sometimes
+to be a little troublesome, and to drive off a few horses or
+cattle. No doubt the thing has been exaggerated; still there is
+something in it, and the consequence is, people are rather afraid
+to bid, and I have got this splendid tract of land for about
+twenty-five hundred dollars; and, not improbably, in ten years it
+may be worth ten times as much."
+
+"A great proportion of these Indian tales are built up upon very
+small foundations," Mr. Thompson said cheeringly; and Mrs. Hardy's
+face, which had been a little serious, cleared up again, and in
+listening to her husband's account of his travels, she forgot all
+about the Indians. The boys, however, by no means did so; and as
+they were going to bed Charley said: "I think there is some chance
+of a row with the Indians, Hubert, for I noticed that Mr. Thompson
+looked grave when papa first said where he had bought the land.
+Depend upon it, we shall have some fun with them after all." They
+would have thought it still more likely had they heard the
+conversation between their father and Mr. Thompson after the ladies
+had gone to bed.
+
+"Why, my dear Hardy, how came you, with a wife and family, to think
+of buying land so exposed to the Indian attacks? Every season, when
+they come down, they sweep off the horses and cattle from the
+outlying settlements, and murder the people if they get a chance. I
+look upon it as madness."
+
+"There is a good deal in what you say, Thompson, and I thought the
+whole matter over before I bought it, There is a risk--a great
+risk, if you like; but I hear the Indians seldom attack the houses
+of the settlers if they are well prepared and armed. They do
+occasionally, but very seldom. I shall be well prepared and well
+armed, and have therefore no fear at all for our personal safety.
+As to our animals, we must protect them as well as we can, and take
+our chance. It is only for two or three years at most. After that
+we shall have settlements beyond and around us; and if emigration
+keeps on, as I anticipate, and if, as I believe, Rosario is to
+become a very large and important place, our land will eventually
+be worth five dollars an acre, at the very lowest. I shall take
+care not to invest my whole capital in animals, so that I cannot be
+ruined in one blow. I think that at the end of five years you will
+agree with me that I have done wisely."
+
+"I have no doubt that your property will increase very much in
+value, as you say, Hardy, and that in the long run your speculation
+will be a very successful one; but it is a terrible risk, I think."
+
+"I do not think so, Thompson. We shall be a pretty strong party: we
+shall have certainly two men besides ourselves. The boys could
+bring down their man at three hundred yards, and I should do
+considerable execution among a body of Indians at six or seven; so
+I have no fear--not the least in the world."
+
+In another two days Mr. Hardy and the boys, accompanied by Mr.
+Thompson, went down to Buenos Ayres, and took up their quarters at
+the hotel for a night. At parting, Mr. Thompson presented them with
+a couple of fine dogs, which he had bred from English mastiffs: Mr.
+Hardy had brought a brace of fine retrievers with him. Then, with a
+hearty adieu and much hand-shaking, they said "Good-by" as the
+steamer moved off from the shore. The heavy luggage was to follow
+in a sailing vessel upon the following day.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE PAMPAS.
+
+
+The voyage up the river Parana was marked by no particular
+incident. The distance to Rosario from Buenos Ayres is about two
+hundred and fifty miles, which was performed by the steamer in
+about a day and a half. The river is nearly twenty miles in
+breadth, and is completely studded by islands. The scenery is flat
+and uninteresting, and the banks but poorly wooded. Our travelers
+were therefore glad when they arrived at Rosario. The boys were
+disappointed at the aspect of the town, which, although a rising
+place, contained under a thousand inhabitants, and looked miserably
+poor and squalid after Buenos Ayres. Here they were met by a
+gentleman to whom Mr. Thompson had introduced Mr. Hardy, and with
+whom he had stayed on his first visit to Rosario. He had brought
+horses for themselves, and bullock carts for their luggage.
+
+"What! are these your boys, Mr. Hardy? I had not expected to have
+seen such big fellows. Why, they will be men in no time."
+
+Charley and Hubert deserved Mr. Percy's commendation. They were now
+sixteen and fifteen years old respectively, and were remarkably
+strong, well-grown lads, looking at least a year older than they
+really were. In a few minutes the luggage was packed in two bullock
+carts, and they were on their way out to Mr. Percy's station, which
+was about halfway to the camp of Mr. Hardy. The word camp in the
+pampas means station or property; it is a corruption of the Spanish
+word _campos_, literally plains or meadows.
+
+Here they found that Mr. Percy had most satisfactorily performed
+the commission with which Mr. Hardy had entrusted him. He had
+bought a couple of the rough country bullock carts, three pair of
+oxen accustomed to the yoke, half a dozen riding horses, two milch
+cows, and a score of sheep and cattle to supply the larder. He had
+hired four men--a stock-keeper named Lopez, who was called the
+capitaz or head man, a tall, swarthy fellow, whose father was a
+Spaniard, and his mother a native woman; two laborers, the one a
+German, called Hans, who had been some time in the colony, the
+other an Irishman, Terence Kelly, whose face the boys remembered at
+once, as having come out in the same ship with themselves. The last
+man was an American, one of those wandering fellows who are never
+contented to remain anywhere, but are always pushing on, as if they
+thought that the further they went the better they should fare. He
+was engaged as carpenter and useful man, and there were few things
+to which he could not turn his hand. Mr. Hardy was pleased with
+their appearance; they were all powerful men, accustomed to work.
+Their clothes were of the roughest and most miscellaneous kind, a
+mixture of European and Indian garb, with the exception of Terence,
+who still clung to the long blue-tailed coat and brass buttons of
+the "ould country."
+
+They waited the next day at Mr. Percy's station, and started the
+next morning before daylight, as they had still ten miles to
+travel, and were desirous of getting as early to the ground as
+possible.
+
+The boys were in the highest spirits at being at last really out
+upon the pampas, and as day fairly broke they had a hearty laugh at
+the appearance of their cavalcade. There was no road or track of
+any kind, and consequently, instead of following in a file, as they
+would have done in any other country, the party straggled along in
+a confused body. First came the animals--the sheep, bullocks, and
+cows. Behind these rode Lopez, in, his gaucho dress, and a long
+whip in his hand, which he cracked from time to time, with a report
+like that of a pistol--not that there was any difficulty in driving
+the animals at a pace sufficient to keep well ahead of the bullock
+carts, for the sheep of the pampas are very much more active beasts
+than their English relations. Accustomed to feed on the open
+plains, they travel over large extent of ground, and their ordinary
+pace is four miles an hour. When frightened, they can go for many
+miles at a speed which will tax a good horse to keep up with. The
+first bullock cart was driven by Hans, who sat upon the top of a
+heap of baggage, his head covered with a very old and battered
+Panama hat, through several broad holes in which his red hair
+bristled out in a most comic fashion, and over his blue flannel
+shirt a large red beard flowed almost to his waist. Terence was
+walking by the side of the second cart in corduroy breeches and
+gaiters and blue coat, with a high black hat, battered and bruised
+out of all shape, on his head. In his hand he held a favorite
+shillalah, which he had brought with him from his native land, and
+with the end of which he occasionally poked the ribs of the oxen,
+with many Irish ejaculations, which no doubt alarmed the animals
+not a little. The Yankee rode sometimes near one, sometimes by
+another, seldom exchanging a word with any one. He wore a fur cap
+made of fox's skin; a faded blanket, with a hole cut in the middle
+for the head to go through, fell from his shoulders to his knees.
+He and Lopez each led a couple of spare horses. The mastiffs
+trotted along by the horses, and the two fine retrievers, Dash and
+Flirt, galloped about over the plains. The plain across which they
+were traveling was a flat, broken only by slight swells, and a tree
+here and there; and the young Hardys wondered not a little how
+Lopez, who acted as guide, knew the direction he was to take.
+
+After three hours' riding Lopez pointed to a rather larger clump of
+trees than usual in the distance, and said, "That is the camp."
+
+"Hurrah," shouted the boys. "May we ride on, papa?"
+
+"Yes, boys, I will ride on with you." And off they set, leaving
+their party to follow quietly.
+
+"Mind how you gallop, boys; the ground is honeycombed with
+armadillo holes, and if your horse treads in one you will go over
+his head."
+
+"I don't think that I should do that," Charley, who had a more than
+sufficiently good opinion of himself, said; "I can stick on pretty
+tightly, and--" he had not time to finish his sentence, for his
+horse suddenly seemed to go down on his head, and Charley was sent
+flying two or three yards through the air, descending with a heavy
+thud upon the soft ground.
+
+He was up in a moment, unhurt, except for a knock on the eye
+against his gun, which he was carrying before him; and after a
+minute's rueful look he joined heartily in the shouts of laughter
+of his father and brother at his expense, "Ah, Charley, brag is a
+good dog, but holdfast is a better. I never saw a more literal
+proof of the saying. There, jump up again, and I need not say look
+out for holes."
+
+They were soon off again, but this time at a more moderate pace.
+This fall was not, by a very long way, the only one which they had
+before they had been six months upon the plains; for the armadillos
+were most abundant, and in the long grass it was impossible to see
+their holes. In addition to the armadillos, the ground is in many
+paces honeycombed by the bischachas, which somewhat in size and
+appearance resemble rabbits, and by a little burrowing owl.
+
+The Hardys soon crossed a little stream, running east to fall into
+the main stream, which formed the boundary of the property upon
+that side; and Mr. Hardy told the boys that they were now upon
+their own land. There was another hurrah, and then, regardless of
+the risk of falls, they dashed up to the little clump of trees,
+which stood upon slightly rising ground. Here they drew rein, and
+looked round upon the country which was to be their home. As far as
+the eye could reach a flat plain, with a few slight elevations and
+some half-dozen trees, extended. The grass was a brilliant green,
+for it was now the month of September. Winter was over, and the
+plain, refreshed by the rains, wore a bright sheet of green,
+spangled with innumerable flowers. Objects could be seen moving in
+the distance, and a short examination enabled Mr. Hardy to decide
+that they were ostriches, to the delight of the boys, who promised
+themselves an early hunt.
+
+"Where have you fixed for the house, papa?" Hubert asked.
+
+"There, where those three trees are growing upon the highest swell
+you can see, about a mile and a half further. We will go on at
+once; the others will see us."
+
+Another ten minutes took them to the place Mr. Hardy had pointed
+out, and the boys both agreed that nothing could be better.
+
+At the foot of the slope the river which formed the eastern
+boundary flowed, distant a quarter of a mile or so from the top of
+the rise. To the right another stream came down between the slope
+and another less elevated rise beyond. This stream had here rather
+a rapid fall, and was distant about three hundred yards from the
+intended site of the house. The main river was thirty or forty
+yards across, and was now full of water; and upon its surface the
+boys could see flocks of ducks, geese, and other birds. In some
+places the bank was bare, but in others thick clumps of bushes and
+brushwood grew beside it.
+
+They now took off the saddles and bridles from their horses, and
+allowed them to range as they pleased, knowing that the native
+horses were accustomed to be let free, and that there was no fear
+of their straying away. "Now, boys," Mr. Hardy said, "let us begin
+by getting our first dinner. You go straight down to the water; I
+will keep to the right. You take Dash, I will take Flirt."
+
+In another ten minutes the reports of the guns followed close upon
+each other, and the boys had the satisfaction of knocking down two
+geese and eight ducks, which Dash brought ashore, beside others
+which escaped. In five minutes more they heard a shout from their
+father, who had bagged two more geese and three ducks. "That will
+do, boys; we have got plenty for the next day or two, and we must
+not alarm them by too much slaughter."
+
+"Four geese and eleven ducks, papa, in five minutes," the boys
+said, when they joined Mr. Hardy; "that is not bad shooting to
+begin with."
+
+"Not at all, boys. What with wild fowl and armadillos, I think that
+at a pinch we could live for some time upon the produce of the
+estate."
+
+"You don't mean to say, papa, that they eat the armadillos?" Hubert
+said with a look of suspicion.
+
+"They do indeed, Hubert, and I am told that they are not at all bad
+eating. Now let us go up to the rise again; our carts must be
+nearly up."
+
+By the time they reached the three trees they found that the rest
+of the cavalcade was within a quarter of a mile, and in a few
+minutes they came up.
+
+The cattle and sheep required no attending. Immediately they found
+that they were not required to go any further, they scattered and
+began to graze. The oxen were unyoked from the carts, and all hands
+set-to to unload the miscellaneous collection of goods which had
+been brought up. Only the things which Mr. Hardy had considered as
+most indispensable for present use had been brought on, for the
+steamer from Buenos Ayres did not carry heavy goods, and the
+agricultural implements and other baggage were to come up in a
+sailing vessel, and were not expected to arrive for another week.
+
+The carts contained three small portmanteaus with the clothes of
+Mr. Hardy and the boys, and a large case containing the carbines,
+rifles, and ammunition. There was a number of canisters with tea,
+coffee, sugar, salt, and pepper; a sack of flour; some cooking pots
+and frying pans, tin plates, dishes, and mugs; two sacks of coal
+and a quantity of firewood; shovels, carpenter's tools, a sickle,
+the framework of a hut with two doors and windows, three rolls of
+felt, a couple of dozen wooden posts, and two large coils of iron
+wire. While the others were busy unloading the German had cut some
+turf and built a rough fireplace, and had soon a bright fire
+blazing.
+
+"Shall we pluck the ducks?" Charley asked.
+
+"I reckon we can manage quicker than that," the Yankee said; and
+taking up one of the ducks, he cut off its head and pinions; in
+another minute he had roughly skinned it, and threw it to the
+German, who cut it up and put the pieces into the frying pan. A
+similar process was performed with the other ducks, a little pepper
+and salt shaken over them, and in a wonderfully short time the
+first batch was ready. All drew round and sat down on the grass;
+the tin plates were distributed but were only used by Mr. Hardy and
+his sons, the others simply taking the joints into their hands and
+cutting off pieces with their knives. The operation of skinning the
+fowls had not been pleasant to look at, and would at any other time
+have taken away the boys' appetites; but their long ride had made
+them too hungry to be particular. The result of this primitive
+cooking was pronounced to be excellent; and after drinking a mug of
+tea all felt ready for work.
+
+"What is to be done first, papa?"
+
+"The first thing is to get these posts into the ground, and to get
+up a wire fence, so as to make an enclosure for the animals at
+night. We will put in five posts each side, at ten yards apart;
+that will take eighteen posts. With the others we can make a
+division to separate the sheep from the cattle. Unless we do this
+some of them may take it into their heads to start off in the night
+and return to their old home."
+
+A spot was soon chosen between the house and the stream on the
+right. The distance was soon measured and marked; and while Hans
+carried down the heavy posts one by one on his shoulder, the others
+went to work. The soil was soft and rich, and the holes were dug to
+the required depth in a shorter time than would have been
+considered possible. The wire was stretched and fastened, and
+before sunset everything was in readiness. The animals were driven
+in, and the entrance, which was narrow, was blocked up with
+brushwood from the river. Then followed another half-hour's work in
+getting up a small shelter with the cases and some of the felting,
+for Mr. Hardy and his sons. By this time all were really tired, and
+were glad when Hans summoned them to another meal, this time of one
+of the sheep. Then Mr. Hardy, and the boys, taking their mugs of
+tea, retired into the shelter prepared for them, and sat and talked
+over the events of the day, and as to the work for to-morrow; and
+then, wrapping themselves up in their blankets, lay down to sleep,
+listening for some time dreamily to the hum of conversation of the
+men, who were sitting smoking round the fire, and to the hoarse
+roar of the innumerable frogs in the stream below.
+
+In the morning they were up and abroad with daylight, and a cup of
+hot coffee and a piece of bread prepared them for work. Mr. Hardy,
+his boys, and the Yankee set-to upon the framework of the two huts;
+while the others went down to the stream and cut a quantity of
+long, coarse rushes, which they made into bundles, and brought up
+to the place of the house in a bullock cart. The framework for the
+huts, which were each about fifteen feet square, was all ready
+fitted and numbered: it took, therefore, a very short time to
+erect; and when one was done Mr. Hardy and the Yankee set-to to
+erect the other at a distance of from forty to fifty yards, while
+Charley and Hubert drove in the nails and secured the work already
+done.
+
+By dinner-time the work was complete, and a perfect stack of rushes
+had been raised in readiness. A great number of long rods had been
+cut from the bushes, and as the most of them were as flexible and
+tough as willows they were well suited for the purpose.
+
+After dinner the whole party united their labor to get one of the
+huts finished. The rods were split in two, and were nailed at
+intervals across the rafters of the roof. Upon them the long rushes
+were laid, and over all the felt was nailed. The sides were treated
+in the same way, except that the rushes were woven in and out
+between the wattles, so as to make quite a close, compact wall, no
+felt being nailed on it. The other house was treated in the same
+way; and it was not until the third night that both huts were
+finished and ready for occupancy.
+
+Mr. Hardy and his sons then took possession of the one near the
+brow of the hill. This was to be merely a temporary abode, to be
+removed when the house was built. The men had that lower down, and
+rather nearer to the cattle. Beds of rushes were piled up in three
+corners, and the boys thought that they had never passed such a
+delicious night as their first in their new house. The next day Mr.
+Hardy told his boys that they should take a holiday and ride over
+the place.
+
+The press of work was over, and things would now settle down in a
+regular way. Hans and Terence had taken a contract to dig the holes
+for the posts of the strong fence which was to surround the house,
+including a space of a hundred yards square. This precaution was
+considered to be indispensable as a defense against the Indians.
+Seth, the Yankee, had similarly engaged to dig a well close to the
+house. No supervision of them was therefore necessary. Lopez was to
+accompany them. Each took a double-barreled gun and a revolver. The
+day was very fine--about as hot as upon a warm day in June in
+England. Mr. Hardy proposed that they should first ride westerly as
+far as the property extended, six miles from the river; that they
+should then go to the south until they reached that boundary, and
+should follow that to the river, by whose banks they should return,
+and bring back a bag of wild fowl for the larder. Quite a pack of
+dogs accompanied them--the two mastiffs, the setters, and four
+dogs, two of which belonged to Lopez, and the others to Hans and
+Seth: these last, seeing that their masters had no intention of
+going out, determined to join the party upon their own account.
+
+These dogs were all mongrels of no particular breed, but were
+useful in hunting, and were ready to attack a fox, an animal which
+swarms upon the pampas, and does great damage among the young
+lambs.
+
+For the first three or four miles nothing was seen save the
+boundless green plain, extending in all directions; and then, upon
+ascending a slight rise, they saw in the dip before them two
+ostriches. Almost simultaneously the creatures caught sight of
+their enemies, and went off at a prodigious rate, followed by the
+dogs and horsemen. For a time their pace was so fast that their
+pursuers gained but little upon them. Presently, however, the dogs
+gained upon one of them, and, by their barking and snapping at it,
+impeded its movements. The horsemen were close together, and the
+boys had drawn out their revolvers to fire, when their father
+cried, "Don't fire, boys! Watch Lopez."
+
+At this moment the gaucho took from the pommel of his saddle two
+balls like large bullets, connected with a long cord. These he
+whirled round his head, and launched them at the ostrich. They
+struck his legs, and twined themselves round and round, and in
+another moment the bird was down in the dust. Before Lopez could
+leap to the ground the dogs had killed it, and the gaucho pulled
+out the tail feathers and handed them to Mr. Hardy. "Is the flesh
+good?" Mr. Hardy asked.
+
+"No, senor; we can eat it when there is nothing else to be had, but
+it is not good."
+
+"I am rather glad the other got away," Hubert said. "It seems cruel
+to kill them merely for the sake of the feathers."
+
+"Yes, Hubert; but the feathers are really worth money," Mr. Hardy
+said. "I should be the last person to countenance the killing of
+anything merely for the sake of killing; but one kills an ostrich
+as one would an animal with valuable fur. But what is that?"
+
+As he spoke the dogs halted in front of a patch of bush, barking
+loudly. The retrievers and the native dogs kept at a prudent
+distance, making the most furious uproar; but the mastiffs
+approached slowly, with their coats bristling up, and evidently
+prepared for a contest with a formidable antagonist. "It must be a
+lion!" Lopez exclaimed. "Get ready your revolvers, or he may injure
+the dogs."
+
+The warning came too late. In another instant an animal leaped from
+the thicket, alighting immediately in front of Prince and Flora. It
+was as nearly as possible the same color as the mastiffs, and
+perhaps hardly stood so high; but he was a much heavier animal, and
+longer in the back. The dogs sprang upon it. Prince, who was first,
+received a blow with its paw, which struck him down; but Flora had
+caught hold. Prince in an instant joined her, and the three were
+immediately rolling over and over on the ground in a confused mass.
+Mr. Hardy and Lopez at once leaped from their horses and rushed to
+the spot; and the former, seizing his opportunity, placed his
+pistol close to the lion's ear, and terminated the contest in an
+instant. The animal killed was a puma, called in South America a
+lion; which animal, however, he resembles more in his color than in
+other respects. He has no mane, and is much inferior in power to
+the African lion. They seldom attack men; but if assailed are very
+formidable antagonists. The present one was, Lopez asserted, a
+remarkably large one.
+
+Mr. Hardy's first care was to examine the dogs. Prince's shoulder
+was laid open by the stroke of the claws, and both dogs had
+numerous scratches. Flora had fortunately seized him by the neck,
+and he had thus been unable to use his teeth.
+
+Mr. Hardy determined to return home at once, in order to dress
+Prince's shoulder; and leaving Lopez to skin the puma, the rest
+took their way back. When they arrived the wounds of the dogs were
+carefully washed, and a wet bandage was fastened with some
+difficulty upon Prince's wound. Leaving all the dogs behind, with
+the exception of the retrievers, Mr. Hardy and the boys started for
+a walk along the river, leading with them a horse to bring back the
+game, as their former experience had taught them that carrying half
+a dozen ducks and geese under a broiling sun was no joke. They were
+longer this time than before in making a good bag; and
+after-experience taught them that early in the morning or late in
+the evening was the time to go down to the stream, for at these
+times flights of birds were constantly approaching, and they could
+always rely upon coming home laden after an hour's shooting. Upon
+the present occasion, however, they did not do badly, but returned
+with a swan, three geese, and twelve ducks, just in time to find
+the men preparing for dinner.
+
+The next morning the two bullock carts were sent off with Hans and
+Terence to Rosario, to fetch the posts for the fence, together with
+two more coils of wire, which had been left there from want of room
+in the carts when they came up. Charley was sent with them, in
+order that he might find out if the sailing vessel had arrived with
+the plows and heavy baggage. While he was away, Mr. Hardy and
+Hubert were occupied in making a complete exploration of the
+property, and in erecting a storehouse for the goods.
+
+In five days Charley returned with the carts he had taken, and with
+four others which he had hired at Rosario, bringing the heavy
+baggage, which had come in the day after he had arrived there. The
+goods were placed for the present in the new store, and then all
+hands set to work at the fence. Hans and Terence had already dug
+the holes; and the putting in the posts, ramming the earth tightly
+round them, and stretching the wires, took them two days.
+
+The usual defense in the outlying settlements against Indians is a
+ditch six feet wide and as much deep; but a ditch of this width can
+be easily leaped, both by men on horseback and on foot. The ditch,
+too, would itself serve as a shelter, as active men could have no
+difficulty in getting out of it, and could surround the house by
+creeping along the bottom of the ditch, and then openly attack all
+round at once, or crawl up unperceived by those who were upon the
+watch on the other side.
+
+The fence had none of these disadvantages. It was six feet high.
+The wires were placed at six inches apart for four feet from the
+bottom, and at nine inches above that. Then the upper wires were
+not stretched quite so tightly as the lower ones, rendering it
+extremely difficult to climb over. In this way an attacking party
+would have no protection whatever, and would, while endeavoring to
+climb the fence, be helplessly exposed to the fire of those in the
+house. Those who got over, too, could receive no assistance from
+their comrades without, while their retreat would be completely cut
+off.
+
+The gateway to the fence was an ordinary strong iron gate which Mr.
+Hardy had bought at Rosario, and to which strong pointed palings,
+six feet long, were lashed side by side, with intervals of six
+inches between them. This was the finishing touch to the
+fortification; and all felt when it was done that they could
+withstand the attack of a whole tribe of Indians.
+
+The carts were again sent off to Rosario to bring back some more
+wood, from which to make the framework of the house. Hubert this
+time accompanied them, as Mr. Hardy wished the boys to become as
+self-reliant as possible. He was also to hire three peons, or
+native laborers. Before he started the plan of the future house was
+discussed and agreed upon. In the middle was to be the general
+sitting-room, fifteen feet square; upon one side was the kitchen,
+fifteen by ten and a half; upon the other, the servants' bedroom,
+of the same size; behind were three bedrooms, twelve feet by
+fifteen each, all opening from the sitting-room. The house,
+therefore, was to form a block thirty-six feet by thirty.
+
+Upon the side next to the kitchen, and opening from it, a small
+square tower with two stories in it was to stand. It was to be ten
+feet square; the lower room to be a laundry and scullery, and the
+one above, approached by straight wooden steps, to be the
+storehouse. The roof was to be flat, with a parapet three feet
+high. From this a clear view could be had over the country for
+miles, and the whole circuit of the fence commanded in case of
+attack. The walls of the house were to be of adobe or mud the
+internal partitions of sun-baked bricks.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+THE SETTLER'S HOME.
+
+
+Just before commencing the house Mr. Hardy heard that a sale of
+stock was to take place at an estancia about twenty miles to the
+west of Rosario, in consequence of the death of its owner. He
+therefore took Lopez and the newly hired peons, and started. He was
+likely to be away five days. The boys were to do what work they
+judged best in his absence. They determined to set about
+brick-making. Fortunately, Hans was accustomed to the work and knew
+the way that the natives of the country set about it; the American,
+Seth, knew nothing about it, but he was always willing to turn his
+hand to anything. First, a piece of ground was cleared of grass,
+and was leveled for the reception of the bricks when made; then
+some planks were knocked together so as to form a rough table. Two
+brick molds were made, these being larger than those used in
+England. A piece of ground was chosen near. The turf was taken off,
+the soil was dug up, and the peons drove the bullocks round and
+round upon it, trampling it into a thick mud, some water being
+thrown in when necessary.
+
+As it was sufficiently trampled Terence carried it in a trough and
+emptied it on to the table close by, where Hans and Seth fashioned
+it in the molds, turning the bricks out on to a plank a foot wide
+and six feet long. When this was full the boys took each an end and
+carried it off to the prepared ground, where they carefully removed
+the bricks with two little slabs of wood, and placed them on the
+ground to dry, returning with the empty plank to find, another one
+filled for them. It was hard work for all, and from eleven until
+three the heat was too great to allow them to work at it; but they
+began with daylight, and taking a nap during the heat of the day,
+were ready to work on again as long as it was light.
+
+The bricks were, of course, to be dried by the sun, as fuel was too
+scarce for them to think of burning them; but this was of little
+consequence, especially as they were to be used indoors, the heat
+of the sun being quite sufficient to make very fair bricks without
+the use of fire.
+
+By the afternoon of the fifth day they had made a quantity of
+bricks which would, they calculated, be ample for the construction
+of the partition walls of their house.
+
+The boys had just deposited the last brick upon the drying ground,
+and were moving away, when Hubert cried, "Stop, Charley, don't move
+a step."
+
+Startled by the suddenness and sharpness of the cry, Charley stood
+without moving, and was surprised to see his brother pick up one of
+the wet bricks in both hands, and dash it upon the ground
+immediately in front of where they were walking.
+
+"I've killed him!" Hubert cried triumphantly; and Charley, looking
+down, saw a snake of about three feet long writhing in the grass,
+his head being completely driven into the ground under the force of
+the lump of wet clay. Two or three stamps of their heavy boots
+completed the work. And the men coming up to see what was the
+matter, Hans said that Charley, who would have trodden upon the
+reptile in another instant had not his brother called out, had had
+a very narrow escape, for that the snake was the _vivora de la
+crux_, so called from a mark like a cross upon his head, and
+that his bite was almost always mortal.
+
+It was a pretty snake, with bands of red, white, and black upon his
+body. Charley grew very pale at the thought of the narrow escape he
+had had, and wrung his brother very hard by the hand; while Hubert
+was half-inclined to cry at the thoughts of what might have
+happened.
+
+The sun was just setting when they saw a crowd of objects in the
+distance; and the boys at once saddled their horses and rode off,
+to meet their father and to assist to drive in the animals. They
+found, upon reaching him, that he had bought a thousand sheep,
+fifty cattle, and twenty horses; three of these last being
+remarkably well bred, and fast, and bought specially for their own
+riding. Upon their arrival at the house the sheep were turned into
+the enclosure, the horses were picketed, and the cattle left to
+roam at their will, as it was not thought probable that they would
+attempt to return to their distant homes, especially after two
+days' fatiguing march.
+
+Mr. Hardy was very much pleased at the sight of the long rows of
+bricks lying in front of the house, and gave great credit to all
+for the amount of work which had been done during his few days'
+absence. The next morning he assigned to every one their share of
+the future work. Lopez and one of the peons went out with the
+horses, cattle, and sheep. After a time it would not be necessary
+to have two men employed for this work, as the cattle and horses,
+when they once became accustomed to their new home, would never
+wander very far. Charley, Hubert, and Terence were to take three
+yoke of oxen and the three plows, and to commence to get the land
+in order for cultivation; the ground selected as a beginning being
+that lying below the house near the river. Mr. Hardy, Hans, and the
+two peons were to work at the house, and Seth was to finish the
+well, which, although begun, had been stopped during the press of
+more urgent work, and the water required had been fetched from the
+stream in a barrel placed in a bullock cart. The way in which adobe
+or mud houses are constructed is as follows: The mud is prepared as
+for brick-making; but instead of being made into bricks, it is made
+at once into the wall. The foundation having been dug out and
+leveled, two boards are placed on edge eighteen inches or two feet
+apart. These are kept in their places by two pieces of wood nailed
+across them. The space between these boards is filled with mud. in
+which chopped hay and rushes have been mixed to bind it together.
+The boards are left for a day or two, while the builders proceed
+with the other part of the wall. They are then taken off, and the
+heat of the sun soon dries the wall into a mass almost as hard as a
+brick. The boards are then put on again higher up, and the process
+repeated until the walls have gained the desired height.
+
+In a fortnight's time the walls were finished, and the bullock
+carts were dispatched to Rosario to fetch lime, as Mr. Hardy had
+determined to plaster the inside walls to keep in the dust, which
+is otherwise continually coming off mud walls. By this time a
+considerable extent of land was plowed up, and this was now planted
+with maize, yam or sweet potato, and pumpkins: a small portion, as
+an experiment, was also planted with potato seeds, but the climate
+is almost too warm for the potato to thrive.
+
+Upon the return of the carts with the lime the partition walls were
+built with the bricks. The walls finished, all hands went to work
+at the roof. This Mr. Hardy had intended to have had regularly
+thatched; but during his last visit to Rosario he had heard that
+the Indians frequently endeavored in their attacks to set fire to
+the roofs, and he therefore determined to use tiles. The carts had
+to make two journeys to Rosario to get sufficient tiles and lath.
+But at last all was finished; the walls were plastered inside and
+whitewashed out; the floor was leveled, beaten down hard, and
+covered with a mixture of clay and lime, which hardened into a
+firm, level floor.
+
+It was exactly two months from the date of their arrival at the
+farm that the doors were hung and the finishing touch put to the
+house, and very pleased were they all as they gave three cheers for
+their new abode. The tower, they all agreed, was an especial
+feature. It was built of adobe up to the height of the other walls,
+but the upper story had been built of bricks two thick and laid in
+mortar. The top had been embattled; and the boys laughed, and said
+the house looked exactly like a little dissenting chapel at home.
+
+It was a joyful day when a fire was first lighted in the kitchen
+chimney, which, with that in the sitting-room, was lined with
+bricks; and the whole party sat down to a dinner of mutton and wild
+fowl of three or four sorts.
+
+The same evening Mr. Hardy told the boys that he should start the
+next day to bring up their mamma and the girls, who were all
+getting very impatient indeed to be out upon the pampas. He
+explained to them that he should bring up iron bedsteads with bedding,
+but that he relied upon them to increase their stock of
+tables and benches, and to put up shelves, which would do until
+regular cupboards and closets could be made. Mr. Hardy thought that
+he should not be away much more than a week, as, by making a long
+ride to Rosario the next day he should catch the boat, which left
+the following morning for Buenos Ayres; and as he had already
+written to Mr. Thompson saying when he should probably arrive,
+there would be no time lost. The next morning he started before
+daylight, the last words of the boys being: "Be sure, papa, to
+bring the mosquito curtains for us all; they are getting worse and
+worse. We hardly closed an eye all last night."
+
+Hot as the weather now was, the boys worked incessantly at their
+carpentering for the next week, and at the end had the satisfaction
+of seeing a large table for dining at in the sitting-room, and a
+small one to act as a sideboard, two long benches, and two short
+ones. In their mother and sisters' rooms there were a table and two
+benches, and a table and a long flap to serve as a dresser in the
+kitchen. They had also put up two long shelves in each of the
+bedrooms, and some nails on the doors for dresses. They were very
+tired at the end of the week, but they looked round with a
+satisfied look, for they knew they had done their best. The next
+morning they were to ride to Rosario to meet the party. The carts
+had gone off under the charge of Terence that day.
+
+It was indeed a joyful meeting when Mr. and Mrs. Hardy and the
+girls stepped off the steamer; but the first embrace was scarcely
+over when the boys exclaimed simultaneously, "Why, girls, what is
+the matter with your faces? I should not have known you."
+
+"Oh, it's those dreadful mosquitoes; there were millions on board
+the steamer last night. I really thought we should have been eaten
+up. Didn't you, mamma?"
+
+"Well, my dear, I thought that they would perhaps leave something
+of us till morning, but I felt almost inclined to go mad and jump
+overboard. It was a dreadful night. I do hope they are not so bad
+here, Frank."
+
+"No, Clara, they are nothing like so bad as they were last night;
+but still, as we are so close to the river, they will, no doubt, be
+troublesome, and I question whether the beds at the hotel have
+mosquito curtains; but if you take my advice, and all sleep with
+the sheet over your heads, you will manage to do pretty well. It is
+better to be hot than to be bitten all over."
+
+In spite, however, of the expedient of the sheets, all the party
+passed a bad night, and were quite ready to get up before daylight
+to start for their ride to Mr. Percy's estancia. They were all to
+ride, with the exception of Sarah, who took her place in one of the
+bullock carts; and they would therefore reach the estancia before
+the heat of the day fairly set in. Terence having been told that
+Sarah was going to ride, had cut some boughs, with which he made a
+sort of arbor over the cart to shade her from the sun--a general
+method of the country, and at which Sarah was much gratified. She
+had at first felt rather anxious at the thought of going without
+her mistress; but Terence assured her: "Sure, miss, and it's
+meself, Terence Kelly, that will take care of ye; and no danger
+shall come near your pretty face at all, at all; ye'll be quite as
+safe as if ye were in the auld country. And as for the bastes, sure
+and it's the quietest bastes they are, and niver thought of running
+away since the day they were born."
+
+So Sarah took her place without uneasiness, and the others started
+at a hand canter for Mr. Percy's estancia.
+
+While at Mr. Thompson's both Mrs. Hardy and the girls had ridden
+regularly every day, so that all were quite at their ease on their
+horses, and were able to talk away without ceasing of all that had
+happened since they parted. The only caution Mr. Hardy had to give,
+with a side look at Charley, was, "Look out for armadillo holes;
+because I have known fellows who were wonderful at sticking on
+their horses come to grief at them."
+
+At which Hubert laughed; and Charley said, "Oh, papa!" and colored
+up and laughed, as was his way when his father joked him about his
+little weaknesses.
+
+They had not gone more than halfway before they met Mr. Percy, who
+had ridden thus far to welcome his guests, for English ladies are
+very scarce out on the pampas, and are honored accordingly. One of
+the first questions the girls asked after the first greetings were
+over was, "Have you many mosquitoes at your estancia, Mr. Percy?"
+
+"Not many," Mr. Percy said; "I have no stream near, and it is only
+near water that they are so very bad."
+
+After waiting during the heat of the day at Mr. Percy's, the boys
+rode on home, as six guests were altogether beyond Mr. Percy's
+power of accommodating.
+
+The next morning the boys were up long before daylight, and went
+down to the stream, where, as day broke, they managed to shoot a
+swan and five wild ducks, and with these they returned to the
+house. Then they swept the place with the greatest care, spread the
+table, arranged the benches, set everything off to the best
+advantage, and then devoted their whole energies to cooking a very
+excellent breakfast, which they were sure the travelers would be
+ready for upon their arrival. This was just ready, when, from the
+lookout on the tower, they saw the party approaching. The breakfast
+was too important to be left, and they were therefore unable to
+ride out to meet them. They were at the gate, however, as they
+rode up.
+
+"Hurrah, hurrah!" they shouted, and the girls set up a cheer in
+return.
+
+The men ran up to take the horses, and in another minute the whole
+party were in their new home. The girls raced everywhere wild with
+delight, ascended to the lookout, clapped their hands at the sight
+of the sheep and cattle, and could hardly be persuaded to take
+their things off and sit down to breakfast.
+
+Mrs. Hardy was less loud in her commendation of everything, but she
+was greatly pleased with her new home, which was very much more
+finished and comfortable than she had expected.
+
+"This is fun, mamma, isn't it?" Maud said. "It is just like a
+picnic. How we shall enjoy it, to be sure! May we set-to at once
+after breakfast, and wash up?"
+
+"Certainly, Maud; Sarah will not be here for another two hours, and
+it is as well that you should begin to make yourselves useful at
+once. We shall all have to be upon our mettle, too. See how nicely
+the boys have cooked the breakfast. These snatch-cock ducks are
+excellent, and the mutton chops done to a turn. They will have a
+great laugh at us, if we, the professed cooks, do not do at least
+as well."
+
+"Ah, but look at the practice they have been having, mamma."
+
+"Yes, Maud," Hubert said; "and I can tell you it is only two or
+three things we can do well. Ducks and geese done like this, and
+chops and steaks, are about the limits. If we tried anything else,
+we made an awful mess of it: as to puddings, we never attempted
+them; and shall be very glad of something in the way of bread, for
+we are heartily sick of these flat, flabby cakes."
+
+"Why have you only whitewashed this high middle wall halfway up,
+Frank?"
+
+"In the first place, my dear, we fell short of whitewash; and, in
+the next place, we are going to set to work at once to put a few light
+rafters across, and to nail felt below them, and whitewash it
+so as to make a ceiling. It will make the rooms look less bare,
+and, what is much more important, it will make them a great deal
+cooler."
+
+"You get milk, I hope?"
+
+"Yes," Charley said; "two of the cows of the last lot papa bought
+are accustomed to be milked, and Hubert and I have done it up till
+now; but we shall hand them over to you, and you girls will have to
+learn."
+
+Maud and Ethel looked at each other triumphantly. "Perhaps we know
+more than you think," Ethel said.
+
+"Yes," Mrs. Hardy said; "the girls are going to be two very useful
+little women. I will tell you a secret. While you boys were at work
+of a morning, the girls, as you know, often walked over to Mr.
+Williams the farmer's, to learn as much as they could about
+poultry, of which he kept a great many. Mrs. Williams saw how
+anxious they were to learn to be useful, so she offered to teach
+them to milk, and to manage a dairy, and make butter and cheese.
+And they worked regularly, till Mrs. Williams told me she thought
+that they could make butter as well as she could. It has been a
+great secret, for the girls did not wish even their papa to know,
+so that it might be a surprise."
+
+"Very well done, little girls," Mr. Hardy said; "it is a surprise
+indeed, and a most pleasant one. Mamma kept your secret capitally,
+and never as much as whispered a word to me about it."
+
+The boys too were delighted, for they had not tasted butter since
+they arrived, and they promised readily enough to make a rough
+churn with the least possible delay.
+
+By ten o'clock the carts arrived with Sarah and the luggage, and
+then there was work for the afternoon, putting up the bedsteads,
+and getting everything into order. The mosquito curtains were
+fitted to the beds, and all felt gratified at the thought that they
+should be able to set the little bloodsuckers at defiance. The next
+day was Sunday, upon which, as usual, no work was to be done. After
+breakfast the benches were brought in from the bedrooms, and the
+men assembling, Mr. Hardy read prayers, offering up a special
+prayer for the blessing and protection of God upon their household.
+Afterward Mrs. Hardy and the girls were taken over the place, and
+shown the storehouse, and the men's tent, and the river, and the
+newly planted field.
+
+"The ground is getting very much burned up, papa," Charley said.
+"It was damp enough when we put in the crops, and they are getting
+on capitally; but I fear that they were sown too late, and will be
+burned up."
+
+"Ah, but I have a plan to prevent that," Mr. Hardy said. "See if
+you can think what it is."
+
+Neither of the boys could imagine.
+
+"When I first described the place to you, I told you that there was
+a main stream with a smaller one running into it, and that I
+thought that this last would be very useful. I examined the ground
+very carefully, and I found that the small stream runs for some
+distance between two slight swells, which narrow in sharply to each
+other just below the house. Now I find that a dam of not more than
+fifty feet wide and eight feet high will make a sort of lake a
+quarter of a mile long, and averaging fifty yards wide. From this
+the water will flow over the whole flat by the river in front of
+the house and away to the left, and we shall be able to irrigate at
+least three or four hundred acres of land. Upon these we shall be
+able to raise four or five crops a year; and one crop in
+particular, the alfalfa, a sort of lucern for fattening the cattle
+in time of drought, when the grass is all parched up. At that time
+cattle ordinarily worth only fifteen dollars can be sold, if fat,
+for forty-five or fifty dollars. So you see, boys, there is a grand
+prospect before us."
+
+The boys entered enthusiastically into the scheme, and the party
+went at once to inspect the spot which Mr. Hardy had fixed upon for
+the dam. This, it was agreed, should be commenced the very next
+day; and Mr. Hardy said that he had no doubt, if the earth was
+properly puddled, or stamped when wet, that it would keep the water
+from coming through.
+
+In the afternoon Mrs. Hardy, Maud, and Ethel were taken a ride
+round the property, and were fortunate enough to see some
+ostriches, to the great delight of the girls.
+
+At tea Mr. Hardy said: "There is one very important point connected
+with our place which has hitherto been unaccountably neglected. Do
+any of you know what it is?"
+
+The boys and their sisters looked at each other in great perplexity,
+and in vain endeavored to think of any important omission.
+
+"I mean," their father said at last, "the place has no name. I
+suggest that we fix upon one at once. It is only marked in the
+government plan as Lot 473. Now, what name shall it be?"
+
+Innumerable were the suggestions made, but none met with universal
+approbation. At last Mrs. Hardy said: "I have heard in England of a
+place called Mount Pleasant, though I confess I do not know where
+it is. Now, what do you say to Mount Pleasant? It is a mount, and
+we mean it to be a very pleasant place before we have done with it."
+
+The approval of the suggestion was general, and amid great applause
+it was settled that the house and estate should hereafter go by the
+name of "Mount Pleasant."
+
+In the morning the boys were at work at two wheelbarrows, for which
+Mr. Hardy had brought out wheels and ironwork; and Mr. Hardy and
+the men went down to the stream, and began to strip off the turf
+and to dig out a strip of land twenty-five feet wide along the line
+where the dam was to come. The earth was then wetted and puddled.
+When the barrows were completed they were brought into work; and in
+ten days a dam was raised eight feet high, three feet wide at the
+top, and twenty-five feet wide at the bottom. In the middle a space
+of two feet wide was left, through which the little stream at
+present ran. Two posts, with grooves in them, were driven in, one
+upon either side of this; and thus the work was left for a few
+days, for the sun to bake its surface, while the men were cutting a
+trench for the water to run down to the ground to be irrigated.
+
+A small sluice was put at the entrance to this, to regulate the
+quantity of water to be allowed to flow, and all was now in
+readiness to complete the final operation of closing up the dam. A
+quantity of earth was first collected and puddled, and piled on the
+top of the dam and on the slopes by its side, so as to be in
+readiness, and Mrs. Hardy and the girls came down to watch the
+operation.
+
+First a number of boards two feet long, and cut to fit the grooves,
+were slipped down into them, forming a solid wall, and then upon
+the upper side of these the puddled earth was thrown down into the
+water, Terence standing below in the stream and pounding down the
+earth with a rammer. The success was complete: in a couple of
+hours' time the gap in the dam was filled up, and they had the
+satisfaction of seeing the little stream overflowing its banks and
+widening out above, while not a drop of water made its escape by
+the old channel.
+
+While this work had been going on the boys had been engaged up at
+the house. The first thing was to make a churn, then to put up some
+large closets and some more shelves, and the bullock carts had to
+be sent to Rosario for a fresh supply of planks. This occupied them
+until the dam was finished. The girls had tried their first
+experiment at butter, and the result had been most satisfactory.
+The dinners, too, were pronounced to be an immense improvement upon
+the old state of things.
+
+Soon after the dam was finished Hans, who had been too long a rover
+to settle down, expressed his desire to leave; and as Mr. Hardy had
+determined to lessen his establishment--as, now that the heavy work
+was over, if was no longer necessary to keep so many hands--he
+offered no objection to his leaving without the notice he had
+agreed to give. Wages were high, and Mr. Hardy was desirous of
+keeping his remaining capital in hand, in case of his sheep and
+cattle being driven off by the Indians. One of the peons was also
+discharged, and there remained only Lopez, Seth, Terence, and two
+peons.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+A TALE OF THE MEXICAN WAR.
+
+
+Mr. Hardy was rather surprised at Seth Harper, the Yankee, having
+remained so long in his service, as the man had plainly stated,
+when first engaged, that he thought it likely that he should not
+fix himself, as he expressed it, for many weeks, However, he stayed
+on, and had evidently taken a fancy to the boys; and was still more
+interested in the girls, whose talk and ways must have been strange
+and very pleasant to him after so many years' wandering as a
+solitary man. He was generally a man of few words, using signs
+where signs would suffice, and making his answers, when obliged to
+speak, as brief as possible. This habit of taciturnity was no doubt
+acquired from a long life passed either alone or amid dangers where
+an unnecessary sound might have cost him his life. To the young
+people, however, he would relax from his habitual rule of silence.
+Of an evening, when work was over, they would go down to the bench
+he had erected outside his hut, and would ask him to tell them
+tales of his Indian experiences. Upon one of these occasions
+Charley said to him: "But of all the near escapes that you have
+had, which was the most hazardous you ever had? which do you
+consider was the narrowest touch you ever had of being killed?"
+
+Seth considered for some time in silence, turned his plug of
+tobacco in his mouth, expectorated two or three times, as was his
+custom when thinking, and then said, "That's not altogether an easy
+question to answer. I've been so near wiped out such scores of
+times, that it ain't no easy job to say which was the downright
+nearest. In thinking it over, I conclude sometimes that one go was
+the nearest, sometimes that another; it ain't no ways easy to say
+now. But I think that, at the time, I never so much felt that Seth
+Harper's time for going down had come, as I did in an affair near
+San Louis."
+
+"And how was that, Seth? Do tell us about it," Maud said.
+
+"It's rather a long story, that is," the Yankee said.
+
+"All the better, Seth," Charley said; "at least all the better as
+far as we are concerned, if you don't mind telling it."
+
+"No, I don't mind, no how," Seth answered. "I'll just think it
+over, and see where to begin."
+
+There was a silence for a few minutes, and the young Hardys
+composed themselves comfortably for a good long sitting, and then
+Seth Harper began his story.
+
+"Better than five years back, in '47, I were fighting in Mexico. It
+wasn't much regular up and down fighting we had, though we had some
+toughish battles too, but it were skirmishing here, skirmishing
+there, keeping one eye always open, for man, woman, and child hated
+us like pison, and it was little mercy that a straggler might
+expect if he got caught away from his friends. Their partisans
+chiefs, half-soldier, half-robber, did us more harm than the
+regulars, and mercy was never given or asked between them and us.
+Me and Rube Pearson worked mostly together. We had 'fit' the
+Indians out on the prairies for years side by side, and when Uncle
+Sam wanted men to lick the Mexicans, we concluded to go in
+together. We 'listed as scouts to the 'Rangers,' that is, we agreed
+to fight as much as we were wanted to fight, and to go on in front
+as scouts, in which way we had many a little scrimmage on our own
+account; but we didn't wear any uniform, or do drill, which
+couldn't have been expected of us. We shouldn't have been no good
+as regulars, and every one knew that there were no better scouts in
+the army than Rube Pearson and Seth Harper. Lor', what a fellow
+Rube was, to be sure! I ain't a chicken," and the Yankee looked
+down at his own bony limbs, "but I was a baby by the side of Rube.
+He were six feet four if he were an inch, and so broad that he
+looked short unless you saw him by the side of another man. I do
+believe Rube Pearson were the strongest man in the world. I have
+heard," Seth went on, meditating, "of a chap called Samson: folks
+say he were a strong fellow. I never came across any one who had
+rightly met him, but a good many have heard speak of him. I should
+like to have seen him and Rube in the grips. I expect Rube would
+have astonished him, Rube came from Missouri--most of them very big
+chaps do. I shouldn't wonder if Samson did, though I never heard
+for certain."
+
+The young Hardys had great difficulty to prevent themselves from
+laughing aloud at Seth's idea on the subject of Samson. Charley,
+however, with a great effort, steadied himself to say, "Samson died
+a great many years ago, Seth. His history is in the Bible."
+
+"Is it, though?" Seth said, much interested. "Well now, what did he
+do?"
+
+"He carried away the gates of Gaza on his back, Seth."
+
+Seth remained thoughtful for some time. "It all depends on how big
+the gates were," he said at last. "That gate down there is a pretty
+heavyish one, but Rube Pearson could have carried away two sich as
+that, and me sitting on the top of them. What else did he do?"
+
+"He was bound in new cords, and he broke them asunder, Seth."
+
+Seth did not appear to attach much importance to this, and
+inquired, "Did he do anything else?"
+
+"He killed three hundred men with the jawbone of an ass."
+
+"He killed--" Seth began, and then paused in sheer astonishment.
+Then he looked sharply round: "You're making fun of me, lad."
+
+"No, indeed, Seth," Charley said; "it is quite true."
+
+"What! that a man killed three hundred men with the jawbone of an
+ass? It couldn't have been; it was sheer impossible--unless they
+were all asleep, and even then it would be an awful job."
+
+"I don't know how it was, Seth, but the Bible tells us, and so it
+must be true. I think it was a sort of miracle."
+
+"Oh, it was a miracle!" Seth said thoughtfully, and then remained
+silent, evidently pondering in his own mind as to what a miracle
+was, but not liking to ask.
+
+"It was a very long time ago, Seth, and they were no doubt a
+different people then."
+
+"Was it a very, very long time back?" Seth asked.
+
+"Yes, Seth; a very, very, very long time."
+
+"Ah!" Seth said in a thoughtful but more satisfied tone, "I
+understand now. I expect it's that. It's the same thing among the
+Indians: they have got stories of chiefs who died ever so long ago,
+who used to be tremendous fellows--traditions they call 'em. I
+don't expect they were any braver than they are now; but a thing
+grows, you see, like a tree, with age. Lor' bless 'em! if they tell
+such tales now about a Jew, what will they do some day about Rube
+Pearson?"
+
+The young Hardys could stand it no longer, but went off into a
+scream of laughter, which even the surprised and offended looks of
+the ignorant and simple minded, but shrewd, Yankee could not check.
+So offended was he, indeed, that no entreaties or explanations were
+sufficient to mollify him, and the story was abruptly broken off.
+It was not for two or three days that the boys' explanation and
+assurance sufficed; and then, when Charley had explained the whole
+history of Samson to him, he said:
+
+"I have no doubt that it is all true, and I wish I could read it
+for myself. I can just remember that my mother put a great store on
+her Bible, and called it the good book. I can't read myself, and
+shouldn't have time to do it if I could; so it's all one as far as
+that goes. I am just a hunter and Indian fighter, and I don't know
+that for years I have ever stopped so long under a roof as I have
+here. My religion is the religion of most of us out on the
+prairies. Be honest and true to your word. Stick to a friend to
+death, and never kill a man except in fair fight. That's about all,
+and I hope it will do; at any rate, it's too late for me to try and
+learn a new one now. I listen on a Sunday to your father's reading,
+and I wish sometimes I had been taught; and yet it's better as it
+is. A man who acted like that wouldn't be much good for a rough
+life on the prairies, though I have no doubt it could be done in
+the settlements. Now I must go on with my work. If you and the
+others will come over to the hut this evening I will go on with
+that yarn I was just beginning."
+
+After tea the young Hardys went down to the hut, outside which they
+found Seth awaiting their arrival. They were now comfortably
+seated, and Seth, without further introduction, went on.
+
+"One day our captain sent for Rube and me, and says, 'I've got a
+job for you two scouts. It's a dangerous one, but you won't like it
+any the worse for that, I know.'
+
+"'Not a bit,' said Rube with a laugh. He was the lightest-hearted
+fellow, was Rube; always gay and jolly, and wouldn't have hurt a
+squirrel, except in stand-up fight and as a matter of business.
+
+"'What is it, Cap?' said I; 'you've only got to give us the word,
+and we're off.'
+
+"'I've had a message,' he said, 'from Colonel Cabra of their
+service, that he is ready to turn traitor, and hand us over some
+correspondence of Santa Anna, of which he has somehow got
+possessed. Being a traitor, he won't trust any one, and the only
+plan we can hit upon is, that he shall make a journey to San
+Miguel, thirty miles north of this, as if on business. I am to make
+an expedition in that direction, and am to take him prisoner. He
+will then hand over the papers. We shall bring him here, and, after
+keeping him for a time, let him go on parole. No suspicion will
+therefore at any future time arise against him, which there might
+be if we met in any other way. The papers are very important, and
+the affair must not be suffered to slip through. The country
+between this and San Miguel is peaceful enough, but we hear that El
+Zeres' band is out somewhere in that direction. He has something
+like two hundred cutthroats with him of his own, and there is a
+rumor that other bands have joined him. Now I want you to go on
+tomorrow to San Miguel. Go in there after dusk, and take up your
+quarters at this address; it is a small wine-shop in a street off
+the market. Get up as Mexicans; it only requires a big cloak and a
+sombrero. You can both speak Spanish well enough to pass muster.
+Stay all next day, and till daybreak on the morning afterward, and
+then ride back on this road. You will find cut in the first place
+whether Cabra has arrived, and in the next place whether El Zeres
+is in the neighborhood. I shall only bring forty men, as I do not
+wish it to be supposed that I am going on more than a mere scouting
+expedition. You understand?'
+
+"'All right, Cap; we'll do it,' I said, and we went off to our
+quarters.
+
+"I can't say I altogether liked the job. It was a long way from
+headquarters, and, do what they may, two men can't fight more than,
+say, ten or a dozen. I was rather surprised to see by Rube's face
+that he rather liked it; but I did not find out till late that
+night what it was pleased him--then the truth came out.
+
+"'We had better start early, Seth,' said he; 'say at daybreak.'
+
+"'What for, Rube?' I said; 'the Cap said we were to go in after
+dusk. It's only thirty miles; we shan't want to start till three
+o'clock.'
+
+"Rube laughed. 'I don't want to get there before dusk, but I want
+to start at daybreak, and I'll tell you why. You remember Pepita?'
+
+"'There,' said I, 'if I didn't think it had something to do with a
+woman. You are always running after some one, Rube. They will get
+you into a scrape some day.'
+
+"Rube laughed. 'I am big enough to get out of it if it does, Seth;
+but you know I did feel uncommon soft toward Pepita, and really
+thought of marrying and taking her back to Missouri.'
+
+"'Only she wouldn't come, Rube?'
+
+"'Just so, Seth,' said he, laughing. So we agreed we would be the
+best friends; and she asked me, if ever I went out to San Miguel,
+to go and see her. She said her father was generally out, but would
+be glad to see me if he were in. She lives in a small hacienda, a
+league this side of the town.
+
+"I saw that it was of no use to argue, but I didn't like it. The
+Mexican women hated us worse than the men did, and that warn't easy
+to do; and many of our fellows had been murdered after being
+enticed by them to out-of-the-way places. Still, in the present
+case, I did not see that the girl could have expected that Rube
+would be there unless the rest of us were near at hand, and I did
+not attempt to oppose Rube's wishes."
+
+"So next morning off we started, and by ten o'clock we rode up to
+the door of the place which Rube said answered to the description
+Pepita had given him. It was a pretty place, with trees round it,
+and might have been the residence of a small proprietor such as
+Pepita had described her father to be. As we rode up to the door it
+opened, and I saw at once that Rube were right, for a dark-eyed
+Mexican girl came out and looked at us inquiringly.
+
+"'What can I do for you, senors?' she asked.
+
+"'Don't you remember me, Donna Pepita?' Rube said, laughing, as he
+lifted the sombrero which had shaded his face.
+
+"The girl started violently. 'Ah, Signor Americano, is it you? I
+might have known, indeed,' she said, smiling, 'by your size, even
+wrapped up. This, of course, is Signor Seth--you are always
+together. But come in,' she said.
+
+"'Who have you got inside, Donna Pepita?' Rube asked. 'I know that
+I can trust you, but I can't trust others, and I don't want it
+known I am here.'
+
+"'The house is empty,' Pepita said. 'My father is out. There is
+only old Jacinta at home.'
+
+"At this moment an old woman made her appearance at the door, and
+at a word from Pepita took our horses, while Pepita signed to us to
+enter.
+
+"'Excuse me, signora,' I said. 'We will go first and see our horses
+stabled. It is our custom; one never knows when he may want them.'
+
+"I thought Pepita looked annoyed, but it was only for a moment, and
+then she said something in one of the country dialects to the old
+woman. She nodded her head, and went off round to the back of the
+house, we leading our horses, and following her. The stables, I
+observed, were singularly large and well kept for a house of its
+size; but, to my surprise, instead of going to the long range of
+buildings, the old woman led the way to a small shed."
+
+"'Ain't these stables?' said I.
+
+"She shook her head, and said in Spanish, 'They were once, but we
+have only two horses. Now they are used as a store for grain; the
+master has the key.'
+
+"I could not contradict her, though I believed she was telling me a
+lie. However, we fastened our horses up in the shed, put the
+pistols from our holsters into our belts, and, taking our rifles in
+our hands, entered the house.
+
+"Pepita received us very warmly, and busied herself assisting the
+old woman to get us something to eat; after which she and Rube
+began love-making, and it really seemed as if the girl meant to
+change her mind, and go back with Rube, after all. There was
+nothing, in fact, to justify my feeling uneasy, except that, while
+Pepita had promised me when I entered the house not to tell the old
+woman who we were, I was convinced that she had done so by the
+glances of scowling hatred which the old hag threw at us whenever
+she came into the room. Still I was uneasy, and shortly made some
+excuse to leave the room and saunter round and about the house, to
+assure myself that Pepita had spoken truly when she had said that
+there was no one there except the old woman and herself. I found
+nothing to excite the smallest suspicion, and was therefore content
+to return to the room and to throw myself lazily down and go off
+for a siesta, in the wakeful intervals of which I could hear that
+Pepita had given way, and that the delighted Rube was arranging
+with her how she should escape and join him when the army retired;
+for of course neither had any idea that her father would consent to
+her marrying one of the hated enemies of his country.
+
+"At three o'clock I roused myself and soon after the old woman came
+into the room with some lemonade. I observed that Pepita changed
+color, but she said nothing, and a moment after, making some
+excuse, she left the room. I was about to speak to Rube on the
+subject, when the window was darkened with men, Five or six shots
+were fired at us, and with a yell a crowd of Mexicans rushed into
+the room.
+
+"As they appeared Rube sprang up with the exclamation, 'Trapped, by
+thunder!' and then fell flat on his back, shot, I believed, through
+the head.
+
+"I rushed to my rifle, seized it, but before I could get it to my
+shoulder it was knocked from my hand. Half a dozen fellows threw
+themselves upon me, and I was a prisoner. I didn't try to resist
+when they laid hands on me, because I knew I should have a knife in
+me at once; and though I knew my life was not worth an hour's
+purchase--no, nor five minutes'--after I was caught, still upon the
+whole it was as well to live that five minutes as not.
+
+"There was such a hubbub and a shouting at first that I couldn't
+hear a word, but at last I picked up that they were a party of the
+band of El Zeres, who was in the neighborhood, and had been fetched
+by a boy that traitress Pepita had dispatched for them directly we
+arrived. Pepita herself was wife of one of the other chiefs of the
+band. Much fun was made of poor Rube and myself about our courting.
+I felt mad with myself for having been caught so foolishly. I
+couldn't feel angry with Rube, with him lying dead there, but I was
+angry with myself for having listened to him. I oughtn't to have
+allowed him to have his own way. I warn't in love, and I ought to
+have known that a man's head, when he's after a gal, is no more use
+than a pumpkin. While I was thinking this out in my mind I had my
+eyes fixed upon poor Rube, whom no one thought of noticing, when
+all of a sudden I gave quite a start, for I saw him move. I
+couldn't see his face, but I saw a hand stealing gradually out
+toward the leg of a man who stood near. Then there was a pause, and
+then the other hand began to move. It wasn't at all like the
+aimless way that the arms of a badly hit man would move, and I saw
+at once, that Rube had been playing 'possum' all along."
+
+"Doing what, Seth?" Ethel asked.
+
+"Just pretending to be dead. I held my breath, for I saw he had
+come to the conclusion that he could not be overlooked much longer,
+and was going to make a move.
+
+"In another minute there was a crash and a shout as the two men
+fell to the ground with their legs knocked clean from under them,
+catching hold of other men and dragging them down with them. From
+the midst of the confusion Rube leaped to his feet and made a rush
+for the window; one man he leveled with a blow of his fist; another
+he caught up as if he had been a baby, and hurling him against two
+others, brought them on the ground together, and then leaping over
+their bodies, dashed through the window before the Mexicans had
+recovered from their astonishment. I could have laughed out loud at
+the yell of rage and amazement with which they set off in pursuit;
+but two or three of them remained to guard me, and I might have got
+a knife in my ribs, so I kept quiet. I did just feel so glad to see
+Rube was alive, that I hardly remembered that it warn't likely that
+either he or I would be so long, for I did not for a moment expect
+that he would make good his escape. The odds were too great against
+it, especially in broad daylight. Even on horseback it would be
+next to impossible. No one but Rube would have attempted such a
+thing; but he never stopped to think about odds or chances when his
+dander was up. In less than no time I heard a shot or two, then was
+a silence for a time, then a shout of triumph. I knew it was all
+over, and that Rube was taken again.
+
+"He told me afterward that he had made a dash round to the stable,
+where he had found seven or eight Mexicans looking after the
+horses; that he had knocked down one or two who were in his way,
+had leaped upon the nearest animal, and had made off at the top of
+his speed, but that a dozen others were after him in an instant;
+and seeing that he would be lassoed and thrown from his horse, he
+had stopped and thrown up his arms in token of surrender. Rube's
+hands were bound tightly behind him, and he was led back into the
+room.
+
+"He gave a loud laugh when he saw me: 'That was a boy's trick;
+wasn't it, Seth? But I couldn't have helped it if I had been shot a
+minute afterward. There were those fellows' legs moving about me
+just as if I was a log of wood. The thoughts came across me, "A
+good sharp rap above the ankle and over you'd go;" and when I'd once
+thought of it, I was obliged to do it. It was fun, though,
+Seth; wasn't it?'
+
+"'It was, as you say, Rube, a boy's trick, and just at present is
+hardly the time for that. But don't let us say anything we don't
+want overheard, Rube; some of these fellows may understand.'
+
+"'Right you are, Seth. I am main sorry, old hoss, that I've got you
+into this scrape, but I expect we shall get out again somehow. I
+don't think Rube Pearson is going to be wiped out yet.
+
+"I hoped not too. I warn't a bit tired of life, but I did not see
+my way out of it. However, I had one comfort: I knew if any two men
+could get out of an ugly mess, those two men were Rube and I.
+
+"We were now told to sit down on the ground in one corner of the
+room, two fellows taking up their station by our sides. Then there
+was a hot discussion about our fate, which warn't exactly pleasant
+to listen to. Some were in favor of hanging us at once, but the
+majority were for taking us to the main body under El Zeres
+himself, because the chief would be so glad to have us in his
+power. He had frequently vowed vengeance against us, for we were
+known as the most active scouts in the army, and had led troops in
+his pursuit many a time, and had once or twice come very near to
+catching him. He had vowed solemnly to his patron saint that if we
+fell into his hands he would put us to death with unheard-of
+tortures; and as El Zeres was rather celebrated that way--and it
+was the anticipation of an unusual treat which decided the majority
+to reserve us--it warn't altogether pleasant to listen to. But we
+put a good face on the matter, for it would never have done to let
+those Mexican varmints see that two backwoodsmen who had 'fit' them
+and beaten them time after time were afraid to die when their time
+came. Presently there was a little stir, and Pepita came into the
+room. I rather think that, though the girl hated us like pison, she
+didn't like to come into the room where one of us was, she thought,
+laying dead. Now she came in, looking, I will say for her,
+uncommonly pretty. She came straight up to us, and looked us full
+in the face. I paid no attention to her, but Rube nodded quite
+cheerfully.
+
+"'Well, signora, so you were making fools of us, after all! Well, I
+ain't the first chap that's been fooled by a pretty woman; that's
+one comfort, anyhow. I suppose our engagement is to be considered
+at an end, eh?' and he laughed.
+
+"'American dog!' the girl said, with her eyes flashing with rage,
+'did you think you were so good-looking that the women of the
+nation you tread upon are all to lose their hearts to you? We are
+Mexicans, and we hate you!' and she stamped her foot with passion.
+
+"Rube laughed unconcernedly. 'Well, signora, after what you now
+permit me to see of you, I am really thankful that you are so kind
+and lenient. Thunder! what a fate mine would have been if you had
+taken it into your head to marry me!'
+
+"There was a general laugh among the men at the cool way in which
+Rube treated the girl, and the enraged Pepita struck him a box on
+the ear. It was a hearty one; but Rube's face hardly changed, and
+he said, still smiling:
+
+"'We have a custom in the States, Pepita, that when a gal boxes a
+man's ears, he has a right to give her a kiss. You are reversing
+that; I had the kisses this afternoon, and now I have got the box
+on the ear.'
+
+"There was again a roar of laughter among the Mexicans, and the
+enraged woman drew a knife, and would have stabbed Rube to the
+heart had she not been seized by the men standing round her and
+forced from the room. We were kept in that room under a guard so
+watchful that any attempt to escape was out of the question, until
+three o'clock the next morning. The horses were then saddled, and
+we were soon off, Rube and I riding in the midst of the party with
+our hands tied before us, so that we could just hold the bridle. We
+had found out from the conversation that El Zeres with his band was
+about twenty-five miles distant.
+
+"Upon our ride I found an opportunity for the first time since our
+capture for a talk with Rube.
+
+"'What do you think of it, Seth?'
+
+"'Looks bad, Rube,' I said. 'If we find El Zeres in camp, I expect
+he will make short work of us; if he is away I suppose we shall get
+till to-morrow morning. If we are to escape at all it must be
+to-night.'
+
+"'Escape!' Rube said scoffingly; 'of course we are going to escape.
+The question is, Which one of all the ways open to us are we to
+choose?' and he laughed merrily.
+
+"'I don't quite see all the ways yet, Rube; however, we shall see
+what sort of a place we are put in to-night, and can then come to
+some conclusion. There comes the sun.'
+
+"It was about nine o'clock when we rode into camp; and as we
+approached it we acknowledged that a better place against a sudden
+surprise could hardly have been chosen. The ground was flat for
+miles round; but the site of the camp rose in a slight mound, of
+nearly circular form and perhaps one hundred yards across; the
+central part was thirty feet or so above the general level. Round
+this the band of El Zeres was encamped. Rube and I guessed them at
+four hundred strong. There was an attempt at military order, for,
+by the bundles of wearing apparel, etc., it was evident that the
+men slept round a series of bivouac fires, extending in a circle
+round the foot of the mound. Within the line of fires the horses
+were picketed in two rows. In the center of the circle, upon the
+highest point of the rise, was a small house. As we approached we
+could see a stir in the camp: a party of men were mounting their
+horses as if for an expedition.
+
+"'I hope El Zeres is on the point of starting somewhere, Rube,' I
+said, 'and that he is in too great a hurry to stop to amuse himself
+with us as he has threatened: it will give us another day."
+
+"'I hope so,' Rube said; 'it's hard if we don't manage to make
+tracks if we get twenty-four hours.'
+
+"On reaching the camp we were ordered to alight; and upon its being
+known who we were, there was as many shouts of triumph as if we had
+been generals.
+
+"'We are quite celebrated characters, Seth,' Rube said, with his
+usual laugh.
+
+"'Ah,' said I, 'we could do without such celebrity just at present.'
+
+"'I don't know,' Rube said. 'If we were mere American soldiers they
+would cut our throats at once: as it is they may keep us for a more
+ceremonial killing.'
+
+"As we were talking we were being led up toward the central hut,
+which was evidently the abode of the chief. He was standing at the
+door, tapping his riding-boot impatiently with a heavy whip; a man
+was holding his horse in readiness. One of the other leaders was
+standing talking to him. 'Jehoshophat!' said I, 'he is going out.
+We are safe for awhile.'
+
+"El Zeres was a slight, wiry man, with a small wicked-looking eye,
+which gave one the 'squerms' to look at, and a thin mouth curved up
+in a cruel smile. He was the savagest and most bloodthirsty of all
+the Mexican partisans. The man with him was a tall, swarthy,
+ferocious-looking villain.
+
+"El Zeres looked at us for some time without a word. Then he said,
+'I've got you at last; I've been on the lookout for you for a long
+time past.'
+
+"'It hasn't been our fault we haven't met before,' said Rube; which
+was true enough, for we had given him a close chase several times.
+El Zeres only gave an evil smile, but the other Mexican exclaimed
+savagely, 'You dog, do you dare to answer?' and struck Rube across
+the face with all his force with his heavy whip.
+
+"Rube turned quite white, and then with a tremendous effort he
+broke the cowhide thongs which fastened his hands--not new rope,
+mind you, but cowhide--just as if it had been so much grass, and
+went right at the fellow who had struck him. The Mexicans gave a
+cry of astonishment, and threw themselves upon Rube, El Zeres
+shouting at the top of his voice, 'Don't draw a knife, don't draw a
+knife; I'll hang any man who injures him.'
+
+"Rube had got the fellow by the throat with both hands, and though
+the crowd of men who threw themselves upon him pulled him to the
+ground, he never let go, but brought the man down too. I knew it
+was all over with him. I was quite mad to join in and help; but
+though I tugged and strained at my thongs till they cut right into
+my wrists, I could not succeed. For awhile they lay in a struggling
+mass on the ground, and then Rube shook himself free of them for a
+moment and got to his feet. A dozen men were upon him in a moment;
+but he was blind with rage, and would not have minded if it had
+been a thousand. Those who came in front went down as if shot
+before the blows of his fists; but others leaped on him from
+behind, and then the struggle began again. I never saw sich a thing
+before, and never shall again. It was downright awful. They could
+not hold his arms. Their weight, over and over again, got him upon
+the ground, and over and over again he was up on his feet; but his
+arms, somehow, they could not hold, and the work he did with them
+was awful. Anything he hit went down, and when he could not hit he
+gripped. It was like a terrier with rats: he caught 'em by the
+throat, and when he did it was all up with them. Some of them made
+a grab for their knives, but they had no time to use them. In a
+moment their eyes would seem to start from their heads; and then,
+as he threw 'em away, they fell in a dead lump."
+
+How long this went on I can't say--some minutes, though--when a
+Mexican snatched the lasso, which every Mexican carries, from the
+saddle of El Zeres' horse, and dropped the noose over Rube's neck.
+In another moment he was lying half-strangled upon the ground, and
+a dozen hands bound his hands behind him and his feet together with
+cowhide thongs. Then they stood looking at him as if he was some
+devil. And no wonder. Seven Mexicans lay dead on the ground, and
+many more were lying panting and bleeding around. The Mexicans are
+an active race of men, but not strong--nothing like an average
+American--and Rube at any time was a giant even among us scouts;
+and in his rage he seemed to have ten times his natural strength.
+El Zeres had never moved; and except shouting to his men not to use
+their knives, he had taken no part whatever in it--watching the
+struggle with that cruel smile, as if it had only been a terrier
+attacked by rats. When it was over he mounted his horse, and said
+to one of his lieutenants who was standing near: 'I must go now. I
+leave these men in your charge, Pedro. Fasten that one's hands
+behind him; then take them inside. Put them in the inner room.
+Clear my things out. Take ten picked men, and don't let any one in
+or out till I return. I shall be back before daybreak. I shall
+amuse myself to-day with thinking how I shall try the nerves of
+these Americanos. I can promise you all a handsome amusement of
+some sort, anyhow.' And he rode off.
+
+"I have often faced death, and ain't afraid of it; but the
+unruffled face and the cruel smile of that man made my flesh creep
+on my bones, as I thought of what Rube and I had got to go through
+the next day. And now," Seth said, breaking off, "it's getting
+late, and I haven't talked such a heap for years. I will finish my
+yarn another night."
+
+Very warm were the young Hardys in their thanks to Seth for this
+exciting story from his own experience, and great was the
+discussion among themselves that arose as to how the two Americans
+could possibly have made their escape from their terrible
+predicament.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+SETH CONTINUES HIS NARRATIVE OF THE MEXICAN ADVENTURE.
+
+
+The next evening the young Hardys again took their seats by Seth,
+and, without any delay, he went on with his story.
+
+"After El Zeres had ridden off, the lieutenant, Pedro, selected ten
+from the men around--for pretty well the whole camp had gathered
+round us--and told them, in the first place, to clear the house of
+the hammock and other belongings of El Zeres, and when this was
+done to carry Rube in. Bound and helpless as he was, there was a
+visible repugnance on the part of the men to touch him, so great
+was the fear which his tremendous strength had excited. However,
+six of them took him up and carried him into the hut--for it was
+little more--and threw him down like a log in the inner room. I
+walked in of my own accord, and sat down on the ground near him. I
+heard Pedro give orders to some of the men outside to take away the
+dead bodies and bury them, and for the rest to go down to their
+campfires. Then he entered the house with his other four men.
+
+"The house was just the ordinary Mexican hut. It contained two
+rooms, or rather, one room partially divided into two, the inner
+compartment forming the sleeping-room of the family. There was no
+door between the rooms, nor was there any window; the light
+entering through the wide opening into the outer room. The outer
+room had no regular windows, only some chinks or loopholes, through
+which a certain amount of light could come; but these were stopped
+up with straw, for the Mexicans are a chilly people; and as the
+door was always open, plenty of light came in through it. The house
+was not built of adobe, as are most Mexican huts, but of stones,
+with the interstices plastered with mud."
+
+"Never in my life did I feel that the game was up as I did when I
+sat down there and looked round. The men were seated on the ground
+in the next room, in full view of us, and every now and then one
+walked in to look at us. Helpless as we were, they had an uneasy
+doubt of what we might do. Rube still lay at full length on the
+ground. For a quarter of an hour I did not speak, as I thought it
+best to let him cool and quiet down a bit; and I thought and
+thought, but I couldn't, for the life of me, think out any plan of
+getting clear away. At last I thought I would stir Rube up."
+
+'How do you feel, Rube?'
+
+'Well, I feel just about tired out,' Rube said; 'just as if I had
+walked a hundred miles right on end. I've been a fool again, Seth,
+sure enough; but I've given some of them goss, that's a comfort.
+I'll just take a sleep for a few hours, and then we'll see about
+this business. 'Hello, there!' he shouted in Spanish; 'water.' For
+awhile no one attended to him; but he continued to shout, and I
+joined him, so that the men in the next room were obliged to leave
+off their talk to do as we wanted them. One of them got up and took
+a large copper pan, filled it with water from a skin, and placed it
+down between us; and then giving me a hearty kick--even then he did
+not dare kick Rube--went back to his pillow. It took some trouble
+and much rolling over before we could get so as to get our mouths
+over the pan to drink. When we had satisfied our thirst we rolled
+over again, made ourselves as comfortable as we could under the
+circumstances--which warn't saying much--and in a short time were
+both asleep, for we had only been four hours in bed for two nights.
+I was pretty well accustomed to sleep on the ground, and I slept
+without waking for nearly seven hours; for when I did so I saw at
+once it was nearly sunset. I can't say it was an agreeable waking,
+that; for I felt as if my shoulders were out of joint, and that I
+had two bands of red-hot iron round my wrists. My first move was to
+roll over and have another drink. Then I sat up and looked round.
+Rube was sitting up, looking at me.
+
+'So you are awake, Seth?'
+
+'Yes,' said I. 'Are you all right now, Rube?'
+
+'As right as can be,' Rube said in his ordinary cheerful tone;
+'except that I feel as if a fellow was sawing away at my ankles and
+wrists with a blunt knife.'
+
+'That's about the state of my wrists,' I said.
+
+'I don't mind my wrists so much,' he said; 'it's my feet bothers
+me. I shall be such a time before I can walk.'
+
+'You needn't bother about that, Rube,' said I. 'It isn't much more
+walking your feet have got to do.'
+
+'I hope they've got more to do than they've ever done yet, old
+hoss,' Rube said; 'at any rate, they've got a good thirty miles to
+do to-night.'
+
+'Are you in earnest, Rube?' said I.
+
+'Never more so,' said he. 'All we've got to do is to get away, and
+then tramp it.'
+
+'How do you mean to get away, Rube?'
+
+'Easy enough,' Rube said carelessly. 'Get our hands loose first,
+then our legs, then kill them fellows and make tracks.'
+
+Now it ain't very often that I larf out. I don't suppose I've
+larfed right out three times since I was a boy; but Rube's coolness
+tickled me so that I larfed out like a hyena. When I began, Rube he
+began; and when he larfed it was tremendous. I don't think Rube
+knew what I war larfin' at; but he told me afterward he larfed to
+see me larf, which, in all the time we had been together, he hadn't
+seen. What made us larf worse was that the Mexicans were so
+startled that they seized their rifles and rushed to the doorway,
+and stood looking at us as if we were wild beasts. Keeping the guns
+pointed at us, they walked round very carefully, and felt our cords
+to see that they were all right; and finding they were, went back
+into the next room, savage and rather scared. Our larfing made them
+terribly uneasy, I could see; and they had an idea we couldn't have
+larfed like that if we hadn't some idea of getting away. When we
+had done I said:
+
+'Now, Rube, tell me what you have planned out, that is, if you're
+downright in arnest.'
+
+'In arnest!' says he, almost angry; 'of course I'm in arnest. Do
+you think I'm going to be fool enough to stop here to be frizzled
+and sliced by that El Zeres to-morrow? 'No, it's just as I said: we
+must get our hands free; we must kill all these fellows, and be
+off.'
+
+'But how are we to get our hands free, Rube?'
+
+'That's the only point I can't make out,' he said. 'If these
+fellows would leave us alone, it would be easy enough; we could
+gnaw through each other's thongs in ten minutes; but they won't let
+us do that. All the rest is easy enough. Just think it over, Seth.'
+
+I did think it over, but I did not see my way to getting rid of our
+thongs. That done, the rest was possible enough. If we could get
+hold of a couple of rifles and take them by surprise, so as to
+clear off four or five before they could get fairly on their legs,
+I had little doubt that we could manage the rest. No doubt they
+would shut the door as it got later, and it was possible that the
+row might not be heard. If that was managed, I was sure we could
+crawl through the lines and get off. Yes, it was straightforward
+enough if we could but get rid of our cords. As I was thinking it
+over my eye fell upon the pan of water. An idea came across me.
+
+'I don't know, Rube, that it would stretch them enough to slip our
+hands out, but if we could wet these hide thongs by dipping them in
+water, we might stretch them a bit, anyhow, and ease them,'
+
+'That would be something, Seth, anyhow.'
+
+We shuffled by turn, next to the pan, and leaned back so that our
+wrists were fairly in the water. The water relieved the pain, and I
+could feel the thongs give a little, but it was only a little; they
+had been tied too carefully and well to render it possible to
+unloose them. We came to this conclusion after an hour's straining,
+and at the cost of no little pain. We agreed it was no use, and sat
+thinking over what was the next thing to do, and taking it by turns
+to cool our wrists. We did not altogether give up hope, as we
+agreed that we must try, in the short intervals between the visits
+of the Mexicans, to untie the knots of each other's cords with
+our teeth. It was possible, anyhow, for the knots would draw pretty
+easy now that the leather was wet. Suddenly an idea struck me. I
+squeezed myself back to the wall, and leaned against it.
+
+'It's all right, Rube,' said I; 'our cords are as good as off.'
+'How's that?' said Rube. 'This wall is made of rough stones, Rube,
+and there are plenty of sharp edges sticking out through the mud.
+They will cut through these wet thongs like knives.'
+
+'Hoorah!' shouted Rube at the top of his voice, with a yell that
+startled the Mexicans from their seats again, and then he commenced
+thundering out one of the songs the soldiers used to sing on the
+march. Several Mexicans came running up from the camp to ask if
+anything was the matter, Rube's yell having reached their ears.
+They were told it was only those mad Americanos amusing themselves,
+and with many angry threats of the different sort of yells we
+should give next day, they sauntered off again.
+
+'That's rather a good thing,' Rube said to me when he stopped
+making a noise. 'If any sound of the little fight we are going to
+have here reaches the camp, they will put it down to us shouting
+for our amusement.'
+
+By this time it had become perfectly dark, and the guard lighted a
+fire in the middle of the room in which they sat. A pile of wood
+had been brought in for the purpose, and when the smoke had a
+little abated, the door was shut and barred. Every three or four
+minutes one of the men would take a lighted brand and come in to
+see that we were not near to each other, and that all was secure.
+
+'What time shall we begin, Seth?' Rube asked.
+
+'In another hour or so,' I said; 'by eight. They will be gambling
+and quarreling round the fire by nine o'clock; and the talk, and
+the noise of the horses, will prevent them hearing anything here.
+We must not think of going out for two hours later, and even then
+they won't be all asleep; but we dare not put it off later, for El
+Zeres may come back earlier than he said he should, and if he does
+it's all up with us. Let's arrange our plans for good,' I said,
+'and then we can each sit up against a corner and pretend to go to
+sleep. When I am going to cut my cord I will give a very little
+cough, and then you do the same when you are free. We had better do
+that before very long, for you will be a long time before you will
+get any feeling in your feet. Rub them as hard as you can; but you
+can't do that till you get the use of your hands. When you are
+quite ready, snore gently; I'll answer in the same way if I am
+ready. Then we will keep quiet till the fellow comes in again, and
+the moment he is gone let us both creep forward: choose a time when
+the fire is burning low. You creep round your side of the room; I
+will keep mine, till we meet in the corner where the rifles are
+piled. We must then open the pans, and shake all the powder out,
+and, when that is done, each take hold of one by the barrel and
+hit. Do you quite understand and agree?'
+
+'Quite, Seth. Is there anything else?'
+
+'Yes,' I said; 'you take the door, I will take the corner where the
+arms are. We must try and keep them from coming within arm's reach
+to use their knives; but if either of us are hard pressed he must
+call, and the other must come to him.'
+
+'All right, old hoss, I long to be at work.'
+
+'So do I,' I said. 'And now don't let's have any more talk; shut
+your eyes, and keep quiet till I cough.'
+
+The men were engaged now in talking over the deeds in which they
+had been engaged, and so revolting and cold-blooded were the
+atrocities of which they boasted that I longed for the time when
+Rube and I should fall upon them. In half an hour I gave the
+signal. I had picked out a sharp stone in a convenient position,
+and it was not a minute before I felt the coil of cords loosen with
+a sudden jerk, and knew that I was free. I found my hands were
+completely numbed, and it was a long time before I could restore
+the circulation. It must have been a good half-hour before Rube
+gave the signal that he had got the cords that bound his ankles
+loosened, as of course he could not begin at them until he had the
+free use of his hands. As I had anticipated, the visits of our
+guards were rather less frequent now that they believed us to be
+asleep. Fortunately, the din and talk in the next room was now loud
+and incessant, which enabled Rube to rub, and even stamp his feet a
+little. In half an hour I heard a snore, which I answered. The
+moment the next visit was over I crawled to the door, and then,
+lying pretty nigh on my stomach, crept round to where the rifles
+were piled.
+
+The fire was burning low, and the guard were sitting so closely
+round it that the lower part of the room was in black shadow; so
+that, though I was looking out for Rube, I didn't see him till he
+was close enough to touch me. It was a delicate job opening all the
+pans, but we did it without making as much noise as would scare a
+deer, and then, each taking a rifle by the barrel, we were ready.
+Pedro was just telling a story of how he had forced an old man to
+say where his money was hid, by torturing his daughters before his
+eyes, and how, when he had told his secret, and the money was
+obtained, he had fastened them up, and set the house alight--a
+story which was received with shouts of approving laughter. As he
+finished down came the butt of Rube's rifle on his head with a
+squelch, while mine did the same on the head of the next man. For
+an instant there was a pause of astonishment, for no one knew
+exactly what had happened; then there was a wild yell of surprise
+and fear, as our rifles came down again with a crashing thud. All
+leaped to their feet, the man I aimed my next blow at rolling over,
+and just escaping it. Rube was more lucky, and just got his man as
+he was rising.
+
+'Hoorah! Seth,' he shouted, 'five down out of eleven.'
+
+We drew back now to our posts as agreed on, and the Mexicans
+drawing their knives, made a rush forward. They ain't cowards, the
+Mexicans--I will say that for them; and when these fellows found
+they were caught like rats in a trap, they fought desperately. They
+knew there was no mercy to expect from Rube and me. They divided,
+and three came at each of us. Two went down as if they were shot,
+and I was just whirling my rifle for another blow, when I heard a
+crash, and then a shout from Rube,
+
+'Help, Seth!'
+
+I saw at once what had happened. Rube's rifle, as he was making a
+blow at a man, had struck a beam over his head, and the shock had
+made it fly from his hands across the room. In another moment the
+two Mexicans were upon him with their knives. He hit out wildly,
+but he got a gash across the forehead and another on the arm in a
+moment. I made two strides across the hut, and the Mexicans who
+were attacking me, instead of trying to prevent me, made a rush to
+the corner where their rifles were, which I had left unguarded. It
+was a fatal mistake. My gun came down crash upon the head of one of
+Rube's assailants before he knew of my approach, and another minute
+did for the second. As I turned from him the remaining two Mexicans
+leveled at Rube, who had rushed across to pick up his gun, and
+myself, and gave a cry as the flints fell and there was no report.
+For a minute or two they fought desperately with the guns; but it
+was no use, and it was soon over, and we stood the masters of the
+hut, with eleven dead men round us. For they were dead every one,
+for we examined them. The stocks of our guns had broken with the
+first blow, and the rest had been given with the iron, and in no
+case had we to hit twice. I don't say it was anything like Samson
+and the donkey's jaw-bone you were telling me about, but it war
+very fair hitting. It was scarcely over when we heard several men
+come running up outside.
+
+'Is anything the matter, Pedro? We thought we heard a yell.'
+
+'No, nothing,' I said, imitating Pedro's gruff voice, which I felt
+sure they would not know through the door; 'it's only these mad
+Americanos yelling.'
+
+The men were apparently quite satisfied with the explanation, for
+in a minute or two we heard their voices receding, and then all
+became still. Presently we opened the door and looked out. Many of
+the fires had begun to burn low, but round others there was still a
+sound of laughing and singing.
+
+'Another hour,' Rube said, 'and they will all be asleep,'
+
+We threw some more wood on the fire, took some tobacco and
+cigarette paper from the pocket of one of the Mexicans, and sat
+down to smoke comfortably. We were both plaguey anxious, and
+couldn't pretend we warn't, for at any moment that rascal El Zeres
+might arrive, and then it would be all up with us. At last we
+agreed that we could not stand it any longer, and made up our minds
+to go outside and sit down against the wall of the hut till it was
+safe to make a start, and then if we heard horses coming in the
+distance we could make a move at once. We each took a hat and
+cloak, a brace of pistols, and a rifle, and went out. There we sat
+for another hour, till the camp got quiet enough to make the
+attempt. Even then we could hear by the talking that many of the
+men were still awake, but we dared not wait any longer, for we
+calculated that it must be near eleven o'clock already. We chose a
+place where the fires had burned lowest, and where everything was
+quiet, and, crawling along upon the ground, we were soon down among
+the horses. We had been too long among the Indians to have a bit of
+fear about getting through these fellows; and, lying on our faces
+we crawled along, sometimes almost touching them, for they lay very
+close together, but making no more noise than two big snakes. A
+quarter of an hour of this and we were through them, and far enough
+out on the plain to be able to get up on to our feet and break into
+a long stride. Ten more minutes and we broke into a run: there was no
+fear now of our steps being heard.
+
+'Done them, by thunder!' Rube said; 'won't El Zeres curse?'
+
+We might have been a mile and a half from the camp, when in the
+quiet night air we heard the sound of the howl of a dog. We both
+stopped as if we were shot.
+
+'Thunder!' Rube exclaimed furiously, 'if we haven't forgot the
+bloodhound.'
+
+I knew what Rube meant, for it was a well-known matter of boast of
+El Zeres that no one could ever escape him, for that his bloodhound
+would track them to the end of the world.
+
+'There's only one thing to be done,' I said; 'we must go back and
+kill that critter.'
+
+'Wait, Seth,' Rube said; 'we don't know where the darned brute is
+kept. He warn't up at the hut, and we might waste an hour in
+finding him, and when we did, he ain't a critter to be wiped out
+like a babby.'
+
+'We must risk it, Rube.' I said. 'It's all up with us if he's once
+put on our track.' Rube made no answer, and we turned toward the
+camp.
+
+We hadn't gone twenty yards when Rube said, 'Listen.' I listened,
+and sure enough I could hear out on the plain ahead a low
+trampling. There was no need of any more talk. We ran forward as
+hard as we could go, turning a little out of our course to let the
+horsemen who were coming pass us.
+
+'In another quarter of an hour they'll know all about it, Rube. It
+will take them as much more to get ready and put the dog on the
+track. They'll have some trouble in getting him to take up our
+scent with all that blood in the room. I should say we may fairly
+reckon on three-quarters of an hour before, they're well out of the
+camp.'
+
+'That's about it,' Rube said. 'They will have to tie the dog, so as
+not to lose him in the darkness. They won't gain on us very fast
+for the next two hours; we can keep this up for that at a pinch.
+After that, if we don't strike water, we are done for.'
+
+'We passed a stream yesterday, Rube; how far was it back?'
+
+'About an hour after daylight. Yes, nearly three hours from camp.
+But we are going faster now than we did then. We ought to do it in
+two hours.'
+
+"After this we didn't say any more. We wanted all our breath. It
+was well for us we had both been tramping half our lives, and that
+our legs had saved our necks more times than once on the prairies.
+We were both pretty confident we could run sixteen miles in two
+hours. But we dared not run straight. We knew that if they found we
+were keeping a line, they would let the dog go their best pace and
+gallop alongside; so we had to zigzag, sometimes going almost back
+upon our own track. We did not do this so often as we should have
+done if we had had more time."
+
+"But how did you know which way to go, Seth," Hubert asked.
+
+"We went by the stars," Seth said. "It was easier than it would
+have been by day, for when the sun's right overhead, it ain't a
+very straightforward matter to know how you are going; but there
+would be no difficulty then to scouts like Rube and me. Well, we
+had run, maybe, an hour and a quarter when we heard a faint, short
+bark far behind."
+
+'The brute is on our trail,' Rube said; 'they haven't given us so
+much start as I looked for. Another half-hour and he will be at our
+heels sure enough.'
+
+I felt this was true, and felt very bad-like for a bit. In another
+quarter of an hour the bark was a good bit nearer, and we couldn't
+go no faster than we were going. All of a sudden I said to Rube,
+'Rube, I've heard them dogs lose their smell if they taste blood.
+Let's try it; it's our only chance. Here, give me a cut in the arm,
+I can spare it better than you can; you lost a lot to-night from
+that cut.'
+
+We stopped a minute. I tore off the sleeve of my hunting shirt, and
+then Rube gave me a bit of a cut on the arm. I let the blood run
+till the sleeve was soaked and dripping, then Rube tore off a strip
+from his shirt and bandaged my arm up tight. We rolled the sleeve
+in a ball and threw it down, then took a turn, made a zigzag or two
+to puzzle the brute, and then went on our line again. For another
+ten minutes we could hear the barking get nearer and nearer, and
+then it stopped all of a sudden. On we went, and it was half an
+hour again before we heard it, and then it was a long way off.
+
+'I expect we're all right now, Seth,' Rube said.
+
+'I guess we are,' I said; 'but the sooner we strike water the
+better I shall be pleased.'
+
+It was nigh another half-hour, and we were both pretty nigh done,
+when we came upon the stream, and the dog couldn't have been more
+than a mile off. It was a bit of a thing five or six yards wide,
+and a foot or two deep in the middle.
+
+'Which way?' says Rube. 'Up's our nearest way, so we had better go
+down.'
+
+'No, no,' says I; 'they're sure to suspect that we shall try the
+wrong course to throw them off, so let's take the right.'
+
+Without another word up stream we went, as hard as we could run. In
+a few minutes we heard the dog stop barking, when we might have
+been half a mile up stream.
+
+'We must get out of this, Rube,' I said. 'Whichever way they try
+with the dog, they are safe to send horsemen both ways.'
+
+'Which side shall we get out, Seth?'
+
+'It don't matter,' I said; 'it's all a chance which side they take
+the dog. Let's take our own side.'
+
+Out we got; and we hadn't ran a quarter of a mile before we heard a
+tramping of horses coming along by the stream. We stopped to
+listen, for we knew if they had the dog with them, and if he was on
+our side of the river, we were as good as dead.
+
+'If they take the trail, Seth,' Rube said, 'it's all up with us.
+Don't let's run any more. We are men enough to shoot the four first
+who come up, and I only hope one of them may be El Zeres; that'll
+leave us a pistol each, and we will keep them for ourselves. Better
+do that, by a long way, than be pulled to pieces with hot pincers.'
+
+'A long way, Rube,' I said. 'That's agreed, then. When I give the
+word, put the barrel against your eye and fire; that's a pretty
+safe shot.'
+
+As the Mexicans got to the place where we had got out, we stopped
+and held our breath. There was no pause--on they went; another
+minute, and we felt certain they had passed the spot.
+
+'Saved, by thunder!' Rube said; and we turned and went off at a
+steady trot that we could keep up for hours. 'How long shall we
+get, do you think, Seth?'
+
+'That all depends how long they follow down stream. They can't tell
+how far we are ahead. I should think they will go two miles down;
+then they will cross the stream and come back; and if they don't
+happen to be on the right side of the stream as they pass where we
+got out, they will go up another two or three miles, and near as
+much down, before they strike the trail. We're pretty safe of half
+an hour's start, and we might get, if we're lucky, near an hour. We
+ain't safe yet, Rube, by a long way. It's near thirty miles from
+Pepita's to the camp. We've come sixteen of it good--eighteen I
+should say; we have got another twelve to the road, and we ain't
+safe then. No; our only chance is to come across a hacienda and get
+horses. There are a good many scattered about; but it's so dark we
+might pass within fifty yards and not see it. There won't be a
+streak of daylight till four, and it ain't two yet.'
+
+'Not far off, Seth.' By this time we had got our wind again, and
+quickened up into a fast swing; but our work had told on us, and we
+couldn't have gone much over seven miles an hour. Several times, as
+we went on, we could hear a trampling in the dark, and knew that we
+had scared some horses; but though we had a lasso we had brought
+with us, we might as well have tried to catch a bird with it. In an
+hour we heard the dog again, but it was a long way behind. There
+was nothing for it now but hard running, and we were still seven
+miles from the road, and even that didn't mean safety. I began to
+think we were going to lose the race, after all. In another quarter
+of an hour we stopped suddenly.
+
+'Thunder!' said Rube; 'what's that?' Some animal, that had been
+lying down, got up just in front of us.
+
+'It's a horse! Your lasso, Rube!' Rube, however, had made a
+tremendous rush forward, and, before the animal could stretch
+himself into a gallop, had got close, and grasped him by the mane.
+
+'It's no go,' Rube said, as the horse made a step forward; 'he's an
+old un, dead lame.'
+
+'Don't leave go, Rube,' I said. 'He'll do for our turn.' He was a
+miserable old beast, but I felt that he would do as well as the
+best horse in the world for us. Rube saw my meaning and in a minute
+we were both astride on his back. He tottered, and I thought he'd
+have gone down on his head. Kicking weren't of no good; so I out
+with my knife and gave him a prod, and off we went. It weren't far,
+some two hundred yards or so, but it was the way I wanted him,
+right across the line we were going. Then down he tumbled.
+
+'All right,' said I. 'You've done your work, old man; but you
+mustn't lay here, or they may light upon you and guess what's been
+up.'
+
+So we lugged him on to his feet, gave him another prod, which sent
+him limping off; and on we went on our course, sure that we were at
+last safe, for we had thrown the bloodhound altogether off our
+trail. For a mile or so we kept right away from our course, for
+fear that they should keep straight on, and, missing the scent,
+lead the dog across the trail, and so pick it up again; then we
+turned and made straight for the road.
+
+'I don't think, Rube,' I said after awhile, 'that we shall strike
+the road far off where we left it at Pepita's.'
+
+'No, I expect not, Seth. We had better bear a little more to the
+south, for they will most likely make for Pepita's, and day will
+soon be breaking now.'
+
+'We'd better not strike the road at all, Rube; likely enough, they
+will follow it down for a few miles in hopes of picking us up.'
+
+'I hope they will,' Rube said; 'and I expect so. Won't it be a
+lark, just?'
+
+'What do you mean, Rube?'
+
+'Mean? Why, didn't the Cap tell us to leave San Miguel before
+daybreak, and to ride to meet him? It warn't likely that he meant
+us to ride more than ten miles or so; so that he will be within
+that distance of San Miguel by an hour after daybreak, and will be
+at Pepita's half an hour later. If them fellows ride on, they are
+safe to fall into as nice a trap as--'
+
+'Jehoshophat!' said I. 'You're right, Rube. Let's make tracks. It
+can't be more than another four or five miles to the road, and day
+will break in half an hour.'
+
+'How strong do you reckon them, Seth?'
+
+'Fifty or sixty,' said I, 'by the regular sound of the horses.'
+
+'That's about what I guessed,' Rube said. 'There are forty of our
+chaps, and they will be fresh. We'll give 'em goss.'
+
+"We had now long ceased to hear the baying of the dog, which had
+been most unpleasantly clear when we got off the old hoss that had
+done us such a good turn. We made sure, too, that we were well
+ahead, for they would likely wait an hour in trying to pick up the
+trail again. Daylight came at last; and when it was light enough to
+see we stopped and took a look from a slight rise, and there,
+across the plain, we could see the road just where we expected.
+Nothing was moving upon it, nor, looking back, could we see any
+sign of the Mexicans. Away to the left, a mile or so, we could see
+a clump of trees, and something like the roof of a house among
+them. This, we had no doubt, was Pepita's. About a mile down the
+road the other way was a biggish wood, through which the road ran."
+
+'Let's make for that wood, Rube, and wait; the Cap will be up in
+another half-hour, and it ain't likely the Mexicans will be along
+much before that. They're likely to stop for a drink at Pepita's.'
+
+In another ten minutes we were in shelter in the wood, taking care
+not to get upon the road, in case the Mexicans should come along
+with the hound before our men. We hadn't been there twenty minutes
+before we both heard a trampling of horses; but it was a minute or
+two more before we could decide which way they were coming. At
+last, to our great comfort, we found it was the right way. Just
+before they came up I had an idea I caught a sound from the other
+way, but I couldn't have sworn to it. We lay till the troop came
+fairly up, as it might be another party of Mexicans; but it was all
+right, and we jumped out, with a cheer, into the middle of them.
+Mighty surprised they were to see us, on foot, and all dust and
+sweat. Rube's face, too, was tied up; and altogether we didn't look
+quite ourselves. They all began to talk at once; but I held up my
+hand urgent, and when they saw it was something particular they
+shut up, and I said to the Cap: 'Don't ask no questions, Cap; I'll
+tell you all arterwards. El Zeres with about fifty of his men will
+be here in about three minutes, I reckon. They've ridden thirty
+miles, and the beasts ain't fresh; so it's your own fault if one
+gets away.'
+
+The Cap didn't waste a moment in words. He ordered half his men to
+ride back two hundred yards, and to charge when they heard his
+whistle; and he and the rest turned off into the wood, which was
+very thick, and screened 'em from any one passing. Rube and I, not
+having horses, were no good for a charge; so we went on in the
+wood, as near as we could guess, halfway between them, so as to be
+ready to jump out and join in the skrimmage. It all takes some time
+to tell, but it didn't take two minutes to do, and in another
+minute we could hear the Mexicans close. On they came: we knew now
+that they had passed the Cap, and we clutched our rifles tight and
+peered out through the leaves. On they came, and we could see El
+Zeres riding first, with the bloodhound trotting along by the side
+of his horse. Just as he was opposite we heard a loud, shrill
+whistle, and the Mexicans halted with a look of uneasiness. They
+weren't left to wonder long, for in a moment there was a trampling
+of horses, and down came our fellows on both sides of them. Just
+before they got up we stepped forward with our rifles up.
+
+'El Zeres!' Rube shouted, and startled as the Mexican was, he
+looked round. He had just time to see who it was, when Rube's ball
+hit him in the head, and down he went as dead as a stone. The hound
+turned and came right at us with a deep growl of rage. I sent a
+ball through his chest and rolled him over, and just as I did so
+our fellows came down upon the Mexicans. It was a fierce fight, for
+the Mexicans were in a trap, and knew that there was no mercy for
+them. Rube and I sprang out and paid a good many of 'em off for the
+scare they had given us. We wiped them right out to the last man,
+losing only six ourselves. I don't know as ever I see a better
+skrimmage while it lasted. After it was over Rube and I mounted two
+of their horses, and rode on with the rest of them to San Miguel;
+but before we started off we told our story to the Cap, and he sent
+a couple of men back with a dispatch to the general, asking for
+five hundred men to destroy El Zeres' band at a blow. We stopped at
+Pepita's, and I never see a girl have a much worse scare than we
+gave her. She made sure it was El Zeres, and came running out to
+see if he had caught us; and when she found that she had fallen
+into the hands of the Rangers, and that we were among them, she was
+as white as a shirt in a minute. She was plucky enough, though; for
+as soon as she could get her tongue she cursed us like a wild
+woman. I expect she made sure we should have shot her for her
+treachery--and a good many of our bands would have done so right on
+end--but the Rangers never touched women. However, she warn't to go
+scot free; so we got fire, and set the house and stable in a blaze.
+
+As we rode off Rube shouted out, 'If you change your mind again
+about coming with me to Missouri, you just drop me a line, Pepita.'
+
+"I thought, as I looked at her, it was lucky for Rube she hadn't a
+rifle in her hand; she'd have shot him if she had been hung for it
+a minute afterward. We rode on to San Miguel, took Colonel Cabra
+prisoner, with his papers, and sent him back under an escort. At
+dusk the same day we got on our horses and rode back to where
+Pepita's house had stood, and where our captain expected the troops
+he had sent for. In half an hour they came up. They had a couple of
+hours to rest their horses, and then Rube and I led them straight
+to the Mexican camp. No doubt they heard us coming when we were
+close, but made sure it was El Zeres, and so didn't disturb
+themselves; and it warn't till we had wheeled round and fairly
+surrounded them that they smelt a rat. But it was too late then,
+for in another minute we were down upon them, and I don't believe
+twenty out of the whole lot got away. It was, altogether, one of
+the most successful businesses in the whole war. And I think that's
+about all the story."
+
+"Oh, thank you very much, Seth. It is a most exciting story. And
+what became of Rube?"
+
+"Rube married a year after we got back to the States, and took up a
+clearing and settled down. It was then I felt lonesome, and made up
+my mind to go south for awhile. I promised Rube that I would go and
+settle down by him after a bit, and I've concluded that it's about
+time to do so. I've saved a few hundred dollars out here, and I am
+going to start to-morrow morning at daybreak to catch the steamer
+at Rosario. I shall go up straight from Buenos Ayres to New
+Orleans, and a steamer will take me up the river in three days to
+Rube's location. Good-by, all of you. I told your father this
+afternoon."
+
+There was a hearty leave-taking, and many expressions of regret at
+his leaving; and after a shake of the hand, and many good wishes,
+the young Hardys went up to the house, really sorry to part with
+their Yankee friend.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+FARM WORK AND AMUSEMENTS.
+
+
+Although but two months had elapsed since the ground was plowed up
+and planted, the progress made by the crop of maize and pumpkins
+was surprising: the former, especially, was now nearly six feet
+high. This rapid growth was the result of the extreme fertility of
+the virgin soil, aided by the late abundant supply of water, and
+the heat of the sun. The maize had given them all a great deal to
+do; for when it was about six inches high it had to be thinned out
+so that the plants were nine or ten inches apart. This had been
+done by the united strength of the party, Mr. Hardy and the boys
+working for two hours each morning, and as much in the evening. The
+girls also had assisted, and the peons had worked the whole day,
+except from eleven to three, when the heat was too great even for
+them. Many hands make light work, and in consequence the whole
+ground under maize cultivation was thinned in little over a week.
+Latterly the maize had grown so fast that the boys declared they
+could almost see it grow, and at the end of two months after sowing
+it was all in flower. The maize, or Indian corn, strongly resembles
+water rushes in appearance, and the feathery blossom also resembles
+that of the rush. Indian corn forms the main article of food in
+South America, and in all but the Northern States of North America.
+It is equally useful and common in India, and in other tropical
+countries.
+
+Scarcely less is it used in Italy, and other parts of southern
+Europe. It was first introduced into Europe from the East by the
+great family of Polenta, who ruled the important town of Ravenna
+for nearly two hundred years. Ground maize is still called Polenta
+throughout Italy; and the great family will live in the name of the
+useful cereal they introduced when all memory of their warlike
+deeds is lost except to the learned.
+
+One evening when Mr. Hardy, with his wife and children, was
+strolling down in the cool of the evening to look with pleasure
+upon the bright green of their healthy and valuable crops, Hubert
+said:
+
+"Isn't Indian corn, papa, the great yallow heads covered with
+grain-like beads one sees in corn-dealers' shops in England?"
+
+"Yes, Hubert."
+
+"Well, if that is so, I cannot make out how those long delicate
+stems can bear the weight. They bend over like corn to every puff
+of wind. It does not seem possible that they could bear a quarter
+of the weight of their heavy yellow heads."
+
+"Nor could they, Hubert; but nature has made a wise and very
+extraordinary provision for this difficulty. All other plants and
+trees with which I am acquainted have their fruits or seeds where
+the blossom before grew. In maize it is placed in an entirely
+different part of the plant. In a very short time you will
+see--indeed you may see now in most of the plants--the stalk begin
+to thicken at a foot or eighteen inches from the ground, and in a
+little time it will burst; and the head of maize, so enveloped in
+leaves that it looks a mere bunch of them, will come forth. It will
+for a time grow larger and larger, and then the plant will wither
+and die down to the place from which the head springs. The part
+that remains will dry up until the field appears covered with dead
+stumps, with bunches of dead leaves at the top. Then it is ready
+for the harvest,"
+
+"What a strange plant, papa! I quite long for the time when the
+heads will come out. What are you going to plant upon that bit of
+land you have got ready for sowing now? It is about six acres."
+
+"I mean to plant cotton there, Hubert. I have sent to Buenos Ayres
+for seeds of what are called Carolina Upland, and I expect them
+here in a few days."
+
+"But it takes a great deal of labor, does it not, papa?"
+
+"The calculation in the Northern States, Hubert, is that one man
+can cultivate eight acres of cotton, assisted by his wife and
+children at certain periods; and that as his labor is not always
+required, he can with his family cultivate another eight or ten
+acres of other produce; so that about half of a peon's labor will
+be required, and in the hoeing and picking time we can all help."
+
+"Is not machinery required to separate the seeds from the cotton?"
+Charley asked.
+
+"It is not absolutely necessary, Charley, although it is of course
+economical when the cultivation is carried on upon a large scale.
+The variety I am going to try is sometimes called 'bowed' Carolina,
+because it used to be cleaned by placing it upon a number of
+strings stretched very tight, which were struck with a sort of bow,
+and the vibration caused the seed to separate from the cotton. I
+have a drawing of one of these contrivances in a book up at the
+house, and when the time comes you fellows shall make me one. It
+will be work for us to do indoors when the weather is too hot to be
+out. Of course if I find that it succeeds, and pays well, I shall
+take on more hands, get proper machinery, and extend the
+cultivation. I intend to plant the rows rather wide apart, so as to
+use the light plow with the ridge boards between them, instead of
+hoeing, to save labor."
+
+"How much cotton do they get from an acre?" Mrs. Hardy asked.
+
+"In the Southern States they expect twelve hundred pounds upon new
+ground--that is, twelve hundred pounds of pods, which make about
+three hundred of cleaned cotton. When I have got the cotton fairly
+in the ground I mean to plant an acre or two of tobacco, and the
+same quantity of sugar cane, as an experiment. But before I do that
+we must make a garden up at the house: that is a really urgent
+need."
+
+"Couldn't we grow rice here, papa?"
+
+"No doubt we could, Hubert; but I do not mean to try it. To succeed
+with rice, we should have to keep the ground on which it grew in a
+state of swamp, which would be very unhealthy. That is why I do not
+irrigate the fields oftener than is absolutely necessary. Anything
+approaching swampy, or even wet lands, in a climate like this,
+would be almost certain to breed malaria. Besides, we should be
+eaten alive by mosquitoes. No, I shall certainly not try rice.
+Other tropical productions I shall some day give a trial to.
+Ginger, vanilla, and other things would no doubt flourish here. I
+do not believe that any of them would give an extraordinary rate of
+profit, for though land is cheap, labor is scarce. Still it would
+be interesting, and would cause a little variety and amusement in
+our work, which is always an important point, and no doubt there
+would be generally some profit, though occasionally we may make a
+total failure."
+
+Very often at daybreak the girls would go down with their brothers
+to the river, and watch the waterfowl on its surface; they were so
+amusing as they dabbled and played in the water, unsuspicious of
+danger. Their favorites, though, were the beautiful scarlet
+flamingoes, with their slender legs, and their long, graceful
+necks, and whose great employment seemed to be to stand quiet in
+the water, where it was only two or three inches deep, and to preen
+their glossy red feathers. Over and over again the girls wished
+that they could get a few waterfowl, especially flamingoes, to tame
+them, in order that they might swim on the dam pond and come and be
+fed; and the boys had several talks with each other as to the most
+practicable way of capturing some of them. At last they thought of
+making a sort of enclosure of light boughs, with an entrance into
+which birds could easily pass, but through which they could not
+easily return, and to scatter grain up to and into the enclosure,
+to entice the birds to enter. On explaining this plan to Mr. Hardy,
+he said that he had no doubt that it would succeed in capturing
+birds, but that when caught it would be impossible to tame
+full-grown wild-fowl, and that the only plan was to find their
+nests, and take the eggs or very young birds. This they determined
+to do; and as the bushes close to the river were too thick to
+permit an examination from the shore, they started one morning
+early, and, going down to the river, entered it, and waded along
+for a considerable distance. They discovered two swans' nests, and
+several of different descriptions of ducks. In some the birds were
+sitting upon their eggs, in others the young brood were just
+hatched, and scuttled away into the bushes with the parent birds
+upon being disturbed.
+
+Charley and Hubert made no remark at breakfast upon the success of
+their expedition; but when Charley went two days after to Rosario,
+he procured from Mr. Percy, who kept a quantity of chickens, two
+sitting hens. These were placed with their nests in the bullock
+cart in a hamper; and Mrs. Hardy, who had no idea of the purpose to
+which they were to be put, was quite pleased, on their arrival at
+Mount Pleasant, at this addition to the henhouse. Indeed it had
+been long agreed that they would keep hens as soon as the maize was
+ripe. The next morning the boys went again, and brought back twenty
+eggs of various kinds of wild duck, including four swans' eggs--to
+obtain which they had to shoot the parent birds, which furnished
+the larder for days--which they placed under the hens in place of
+their own eggs, and then took the girls in triumph to see this
+commencement of their tame duck project. The little girls were
+delighted, and it was an immense amusement to them to go down
+constantly to see if the eggs were hatched, as of course no one
+could tell how long they had been sat upon previous to being taken.
+They had remarked that four of the eggs were much larger than the
+others, but had no idea that they were swans'. In the course of a
+few days six of the young ducklings were hatched, and the hens were
+both so unhappy at their difficulty of continuing to sit while they
+had the care of their young ones on their mind, that one hen and
+all the little ones were removed to a distance from the other's
+nest, and the whole of the eggs were put under the remaining hen.
+The four swans and five more ducks were safely hatched, when the
+hen refused to sit longer, and the remaining eggs were lost. Now
+that the swans were safely hatched, the boys told their sisters
+what they really were, and their delight was extreme.
+
+In a few days they were all taken down to the dam, and soon found
+their way into the water, to the great distress of their
+foster-mother, who was obliged to stand upon the bank calling in
+vain till the little ones chose to come ashore. A hencoop was soon
+knocked together from an old box, and this was placed near the dam,
+and ere long the hens became accustomed to the fancy of their
+charges for the water, and would walk about picking up insects
+while the little ones swam about on the pond. Twice a day the girls
+went down to feed them with grain and bits of boiled pumpkin--for
+the pumpkins soon began to come into bearing--and the ducklings and
+cygnets, which last were at present but little larger than the
+others, would swim rapidly toward them when they saw them, and
+would feed greedily out of their hands.
+
+It was not for some weeks later that the desire for young
+flamingoes was gratified. The boys had been out for a ride, and
+coming upon the river where it was wide, with flat sandy banks,
+round which the timber grew, they determined to tie up their,
+horses and enter the stream, to see if they could get some more
+eggs. With some difficulty they made their way through the bushes,
+and, getting into the water, waded along until a turn in the river
+brought them in sight of the flat bank. There were some twenty or
+thirty flamingoes upon it, for these birds are very gregarious.
+Some were standing in the water as usual, but the boys could not
+make out what some of the others were doing. On the flat shore were
+several heaps of earth, and across them some of the birds were
+apparently sitting with one leg straddling out each side. So
+comical was their aspect that the boys burst into a laugh, which so
+scared the flamingoes that they all took flight instantly. The boys
+now waded up to the spot, and then got ashore to see what these
+strange heaps were for. To their great delight they found that they
+were nests, and upon the top of several of them were eight or nine
+eggs carefully arranged. The legs of the flamingo are so long that
+the bird is unable to double them up and sit upon his nest in the
+usual fashion. The hen bird therefore scrapes together a pile of
+earth, on the top of which she lays her eggs, and then places
+herself astride to keep them warm. The boys had an argument whether
+they should take away two nests entire, or whether they should take
+a few eggs from each nest; but they decided upon the former plan,
+in order that each of the young broods might be hatched
+simultaneously. Upon the boys reaching home with their treasure
+their sisters' delight was unbounded, and the hens were soon placed
+upon their new charges, and, both being good sitters, took to them
+without much difficulty.
+
+When the young broods were hatched the girls were greatly
+disappointed at the appearance of little grayish fluffy balls,
+instead of the lovely red things they had expected, and were by no
+means consoled when their father told them that it would be three
+or four years before they gained their beautiful color. However,
+they became great pets, and were very droll, with their long legs,
+and slender necks, and great curved bills. They became extremely
+tame, and would, after a time, follow the girls about, and stalk up
+to the house of their own accord to be fed, their food always being
+placed in water, as they never feed by picking upon the ground, for
+which, indeed, the peculiar construction of their beak is entirely
+unfitted. They were perfectly fearless of the dogs, which, on their
+part, were too well trained to touch them; and their funny way and
+their extreme tameness were a source of constant amusement to the
+whole family.
+
+But we must now retrace our steps. After the important work of
+getting a certain amount of land under cultivation, the next most
+urgent business was the formation of a garden. The land inside the
+enclosure round the house was first plowed up, and then dug by
+hand, the turf being left in front of the house to serve as a lawn.
+The rest was planted with seeds brought from England--peas, beans,
+tomatoes, vegetable marrows, cucumbers, melons, and many others,
+some of which were natives of warm climates, while others were
+planted in small patches as an experiment. Fortunately, the well
+supplied an abundance of water, whose only drawback was that, like
+most water upon the pampas, it had a strong saline taste, which
+was, until they had become accustomed to it, very disagreeable to
+the Hardys. As the well had been dug close to the house on the
+highest part of the slope, the water was conducted from the pump by
+small channels all over the garden; and the growth of the various
+vegetables was surprising. But long before these could come into
+bearing a welcome supply was afforded by the yams and Indian corn.
+The yams resemble a sweet potato; and if the Indian corn is
+gathered green, and the little corns nibbled off, boiled, and mixed
+with a little butter, they exactly resemble the most delicate and
+delicious young peas.
+
+The young potatoes, too, had come in, so that they had now an
+abundance of vegetables, the only point in which they had before
+been deficient. Their drink was the _mate_, which may be
+termed the national beverage of Paraguay, Brazil, and the Argentine
+Republic. It is made from the leaves of the _mate Yule_, a
+plant which grows in Paraguay and Brazil. The natives generally
+drink it without sugar or milk, sucking it up from the vessel in
+which it is made through a small tube. It is, however, greatly
+improved by the addition of sugar and milk, or, better still,
+cream. This greatly softens the bitter taste which distinguishes
+it. None of the party liked it at first; but as they were assured
+by those in the country that they would like it when they became
+accustomed to it, they persevered, and after a time all came to
+prefer it even to tea.
+
+Occasionally one or other of the boys went over to Rosario with the
+cart, and Mr. Hardy bought some hundreds of young fruit
+trees--apple, pear, plum, apricot, and peach--some of which were
+planted in the garden at the sides and in rear of the house, others
+in the open beyond and round it; a light fence with one wire being
+put up to keep the cattle from trespassing. Clumps of young palms,
+bananas, and other tropical trees and shrubs were also planted
+about for the future adornment of the place. Fences were erected
+round the cultivated ground, and an enclosure was made, into which
+the cattle were driven at night. These fences were easily and
+cheaply made. The wire cost little more at Rosario than it would
+have done in England, and the chief trouble was bringing the posts,
+which were made of algaroba wood, from the town. This wood grows
+abundantly upon the upper river, and is there cut down and floated
+in great rafts down to Rosario. It is a tough wood, which splits
+readily, and is therefore admirably suited for posts. It is of a
+reddish color, and has a pretty grain when polished. All the
+furniture was made of it; and this, from constant rubbing by Sarah
+and the girls, now shone brightly, and had a very good effect.
+
+The ceilings were now put to the rooms, which were greatly improved
+in appearance thereby, and the difference in temperature was very
+marked. A very short time after the capture of the wild fowls' eggs
+it was unanimously agreed that chickens were indispensable, and a
+large hen-house was accordingly built at a short distance from the
+dam, as it was considered as well not to have any buildings, with
+the exception of the men's hut, near the house. The hen-house was
+quickly built, as it was a mere framework covered with felt, with
+bars across it for the fowls to perch upon.
+
+The floor was made, as that of the house had been, of lime and clay
+beaten hard; and a small cut was made to the dam, by which water
+could, at will, be turned over the floor to keep it clean and neat.
+The next time the cart went to Rosario it brought back fifty fowls,
+which had only cost a few dollars. Henceforth eggs and omelets
+became a regular part of the breakfast, and the puddings were
+notably improved.
+
+The chickens gave very little trouble, as they foraged about for
+themselves, finding an abundance of insects everywhere, and getting
+in addition a few pots of Indian corn every morning. Maud and Ethel
+took it by turns, week about, to take charge of the hen-house; and
+a great pleasure was it to them to watch the numerous broods of
+young chickens, and to hunt up the eggs which, in spite of the
+nests temptingly prepared for them, the hens would frequently
+persist in laying in nests of their own in the long grass.
+
+The hens had, however, a numerous foe, who were a great trouble to
+their young mistresses. These were the skunks, an animal of the
+weasel tribe, but much resembling squirrels in appearance, and
+possessing a most abominable smell; so much so that the dogs, who
+would attack almost anything, would run away from them. They were
+at first exceedingly common, and created terrible depredations
+among the hens. The girls were in despair, and called in their
+brothers to their assistance. The boys shot a good many, for the
+animals were very tame and fearless; but their number was so great
+that this method of destruction was of slight avail. They then
+prepared traps of various kinds--some made by an elastic stick bent
+down, with a noose at the end, placed at a small entrance left
+purposely in the hen-house, so that, when the skunk was about to
+enter, he touched a spring, and the stick released, flew into the
+air carrying the animal with it with the noose round its neck;
+other traps let fall a heavy piece of wood, which crushed the
+invader; and in these ways the skunks were pretty well got rid of,
+the most unpleasant work being the removal of the body from the
+trap. This had to be effected by taking hold of it with two pieces
+of wood, for the odor was so powerful that if the body was touched
+the smell would remain on the hands for days.
+
+They had now added another species of domestic animal to their
+stock, but this was the boys' charge. Mr. Hardy, when the pumpkins
+began to ripen, bought six pigs. They were of little trouble, for
+although a sty was built for them, they were allowed to wander
+about as they pleased by day, another wire being added to the fence
+round the cultivated land, to keep them from trespassing. The crop
+of pumpkins was enormous; and Mr. Hardy determined that no pigs
+should be killed for eighteen months, by which time, as these
+animals increase rapidly, there would be quite a large herd of
+them.
+
+Although an immense deal of hard work was got through during the
+four months which followed the completion of the house and the
+arrival of Mrs. Hardy and her daughters, it must not be supposed
+that it was not mingled with plenty of relaxation and amusement.
+
+There were few days when one or other of the boys did not go out
+with his gun for an hour either before sunrise or after sunset,
+seldom failing to bring home a wild fowl or two of some kind or
+other. And sometimes of an afternoon they would go out for a ride
+with their sisters, and have a chase after an ostrich, or a run
+after the gray foxes, which abounded, and were very destructive
+among the young lambs. Once or twice during these rides the boys
+brought a puma to bay; but as they always carried a ball in one of
+their barrels, with these and their revolvers they soon dispatched
+their unwelcome visitors.
+
+They had contrived an apparatus with straps and a sort of little
+pocket, in which the muzzle of the gun went, so that it hung from
+the saddle down in front of their leg; the stock of the gun being
+secured by a strap against the pommel of the saddle, at the other
+side of which was their revolver holster. This was an inconvenient
+way of carrying the gun in some respects, as the strap had to be
+unfastened to get at it, and the chance of a shot thereby lost; but
+they considered it preferable to the mode they had at first
+adopted, of riding with their guns slung behind them. This they
+gave up, because, with the utmost care, they occasionally got a
+fall, when galloping, from the armadillo holes, and the shock was
+greatly increased from the weight of the gun, besides the risk, to
+any one riding near, of the gun exploding. When riding quietly, and
+upon the lookout for game, they carried the gun in readiness upon
+their arms.
+
+It was after one of these rides, when Hubert had brought down with
+a bullet a swan which was making for his bed in the river, that
+Maud said at tea:
+
+"I wish we could shoot too; it would be a great amusement, and I
+should enjoy my rides a good deal more if I knew that I could take
+a shot in case a lion or a deer came out."
+
+"Well, girls," Mr. Hardy said, "I had always intended that you
+should learn to shoot. We have had so much to do since you came
+here that I did not think of it, and I had besides intended to wait
+until one of you expressed a desire to learn. I brought out three
+light rook-shooting rifles on purpose for you and your mamma, and
+you can begin to-morrow morning if you like."
+
+"Oh, thank you, papa, thank you very, very much; that will be
+nice!" both the girls exclaimed, clapping their hands in their
+excitement.
+
+"And what do you say, mamma?" Mr. Hardy asked.
+
+"No, thank you," Mrs. Hardy said; "I have plenty to do, and, with a
+husband and two sons and two daughters to defend me, I do not
+consider that it is essential. But I think that it will be a nice
+amusement for the girls."
+
+And so next morning, and nearly every morning afterward, the girls
+practiced with the light rifle at a mark, until in time their hands
+became so steady that at short distances of sixty or seventy yards
+they could beat their brothers, who were both really good shots.
+This was principally owing to the fact that the charge of powder
+used in these rifles was so small that there was scarcely any
+recoil to disturb the aim. It was some time before they could
+manage to hit anything flying; but they were very proud one evening
+when, having been out late with the boys, a fat goose came along
+overhead, and the girls firing simultaneously, he fell with both
+bullets in his body. After this they, too, carried their rifles out
+with them during their rides.
+
+Any one who had known Maud and Ethel Hardy at home would have
+scarcely recognized them now in the sunburnt-looking lassies, who
+sat upon their horses as if they had never known any other seat in
+their lives. Their dress, too, would have been most curious to
+English eyes. They wore wide straw hats, with a white scarf wound
+round the top to keep off the heat. Their dresses were very short,
+and made of brown holland, with a garibaldi of blue-colored
+flannel. They wore red flannel knickerbockers, and gaiters coming
+up above the knee, of a very soft, flexible leather, made of deer's
+skin. These gaiters were an absolute necessity, for the place
+literally swarmed with snakes, and they constantly found them in
+the garden when going out to gather vegetables. Most of these
+snakes were harmless; but as some of them were very deadly, the
+protection of the gaiters was quite necessary. The girls did not
+like them at first, especially as their, brothers could not help
+joking them a little, and Hubert said that they reminded him of two
+yellow-legged partridges. However, they soon became accustomed to
+them, and felt so much more comfortable about snakes afterward that
+they would not have given them up upon any account.
+
+The boys always wore high boots for the same reason, and had no
+fear whatever of the snakes; but Mr. Hardy insisted that each of
+them should always carry in a small inner pocket of their coats a
+phial of spirits of ammonia, a small surgical knife, and a piece of
+whipcord; the same articles being always kept in readiness at the
+house. His instructions were, that in case of a bite they should
+first suck the wound, then tie the whipcord round the limb above
+the place bitten, and that they should then cut deeply into the
+wound crossways, open it as much as possible, and pour in some
+spirits of ammonia; that they should then pour the rest of the
+ammonia into their water-bottle, which they always carried slung
+over their shoulders, and should drink it off. If these directions
+were instantly and thoroughly carried out, Mr. Hardy had little
+fear that the bite, even of the deadliest snake, would prove fatal.
+In addition he ordered that in case of their being near home they
+should, upon their arrival, be made to drink raw spirits until they
+could not stand, and that, if they were some distance away from
+home, and were together, the one bitten should lie down while the
+other galloped at full speed to take back a bottle of brandy, and
+order assistance to be sent. This remedy is well known throughout
+India. Any one bitten by a poisonous snake is made to drink
+spirits, which he is able to do without being affected by them, to
+an extraordinary extent; a man who at ordinary times could scarcely
+take a strong tumbler of spirits and water, being able, when
+bitten, to drink a bottle of pure brandy without being in the least
+affected by it. When the spirit does at last begin to take effect,
+and the patient shows signs of drunkenness, he is considered to be
+safe, the poison of the spirit having overcome the poison of the
+snake.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+NEIGHBORLY VISITS AND ADVICE.
+
+
+It must not be supposed that the Hardys, during the whole of this
+time, were leading a perfectly solitary life. Upon the contrary,
+they had a great deal of sociable companionship. Within a range of
+ten miles there were no less than four estancias owned by
+Englishmen, besides that of their first friend Mr. Percy. A ride of
+twenty miles is thought nothing of out on the pampas. The estate
+immediately to the rear of their own was owned by Senor Jaqueras, a
+native. The tract upon the east of his property was owned by three
+young Englishmen, whose names were Herries, Cooper, and Farquhar.
+They had all been in the army, but had sold out, and agreed to come
+out and settle together.
+
+The southwestern corner of their property came down to the river
+exactly opposite the part where the north-eastern corner of Mount
+Pleasant touched it: their house was situated about four miles from
+the Hardys. To the west of Senor Jaqueras, the estate was owned by
+two Scotchmen, brothers of the name of Jamieson: their estancia was
+nine miles distant. In the rear of the estate of Senor Jaqueras,
+and next to that of Mr. Percy, were the properties of Messrs.
+Williams and Markham: they were both about ten miles from Mount
+Pleasant. These gentlemen had all ridden over to call upon the
+newcomers within a very few days of Mr. Hardy's first arrival, and
+had offered any help in their power.
+
+The Hardys were much pleased with their visitors, who were all
+young men, with the frank, hearty manner natural to men free from
+the restraints of civilized life. The visits had been returned in a
+short time, and then for awhile all communication with the more
+distant visitors had ceased, for the Hardys were too busy to spare
+time upon distant rides. One or other of the party at Canterbury,
+as the three Englishmen had called their estancia, very frequently
+dropped in for a talk, and Mr. Hardy and the boys often rode over
+there when work was done, Canterbury was also a young
+settlement--only four or five months, indeed, older than Mount
+Pleasant--so that its owners, like themselves, had their hands full
+of work; but sometimes, when they knew that the Hardys were
+particularly hard at work, one or two of them would come over at
+daybreak and give their assistance. During the final week's work,
+especially just before Mrs. Hardy's arrival, all three came over
+and lent their aid, as did the Jamiesons.
+
+As soon as Mrs. Hardy had arrived all their neighbors came over to
+call, and a very friendly intercourse was quickly established
+between them. As there was no spare bedroom at Mount Pleasant, some
+hammocks were made, and hooks were put into the sitting-room walls,
+so that the hammocks could be slung at night and taken down in the
+morning. The English party always rode back to Canterbury, as the
+distance was so short, and the Jamiesons generally did the same;
+but Messrs. Percy, Williams, and Markham usually came over in the
+afternoon, and rode back again next morning.
+
+When the press of work was over the boys and their sisters often
+cantered over to Canterbury to tea, and sometimes, but more seldom,
+to the Jamiesons' estancia. The light-hearted young Englishmen were
+naturally more to their fancy than the quiet and thoughtful
+Scotchmen. The latter were, however, greatly esteemed by Mr. and
+Mrs. Hardy, who perceived in them a fund of quiet good sense and
+earnestness.
+
+Upon Sunday morning Mr. Hardy had service, and to this the whole of
+their friends generally came. It was held early, so that the
+Jamiesons and the Englishmen could ride back to their homes before
+the heat of the day, the other three remaining to dine, and
+returning in the cool of the evening. Canterbury was entirely a
+sheep and cattle farm. The owners had five thousand sheep, and some
+hundreds of cattle; but they had comparatively a good deal of time
+upon their hands, as stock and sheep farming does not require so
+much personal care and supervision as must be bestowed upon
+agricultural farms. The Jamiesons, on the contrary, were entirely
+occupied in tillage: they had no sheep, and only a few head of
+cattle.
+
+Mr. Hardy was remarking upon this one day to Mr. Percy, who
+replied, "Ah, the poor fellows are very unfortunate. They brought
+out a fair capital, and had as large a stock of sheep and cattle as
+the Canterbury party have. About six months, however, before you
+arrived--yes, it's just a year now--the Indians swept down upon
+them, and carried off every animal they had. They attacked the
+house, but the Jamiesons defended themselves well; and the Indians
+were anxious to get off with their booty, and so they beat a
+retreat. Pursuit was hopeless; every horse had been driven off, and
+they had to walk six miles to the next hacienda to give the news;
+and long before a party could be got together the Indians were
+beyond the possibility of pursuit. Two or three hundred sheep and a
+dozen or two of the bullocks found their way back, and these and
+their land was all that remained to the Jamiesons of their capital,
+for they had invested all they had in their stock. However, they
+looked affairs manfully in the face, sold their animals, bought a
+couple of plows and draught bullocks, hired a peon or two, and set
+to work with a will. They will get on but slowly for a time; but I
+have no doubt that they will do well in the course of a few years.
+Men with their pluck and perseverance are certain to get on. That
+puts me in mind, Hardy, of a matter upon which I had intended to
+speak to you. We are just getting now to the time of the year when
+Indian attacks are most likely to take place. Sometimes they are
+quiet for a year or two, then they are very troublesome again. Five
+or six years ago, just after I first came out, we had terrible
+times with them. Vast numbers of cattle were driven off: the sheep
+they less seldom take, because they cannot travel so fast, but they
+do drive them off sometimes. A good many shepherds were killed, and
+two or three estancias captured and burned, and the inmates
+murdered. You are now the furthest settler, and consequently the
+most exposed. Your estancia is strong and well built, and you are
+all well armed and good shots. You are, I think, in that respect
+safe, except from sudden surprise. The dogs are sure to give an
+alarm; still I should sleep with everything in readiness."
+
+"Thank you, Percy; I shall take your advice. I expected it from
+what I had heard when I bought the place; but from hearing nothing
+of Indians all this time, I had almost forgotten it. I will prepare
+for defense without the loss of a day. The house has only one
+vulnerable point--the doors and shutters. I will measure them this
+afternoon, and will get you to take over a letter and forward it to
+Rosario by the first opportunity, for some sheets of thin iron to
+cover them with."
+
+Mr. Percy promised to forward the letter the very next day by a
+bullock-cart he was sending in, and also that the same cart should
+bring them back. He said that if a conveyance were sent over in two
+days' time for them they would be in readiness at his place.
+
+This conversation caused Mr. Hardy great uneasiness. It was a
+possibility he had been quite prepared for; but he could not feel
+that the danger was really at hand without an anxious feeling. His
+thousand sheep had cost him twelve hundred and fifty dollars, and
+his cattle as much more. The lambing season had come and gone, and
+the flock of sheep had doubled in number. The cattle, too, had
+greatly increased, and the sheep were nearly ready for shearing.
+Altogether the value of the stock was over five thousand dollars.
+The loss would not be absolute ruin, as he had still three thousand
+dollars of his original capital in the bank at Buenos Ayres; but it
+would be a very serious loss.
+
+Mr. Hardy had been alone with Mr. Percy when the conversation took
+place; but he determined at once to take the boys into his entire
+confidence. He therefore called to them to come out for a stroll
+down to the dam, and told them word for word what Mr. Percy had
+related to him.
+
+Charley's eyes brightened at the thought of the excitement of a
+fight with Indians, for which when in England, eighteen months
+before, he had longed; and his fingers tightened upon his gun as he
+said, "All right, papa, let them come." Hubert's face grew a little
+paler, for he was not naturally of so plucky or pugnacious a
+disposition as his brother. However, he only said, "Well, papa, if
+they do come we shall all do our best."
+
+"I am sure you will, my boy," said his father kindly. "But there is
+no fear if it comes to fighting. We three with our arms can thrash
+a hundred of them. What I am thinking of is our cattle, and not
+ourselves. We will take good care against a sudden surprise; and
+it's more than a whole tribe could do to take Mount Pleasant if we
+are prepared."
+
+"Do you mean to tell mamma and the girls, papa?"
+
+"I mean to tell them that it is necessary for a time to be on their
+guard, that the girls are on no account to venture to ride out
+alone, and that they must not stir out of the enclosure even as far
+as the hen-house, without first of all going up to the top of the
+lookout to see that all is clear. We must see that, in future, the
+sheep and cattle and horses are all driven at night into their wire
+enclosures--we have not been very particular about the cattle
+lately--and that the gates are fastened and padlocked at night. It
+will puzzle them to get them out. Our own three horses I will have
+in future kept within our own enclosure, so that they may be always
+at hand, night or day. I bought them with a special eye to Indians;
+they are all remarkably fast; and whether we run away or pursue,
+can be relied on. And now, boys, come up to the house, and I will
+open the mysterious box."
+
+The box of which Mr. Hardy spoke was a long case, which had never
+been opened since their arrival. No entreaties of his children
+could induce Mr. Hardy to say what were its contents, and the young
+ones had often wondered and puzzled over what they could be. It had
+come, therefore, to be known in the family as the mysterious box.
+
+With greatly excited curiosity the boys now walked toward the
+house; but there was a slight delay, for as they approached Maud
+and Ethel came running to meet them.
+
+"Is anything the matter with the dam, papa? We have been watching
+you having such a long talk with the boys. What is it all about?"
+
+Mr. Hardy now told them as much as he thought proper of the state
+of things, and gave them their instructions. The girls, who had no
+idea there was any real danger, and who had besides an unlimited
+confidence in their father and brothers, were disposed to look upon
+It as fun, and Mr. Hardy had to speak quite seriously to be sure
+that his orders would be strictly attended to. The boys then
+informed them that the mysterious box was to be opened, and the
+whole party went up to the house.
+
+The box had been placed in the storeroom on the upper floor of the
+tower, and the boys took up screwdrivers and hammers to open it.
+The latter tools were not necessary, as the case was very carefully
+screwed up; and when the top was taken off it was found that there
+was an inside case of tin soldered up. As the boys were cutting
+through this they expressed their opinion that, from the extreme
+care taken, the contents must be very valuable. Still Mr. Hardy
+would give no clew; and when the case was finally opened, the
+astonishment of all was unbounded to find that it contained four
+dozen large rockets and a dozen blue-lights. One dozen of these
+rockets were ordinary signal rockets, but the rest were covered
+with strong tin cases.
+
+"Fireworks!" they all exclaimed in intense surprise. "What have you
+brought fireworks all this way for, papa?"
+
+"I will tell you, my dears. I knew that the Indians of the pampas
+were horse Indians, and the idea struck me that as they could never
+have seen rockets, they would be horribly scared at night by them.
+rockets, you know, are used in war; and even if the riders are not
+frightened, it is quite certain that the horses would be horribly
+alarmed by one or two of these rushing fiery things charging into
+their midst. I therefore had them specially made for me by a
+pyrotechnist in London. One dozen, as you see, are ordinary rockets
+of the largest size; they contain colored balls, which will give
+out a most brilliant light. One of them thrown into the air, even
+where we believe any Indians to be, will light up the plain, and
+give us a fair view of them. The other three dozen are loaded with
+crackers. As you see, I have had a strong case of tin placed over
+the ordinary case; and one of them striking a man will certainly
+knock him off his horse, and probably kill him. The roar, the rush,
+the train of fire, and finally the explosion and the volley of
+crackers in their midst would be enough to frighten their horses
+altogether beyond control. What do you think of my idea?"
+
+"Capital, capital!" they all cried.
+
+"But how, papa," Hubert asked, "will you manage to make your
+rockets go straight at the Indians? All rockets I ever saw went
+straight up into the air."
+
+"Yes, Hubert, because they were pointed up. A rocket goes whichever
+way it is pointed. Rockets in war are fired through a tube, or from
+a trough. We will use the trough. Set to at once, boys, and make a
+trough about four feet long, without ends. It must stand on legs
+high enough to raise it above the level of the wall round the top
+of the tower. Let there be two legs on the front end, and one leg
+behind; and this leg behind must have a hinge, so that, when it
+stands upright, it will be six or eight inches higher than the
+front, in case we want to fire at anything close at hand. When we
+want to elevate the head of the rocket to fire at anything at a
+distance, we pull the hind leg back, so that that end is lower than
+the front. Put a spike at the end of the leg, to let it have a firm
+hold on the floor."
+
+Charley thought a moment, and then said: "I think, papa, it would
+be firmer, and more easily managed, if we made two legs behind,
+with another one sliding up and down between them, and with holes
+in it so that it can be pegged up and down as we like."
+
+"That would be certainly better, Charley. Put your idea down upon
+paper, and let me see exactly what you mean before you begin."
+
+Charley did so, and Mr. Hardy pronounced it to be excellent; and by
+night the trough was finished, and placed in position at the top of
+the lookout.
+
+Mr. Hardy, in the course of the evening, explained to his wife that
+it was possible the Indians might venture to make a dash to carry
+off some of the cattle, and that, therefore, he had ordered the
+girls to be on the lookout, and to adopt every precaution upon
+moving out. To them he made an addition to his former instructions,
+namely, that not only should they look out before leaving the
+enclosure, but that, if one went out, the other should go up to the
+top of the tower every quarter of an hour to see that everything
+was still clear, and that if both were out, Sarah should do the
+same. The boys needed no instructions to load their revolving
+carbines, and the pistols and a double-barreled gun were handed
+over both to Lopez and Terence, with instructions to carry them
+always with them. Lopez required no orders on this score. He knew
+what Indians were, and had a perfect horror of them. Their friends
+at Canterbury were also put upon their guard, as their estates were
+also very much exposed. Three days passed over, and then the light
+iron plates arrived for the door and window shutters. Before they
+were nailed on large holes were cut in them for firing through,
+corresponding slits being cut in the woodwork. When they were
+fastened in their places all felt that Mount Pleasant could defy
+any number of assailants.
+
+Orders were given to Terence that in case of the dogs giving the
+alarm at night, the occupants of the hut were to retire at once to
+the house; to which he replied characteristically:
+
+"Sure, your honor, I suppose I may stop for a bit and pepper the
+blackguards till they get close to me."
+
+"Not at all, Terence; you are to retire at once to the house. When
+we are once all together we shall be able to decide, according to
+the number of the enemy, as to whether we shall sally out and
+pepper them, or stand upon the defensive."
+
+And so, every one having received their instructions in case of
+emergency, things went on pretty much as before.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+THE LOST CATTLE.
+
+
+A fortnight passed without the slightest incident or alarm. The
+rules which Mr. Hardy had laid down were strictly observed. The
+sheep and cattle were carefully secured at night; two or three of
+the native dogs were fastened up, down at the fold; one of the
+mastiffs was kept at the men's hut, while the other's kennel was
+placed by the house; the retrievers, as usual, sleeping indoors. A
+flagstaff was erected upon the lookout, with a red flag in
+readiness to be run up to summon those who might be away on the
+plain, and a gun was kept loaded to call attention to the signal.
+The boys, when they went out for their rides, carried their
+carbines instead of their guns. The girls fulfilled the duties of
+lookouts, going up every half-hour from daybreak to dusk; and the
+call of "Sister Anne, do you see horsemen?" was invariably answered
+in the negative. One day, however, Mr. Hardy had ridden over to
+Canterbury to arrange with his friends about hiring shearers from
+Rosario for the united flocks. The boys and Terence were in the
+fields plowing, at a distance of half a mile from the house, when
+they were startled by the sound of a gun. Looking round, they saw
+both the girls standing upon the tower: Maud had just fired the
+gun, and Ethel was pulling up the flag.
+
+"Be jabers! and the Indians have come at last!" Terence exclaimed,
+and they all three started at a run. Maud turned round and waved
+her hand to them, and then she and Ethel continued looking over the
+plain. At this moment they were joined on the tower by Mrs. Hardy
+and Sarah.
+
+"It is all right," Charley, who was of an unexcitable temperament,
+said. "The Indians must be a long way off, or the girls would be
+waving to us to make haste. Take it easy; we shall want to keep our
+hands steady."
+
+So they broke from the headlong speed at which they had started
+into a steady trot, which in five minutes brought them up to the
+house.
+
+"What is it?" they exclaimed as they gained the top of the tower.
+
+"Oh, dear, oh, dear!" Ethel said. "They have got all the animals."
+
+"And I fear they have killed Gomez and Pedro," Mrs. Hardy added.
+
+It was too evidently true. At a distance of six miles the boys
+could see a dark mass rapidly retreating, and numerous single
+specks could be seen hovering round them. Two miles from the house
+a single horseman was galloping wildly. The girls had already made
+him out to be Lopez.
+
+The boys and Terence stood speechless with dismay. The Irishman was
+the first to find his tongue,
+
+"Och, the thundering villains!" he exclaimed; "the heathen thieves!
+And to think that not one of us was there to give them a bating."
+
+"What will papa say?" Hubert ejaculated.
+
+Charley said nothing, but looked frowningly, with tightly closed
+lips, after the distant mass, while his hands closed upon his
+carbine. "How was it, Maud?" he asked at length.
+
+"I was downstairs," Maud said, "when Ethel, who had just gone up,
+called down, 'Come up, Maud, quickly; I think that something's the
+matter.' I ran up the steps, and I saw our animals a long way off,
+nearly four miles, and I saw a black mass of something going along
+fast toward them from the left. They were rather nearer to us than
+the cattle were, and were in one of the slopes of the ground, so
+that they would not have been seen by any one with the cattle;
+then, as they got quite near the animals, I saw a sudden stir. The
+beasts began to gallop away, and three black specks--who, I
+suppose, were the men--separated themselves from them and went off
+sideways. One seemed to get a start of the other two. These were
+cut off by the black mass, and I did not see anything more of them.
+Lopez got away; and though some of the others rode after him for
+about a mile, they could not overtake him. Directly I saw what it
+was, I caught up the gun and fired, and Ethel ran up the flag.
+That's all I saw."
+
+Ethel confirmed her sister's account, merely adding that, seeing
+the two bodies in the distance, one going very fast toward the
+other, she suspected that something was wrong, and so called at
+once to Maud.
+
+The animals were now quite out of sight, and the whole party went
+down to meet Lopez, who was just riding up to the enclosure. He was
+very pale, and his horse was covered with foam.
+
+"Are the peons killed, Lopez?" was Mrs. Hardy's first question.
+
+"I do not know, signora; but I should think so. The Indians caught
+them; I heard a scream," and the man shuddered. "Santa Virgine"
+--and he crossed himself piously--"what an escape! I will burn
+twenty pounds of candles upon your altar."
+
+"How was it that you were surprised, Lopez?" Charley asked. "You
+were so particularly ordered to keep a good lookout."
+
+"Well, Signor Charles, I was keeping a good lookout, and it is
+lucky that I was. I was further away than I ought to have been--I
+know that, for the signor told me not to go far; but I knew that
+the rise that I took them to was the highest in that direction, and
+that I could see for miles away into the Indian country. So I got
+out there, and Pedro and Gomez had got the sheep and cattle all
+well together, and there was no fear of them straying, for the
+grass there is very good. So the men lay down for their siesta, and
+I was standing by my horse looking over the campo. Some of the
+beasts seemed uneasy, and I thought that there must be a lion
+somewhere about. So I got on my horse, and just as I did so I heard
+a noise; and looking behind, where I had never dreamed of them, I
+saw a lot of Indians coming up at full gallop from the hollow. The
+cattle went off at the same instant; and I gave a shout to the men,
+and stuck my spurs into Carlos. It was a near touch of it, and they
+gave me a hard chase for the first mile; but my horse was fresher
+than theirs, and they gave it up."
+
+"How many Indians were there?" Charley asked.
+
+"I don't know, Signor Charles. It was only those in front that I
+caught sight of, and I never looked round after I started. Some of
+them had firearms, for eight or ten of them fired after me as I
+made off, and the arrow, fell all round me."
+
+"What do you think, girls, about the number?"
+
+The girls were silent, and then Ethel said: "They were all in a
+lump, Charley. One could not see them separately."
+
+"The lump seemed to be about the size that our cattle do when they
+are close together at the same distance. Don't you think so,
+Ethel?" Maud said.
+
+"Yes," Ethel thought that they were.
+
+"Then there must be from a hundred to a hundred and fifty of them,"
+Charley said.
+
+"I wonder what papa will do! One of us had better ride off at once
+and fetch him."
+
+"I will go," Hubert said, moving away to saddle his horse.
+
+"Stop, Hubert," Charley said; "I think you had better take Lopez's
+horse. I don't know what papa may make up his mind to do, and it is
+better to have your horse quite fresh."
+
+Hubert agreed at once, and was mounting, when Maud said: "Wait a
+moment, Hubert, I will run up to the lookout. I may see papa; it is
+nearly time for him to be home."
+
+Hubert paused while Maud ran up to the house, and in a minute
+appeared at the top of the tower. She stood for a moment looking
+across the stream toward Canterbury, and then held up her hand. "I
+can see him," she called out. "He is a long way off, but he is
+coming."
+
+Hubert was about to alight again, when Mrs. Hardy said: "You had
+better ride to meet your papa, Hubert. He will be very much alarmed
+when he sees the flag, and it will be a great satisfaction to him
+to know that we at least are all safe."
+
+Hubert at once galloped off, while Maud continued to watch her
+father. He was about two miles distant, and was riding quietly.
+Then for a little while she lost sight of him. As he came up on the
+next rise she saw him suddenly stop his horse. She guessed that he
+was gazing at the flagstaff, for there was not a breath of wind,
+and the flag drooped straight down by the pole, so that it was
+difficult to distinguish it at a distance. Then she was sure that
+he made it out, for he came on at a furious gallop; and as he came
+nearer she could see that he had taken his gun from its place and
+was carrying it across his arm in readiness for instant action. In
+a few minutes Hubert met him, and after a short pause the two rode
+together back to the house at a canter.
+
+Mr. Hardy paused at the men's hut to give Lopez a hearty rating for
+his disobedience of orders in going so far out upon the plain. Then
+he came up to the house. "This is a bad affair, my dear," he said
+cheerfully; "but as long as we are all safe we can thank God that
+it's no worse. We shall get some of our beasts back yet, or I am
+mistaken. Ethel, run down to Terence, and tell him to drive the
+bullocks that are down with the plows into their enclosure, and to
+fasten the gate after them. Maud, give all the horses a feed of
+Indian corn and some water. Boys, tell Sarah to put some cold meat
+and bread into your hunting-bags. Load the spare chambers of your
+carbines, and see that your water-gourds are full."
+
+Mr. Hardy then retired with his wife--who had been looking on
+anxiously while these orders were being given--into their own room,
+where they remained about ten minutes. When they came back into the
+sitting-room Mrs. Hardy was pale, but composed, and the children
+could see that she had been crying.
+
+"Your mamma and I have been talking the matter over, boys, and I
+have told her that I must do my best to get some, at least, of our
+animals back. I shall take you bath with me. It is unfortunate that
+two of our friends at Canterbury have ridden over early this
+morning to Mr. Percy's, and will not be back until late to-night.
+Had they been at home, they would, I know, have joined us. I
+thought at first of sending over for Mr. Farquhar, who is at home,
+but I do not like losing the time. I shall send Lopez over with a
+note, asking him to come and sleep here to-night. We shall not be
+back till to-morrow. There is no fear of another alarm to-day;
+still I shall be more comfortable in knowing that you have some one
+with you. Do not go beyond the enclosure, girls, until we return.
+Terence, too, is to remain inside, and can sleep in the house
+to-night; so also can Lopez. You will therefore be well protected.
+Let us have something to eat, and then in ten minutes we will be in
+the saddle. Charley, fetch down three blue-lights, two signal
+rockets, and two of the tin rockets. Maud, fill our pocket-flasks
+with brandy. Hubert, you boys will each take your carbine and a
+revolver; I will carry my long rifle, and the other two Colts."
+In ten minutes they were ready to mount, and after a final embrace,
+and many a "Be sure and take care of yourselves" from their mother
+and sisters, they started off across the plain at a long, steady
+gallop.
+
+"They have got just an hour's start, boys," Mr. Hardy said. "Your
+mother said that it was exactly half an hour from the first alarm
+to my arrival, and I was in the house a minute or two under that
+time. It is about half-past twelve now."
+
+"It is very fortunate, papa, that we had our horses safe up at the
+house."
+
+"Yes, boys. If we had been obliged to wait until tomorrow morning
+before starting, our chance of coming up would have been very
+slight. As it is, we shall be up with them in three or four hours.
+The sheep cannot go really fast more than twelve or fifteen miles,
+especially with their heavy fleeces on."
+
+Half an hour's riding took them to the scene of the attack. As they
+neared it they saw two figures lying upon the grass. There was no
+occasion to go near: the stiff and distorted attitudes were
+sufficient to show that they were dead.
+
+Mr. Hardy purposely avoided riding close to them, knowing that the
+shocking sight of men who have met with a violent death is apt to
+shake the nerves of any one unaccustomed to such a sight, however
+brave he may be.
+
+"They are evidently dead, poor fellows!" he said. "It is no use our
+stopping."
+
+Charley looked at the bodies with a fierce frown upon his face, and
+muttered to himself. "We'll pay them out for you, the cowardly
+scoundrels."
+
+Hubert did not even glance toward them. He was a tender-hearted boy
+and he felt his face grow pale and a strange feeling of sickness
+come over him, even at the momentary glance which he had at first
+taken at the rigid figures.
+
+"I suppose you do not mean to attack them until night, papa?"
+Charley asked.
+
+"Well, boys, I have been thinking the matter over, and I have come
+to the conclusion that it will be better to do so directly we get
+up to them."
+
+"And do you think, papa, that we three will be able to thrash the
+lot of them? They must be a poor, miserable set of cowards."
+
+"No, Charley; I do not think that we shall be able to thrash the
+lot, as you say; but with our weapons, we shall be able to give
+them a terrible lesson. If we attack at night they will soon find
+out how few are our numbers, and having no particular dread of our
+weapons, may rush at us, and overpower us in spite of them. Another
+thing, boys, is, I want to give them a lesson. They must know that
+they shan't come and murder and steal on our place with impunity."
+
+Scarcely another word was exchanged for the next hour. At a long,
+steady gallop they swept along. There was no difficulty in
+following the track, for the long grass was trampled in a wide
+swath. Several times, too, exclamations of rage burst from the boys
+as they came across a dead sheep, evidently speared by the savages
+because he could not keep up with the others. After passing several
+of them, Mr. Hardy called to the boys to halt, while he leaped off
+his horse by the side of one of the sheep, and put his hand against
+its body and into its mouth.
+
+"It's quite dead; isn't it, papa?" Hubert said.
+
+"Quite, Hubert; I never thought it was alive." And Mr. Hardy leaped
+upon his horse again. "I wanted to see how warm the body was. If we
+try again an hour's ride ahead, we shall be able to judge, by the
+increased heat of the body, as to how much we have gained on the
+Indians, and whether they are far ahead. You see, boys, when I was
+young man, I was out many times in Texas against the Comanches and
+Apaches, who are a very different enemy from these cowardly Indians
+here. One had to keep one's eyes open there, for they were every
+bit as brave as we were. Don't push on so fast, Charley. Spare your
+horse; you will want all he's got in him before you have done. I
+think that we must be gaining upon them very fast now. You see the
+dead sheep lie every hundred yards or so, instead of every quarter
+of a mile. The Indians know well enough that it would take a whole
+day out on the edge of the settlements to collect a dozen men for
+pursuit, and would have no idea that three men would set off alone;
+so I expect that they will now have slackened their pace a little,
+to give the sheep breathing time."
+
+After another ten minutes' ride Mr. Hardy again alighted, and found
+a very perceptible increase of warmth in the bodies of the sheep.
+"I do not think that they can have been dead much more than a
+quarter of an hour. Keep a sharp lookout ahead, boys; we may see
+them at the top of the next rise."
+
+Not a word was spoken for the next few minutes. Two or three slight
+swells were crossed without any sign of the enemy; and then, upon
+breasting a rather higher rise than usual, they saw a mass of
+moving beings in the distance.
+
+"Halt!" Mr. Hardy shouted, and the boys instantly drew rein. "Jump
+off, boys. Only our heads have shown against the sky. They can
+hardly have noticed them. There, hold my horse; loosen the
+saddle-girths of yours too, and let them breathe freely. Take the
+bridles out of their mouths. It seemed to me, by the glimpse I got
+of our enemies, that they were just stopping. I am going on to make
+sure of it."
+
+So saying Mr. Hardy again went forward a short distance, going on
+his hands and knees as he came on to the crest of the rise, in
+order that his head might not show above the long grass. When he
+reached it he saw at once that his first impression had been
+correct. At a distance of a little over a mile a mass of animals
+were collected, and round them were scattered a number of horses,
+while figures of men were moving among them.
+
+"It is as I thought, boys," he said when he rejoined his sons.
+"They have stopped for awhile. The animals must all be completely
+done up; they cannot have come less than thirty miles, and will
+require three or four hours' rest, at the least, before they are
+fit to travel again. One hour will do for our horses. Rinse their
+mouths out with a little water, and let them graze if they are
+disposed: in half an hour we will give them each a double handful
+of Indian corn."
+
+Having attended to their horses, which they hobbled to prevent
+their straying, Mr. Hardy and the boys sat down and made a slight
+meal. None of them felt very hungry, the excitement of the
+approaching attack having driven away the keen appetite that they
+would have otherwise gained from their ride; but Mr. Hardy begged
+the boys to endeavor to eat something, as they would be sure to
+feel the want of food later.
+
+The meal over, Mr. Hardy lit his favorite pipe, while the boys went
+cautiously up the hill to reconnoiter. There was no change; most of
+the animals were lying down, and there was little sign of movement.
+Two or three Indians, however, were standing motionless and rigid
+by their horses' sides, evidently acting as sentries. The boys
+thought that hour the longest that they had ever passed. At last,
+however, their father looked at his watch, shook the ashes out of
+his pipe and put it in his pocket. "Now, boys, it is five minutes
+to the hour. Examine your carbines and revolvers, see that
+everything is in order, and that there is no hitch. Tighten the
+saddle-girths and examine the buckles. See that your ammunition and
+spare carbine chambers are ready at hand."
+
+In another five minutes the party were in their saddles.
+
+"Now, boys, my last words. Don't ride ahead or lag behind: regulate
+your pace by mine. Look out for armadillo holes--they are more
+dangerous than the Indians. Remember my orders: on no account use
+the second chamber of your carbines unless in case of great
+urgency. Change the chambers directly you have emptied them, but
+don't fire a shot until the spare ones are charged again. Now,
+boys, hurrah for old England!"
+
+"Hurrah!" the boys both shouted as they started at a canter up the
+rise. As they caught sight of the Indians everything was quiet as
+before; but in another moment they saw the men on watch throw
+themselves on to their horses' backs, figures leaped up from the
+grass and ran toward their horses, and in little over a minute the
+whole were in motion.
+
+"Surely they are not going to run away from three men!" Charley
+said in a disgusted tone.
+
+"They won't run far, Charley," Mr. Hardy said quietly. "By the time
+that we are halfway to them they will see that we can have no one
+with us, and then they will come on quickly enough."
+
+It was as Mr. Hardy said. Keen as had been the watch kept by the
+Indians, in spite of their belief that no pursuing force could be
+sent after them, it was some little time before they could get the
+weary animals on their legs and in motion; and even at the easy
+canter at which Mr. Hardy approached, he had neared them to within
+half a mile before they were fairly off. A small party only
+continued to drive the animals, and the rest of the Indians,
+wheeling sharp round, and uttering a wild war-cry, came back at
+full gallop toward the whites.
+
+"Halt, boys-steady, dismount: take up your positions quietly. Don't
+fire till I give you the word. I shall try my rifle first."
+
+The well-trained horses, accustomed to their masters firing from
+their backs, stood as steady as if carved in stone, their heads
+turned inquiringly toward the yelling throng of horsemen who were
+approaching. Mr. Hardy and the boys had both dismounted, so that
+the horses were between them and the Indians, the saddles serving
+as rests for their firearms.
+
+"Five hundred yards, Charley?" his father asked quietly.
+
+"A little over, papa; nearly six, I should say."
+
+Mr. Hardy waited another ten seconds, and then his rifle cracked;
+and a yell of astonishment and rage broke from the Indians, as one
+of their chiefs, conspicuous from an old dragoon helmet, taken
+probably in some skirmish with the soldiers, fell from his horse.
+
+"Hurrah!" Charley cried. "Shall we fire now, papa?"
+
+"No, Charley," Mr. Hardy said as he reloaded his rifle; "wait till
+they are four hundred yards off, then fire slowly. Count ten
+between each shot, and take as steady an aim as possible. Now! Well
+done, two more of the scoundrels down. Steady, Hubert, you missed
+that time: there, that's better"
+
+The Indians yelled with rage and astonishment as man after man
+dropped before the steady and, to them, mysterious fire which was
+kept up upon them. Still they did not abate the rapidity of their
+charge.
+
+"Done, papa," Charley said as the two boys simultaneously fired
+their last shot, when the leading Indians were about two hundred
+and fifty yards distant.
+
+"Change your chambers and mount," Mr. Hardy said as he again took
+aim with his rifle.
+
+The enemy was not more than a hundred and fifty yards distant, when
+they leaped into their saddles and started at a gallop.
+
+"Steady, boys, keep your horses well in hand. Never mind their
+balls; they could no more hit a man at this distance from the back
+of a horse than they could fly. There is no chance of their
+catching us; there won't be many horses faster than ours, and ours
+are a good deal fresher. Keep a good lookout for holes."
+
+Both pursuers and pursued were now going over the ground at a
+tremendous pace. The Indians had ceased firing, for most of those
+who had guns had discharged them as Mr. Hardy and his sons had
+mounted, and it was impossible to load at the speed at which they
+were going.
+
+During the first mile of the chase Mr. Hardy had looked round
+several times, and had said each time, "We are holding our own,
+boys; they are a good hundred yards behind; keep your horses in
+hand."
+
+At the end of another mile his face brightened as he looked round.
+"All right, boys, they are tailing off fast. Three-quarters of them
+have stopped already. There are not above a score of the best
+mounted anywhere near us. Another mile and we will give them a
+lesson."
+
+The mile was soon traversed, and Mr. Hardy saw that only about
+twelve Indians had maintained their distance.
+
+[Illustration: ONSET OF THE INDIANS.]
+
+"Now is the time, boys. When I say halt, draw up and jump off, but
+take very steady aim always at the nearest. Don't throw away a
+shot. They are only a hundred yards off, and the revolvers will
+tell. Don't try to use the second chamber; there is no time for
+that. Use your pistols when you have emptied your carbines. Halt!"
+
+Not five seconds elapsed after the word was spoken before Charley's
+carbine rang out. Then came the sharp cracks of the carbines and
+pistols in close succession. The Indians hesitated at the
+tremendous fire which was opened upon them, then halted. The delay
+was fatal to them. In little over half a minute the eighteen shots
+had been fired. Five Indians lay upon the plain; another, evidently
+a chief, had been carried off across the saddle of one of his
+followers, who had leaped off when he saw him fall; and two others
+were evidently wounded, and had difficulty in keeping their seats.
+
+"Now, boys, change your chambers, and take a shot or two after
+them," Mr. Hardy said as he again reloaded his rifle.
+
+The boys, however, found by the time they were ready that the
+flying Indians were beyond any fair chance of hitting; but their
+father took a long and steady aim with his deadly rifle, and upon
+its report a horse and man went down. But the rider was in an
+instant upon his feet again, soon caught one of the riderless
+horses which had galloped off with its companions, and followed his
+comrades.
+
+"Well done, boys," Mr. Hardy said, with a hearty pat on their
+shoulders. "You have done gallantly for a first fight, and I feel
+proud of you."
+
+Both boys colored with pleasure.
+
+"How many have we killed?"
+
+"I think seven fell at our first attack, papa, and six here,
+counting the one they carried off, besides wounded."
+
+"Thirteen. It is enough to make them heartily wish themselves back.
+Now let us give the horses ten minutes' rest, and then we will stir
+them up again. We must not lose time; it will be sunset in another
+three-quarters of an hour."
+
+Half an hour's riding again brought them up to the Indians, who had
+stopped within a mile of their former halting-place.
+
+"The moon will be up by one o'clock, boys, and they mean to remain
+where they are till then. Do you see that hollow that runs just
+this side of where they are? No doubt there is a small stream
+there."
+
+This time the Indians made no move to retreat further. They knew
+now that their assailants were only three in number. They were
+armed, indeed, with weapons which, in their terrible rapidity of
+fire, were altogether beyond anything they had hitherto seen; but
+in the darkness these would be of no avail against a sudden rush.
+
+But if the Indians did not run away neither did they, as before,
+attack their assailants. Their horses had been placed in the middle
+of the cattle, with a few Indians standing by them to keep them
+quiet. The rest of the Indians were not to be seen, but Mr. Hardy
+guessed that they were lying down in the long grass, or were
+concealed among the animals.
+
+"The rascals have got a clever chief among them, boys. Except those
+half-dozen heads we see over the horses' backs, there is nothing to
+see of them. They know that if we go close they can pick us off
+with their guns and bows and arrows, without giving us a single
+fair shot at them. Don't go any nearer, boys; no doubt there are
+many of their best shots hidden in the grass."
+
+"We could scatter the cattle with a rocket, papa."
+
+"Yes, we could, Hubert, but we should gain nothing by it; they have
+got men by their horses, and would soon get the herd together
+again. No, we will keep that for the night. Halloo! to the right,
+boys, for your lives."
+
+Not a moment too soon did Mr. Hardy perceive the danger. The chief
+of the Indians, expecting another attack, had ordered twenty of his
+best mounted men to separate themselves from the main body, and to
+hide themselves in a dip of the ground near the place where the
+first attack had taken place. They were to allow the whites to
+pass, and were then to follow quietly, and fall suddenly upon them.
+
+Complete success had attended the maneuver; and it was fortunate
+that the party had no firearms, these having been distributed among
+the main body with the cattle, for they were within forty yards of
+Mr. Hardy before they were seen. It was, in fact, a repetition of
+the maneuver which had proved so successful in their attack upon
+the cattle.
+
+They were not immediately in the rear of Mr. Hardy, but rather to
+the left. As Mr. Hardy and his sons turned to fly, a number of
+Indians sprang upon their feet from among the grass, and discharged
+a volley of guns and arrows at them. Fortunately the distance was
+considerable. One of their arrows, however, struck Mr. Hardy's
+horse in the shoulder, while another stuck in the rider's arm.
+Another went through the calf of Hubert's leg, and stuck in the
+flap of the saddle.
+
+There was no time for word or complaint. They buried their spurs in
+their horses' sides, and the gallant animals, feeling that the
+occasion was urgent, seemed almost to fly. In a mile they were able
+to break into a steady gallop, the enemy being now seventy or
+eighty yards behind. Mr. Hardy had already pulled the arrow from
+his arm, and Hubert now extracted his. As he stooped to do so his
+father, who had not noticed that he was wounded, saw what he was
+doing.
+
+"Hurt much, old man?"
+
+"Not much," Hubert said; but it did hurt a good deal nevertheless.
+
+"I don't want to tire our horses any more, boys," Mr. Hardy said;
+"I shall try and stop those rascals with one of my revolvers."
+
+So saying, he drew one of his pistols from his holster, and turning
+round in his saddle, took a steady aim and fired.
+
+At the same instant, however, his horse trod in a hole and fell,
+Mr. Hardy being thrown over its head with tremendous force. The
+boys reined their horses hard in, and Hubert gave a loud cry as he
+saw his father remain stiff and unmoved on the ground. The Indians
+set up a wild yell of triumph.
+
+"Steady, Hubert. Jump off. Pick up papa's pistol. Arrange the
+horses in a triangle round him. That's right. Now don't throw away
+a shot."
+
+The nearest Indian was scarcely thirty yards off when Charley's
+bullet crashed into his brain. The three immediately following him
+fell in rapid succession, another chief's arm sank useless to his
+side, while the horse of another fell, shot through the brain.
+
+Both the boys were pale, but their hands were as steady as iron.
+They felt as if, with their father lying insensible under their
+protection, they could not miss.
+
+So terrible was the destruction which the continued fire wrought
+among the leaders that the others instinctively checked the speed
+of their horses as they approached the little group, from which
+fire and balls seemed to stream, and began to discharge arrows at
+the boys, hanging on the other side of their horses, so that by
+their foes they could not be seen, a favorite maneuver with
+the Indians. As the boys fired their last barrels they drew their
+revolvers from the holsters, and, taking aim as the Indians showed
+a head or an arm under their horses' necks or over their backs,
+their twelve barrels added to the Indians scattered over the
+ground.
+
+"Now, Hubert, give me the two last revolvers, and put the two fresh
+chambers into the carbines."
+
+Seeing only one of their foes on the defense, the Indians again
+made a rush forward. Charley shot the two first with a revolver,
+but the others charged up, and he stooped a moment to avoid a
+spear, rising a little on one side, and discharging with both hands
+his pistols at the Indians, who were now close. "Quick, Hubert," he
+said, as he shot with his last barrel an Indian who had just driven
+his spear into the heart of Mr. Hardy's horse.
+
+The animal fell dead as it stood, and the Indians with a yell
+charged at the opening, but as they did so Hubert slipped a carbine
+into his brother's hand, and the two again poured in the deadly
+fire which had so checked the Indians' advance.
+
+The continuation of the fire appalled the Indians, and the seven
+that survived turned and fled.
+
+"I will load, Hubert," Charley said, trying to speak steadily. "See
+to papa at once. Empty one of the water-gourds upon his face and
+head."
+
+Hubert looked down with a cold shudder. Neither of the boys had
+dared to think during that brief fight. They had had many falls
+before on the soft turf of the pampas, but no hurt had resulted,
+and both were more frightened at the insensibility of their father
+than at the Indian horde which were so short a distance away, and
+which would no doubt return in a few minutes in overwhelming force.
+
+Great, then, was Hubert's delight, when upon looking round he saw
+that Mr. Hardy had raised himself with his arms.
+
+"What has happened?" he said in a confused manner.
+
+"Are you hurt, papa?" Hubert asked, with tears of joy running down
+his face; "you frightened us both so dreadfully. Please drink a
+little water, and I will pour a little over your face."
+
+Mr. Hardy drank some water, and Hubert dashed some more in his
+face. "That will do, Hubert," he said with a smile; "you will drown
+me. There, I am all right now. I was stunned, I suppose. There you
+are," and he got up on to his feet; "you see I am not hurt. And
+now, where are the Indians?"
+
+"There, papa," said the boys with pardonable triumph, as they
+pointed to thirteen dead Indians.
+
+Their father could not speak. He grasped their hands warmly. He saw
+how great the danger must have been, and how gallantly his boys
+must have borne themselves.
+
+"The Indians may be back in a few minutes, papa. Your horse is
+dead, but there is one of the Indians' standing by his dead master.
+Let us catch him and shift the saddle." The animal, when they
+approached it, made no move to take flight, and they saw that his
+master's foot, as he fell, had become entangled in the lasso, and
+the well-trained beast had stood without moving. In three minutes
+the saddles were transferred, and the party again ready for fight
+or flight.
+
+"What next, papa?"
+
+"We turned to the right, and rather toward home, when we started;
+so the Indian halting-place is to the southeast of us, is it not?"
+
+"Yes, papa; as near as may be," Charley said, making out the points
+with some difficulty on the pocket compass, one of which they each
+carried, as the danger of being lost upon the pathless pampas is
+very great.
+
+"We had ridden about two miles when I got my fall, so we are a mile
+to the west of their camp. We will ride now a couple of miles due
+north. The Indians are sure to send out a scout to see whether we
+have returned home, and our track will lead them to believe that we
+have. It is dusk now. We shall get three hours' rest before we have to
+move."
+
+It was perfectly dark before they reached their halting-place. The
+saddles were again loosened, a little Indian corn, moistened with
+water, given to the horses, and another slight meal taken by
+themselves. The boys, by Mr. Hardy's orders, though sorely against
+their own wishes, then lay down to get a couple of hours' sleep;
+while Mr. Hardy went back about a hundred yards along the trail
+they had made on coming, and then turned aside and sat down at a
+distance of a few yards to watch, in case any Indian should have
+followed up their trail.
+
+Here he sat for over two hours, and then returned to the boys.
+Charley he found fast asleep. The pain of Hubert's wound had kept
+him awake. Mr. Hardy poured some water over the bandage, and
+then, waking Charley, gave them instructions as to the part they were
+to play.
+
+Both of them felt rather uncomfortable when they heard that they
+were to be separated from their father. They raised no objections,
+however, and promised to obey his instructions to the letter. They
+then mounted their horses--Hubert having to be lifted up, for his
+leg was now very stiff and sore--and then began to retrace their
+steps, keeping a hundred yards or so to the west of the track by
+which they had come.
+
+They rode in single file, and they had taken the precaution of
+fastening a piece of tape round their horses' nostrils and mouth,
+to prevent their snorting should they approach any of their own
+species. The night was dark, but the stars shone out clear and
+bright. At starting Mr. Hardy had opened his watch, and had felt by
+the hands that it was ten o'clock. After some time he felt again.
+
+It was just half an hour from the time of their starting.
+
+"Now, boys, we are somewhere close to the place of your fight. In
+another ten minutes we must separate."
+
+At the end of that time they again closed up.
+
+"Now, boys, you see that bright star. That is nearly due east of
+us; go on as nearly as you can guess for ten minutes, at a walk, as
+before. You will then be within a mile of the enemy. Then get off
+your horses. Mind, on no account whatever are you to leave their
+bridles, but stand with one hand on the saddle, ready to throw
+yourself into it. Keep two blue-lights, and give me one. Don't
+speak a word, but listen as if your lives depended upon detecting a
+sound, as indeed they do. You are to remain there until you see
+that I have fairly succeeded and then you are to dash in behind the
+cattle and fire off your revolvers, and shout so as to quicken
+their pace as much as possible. I do not think there is the least
+fear of the Indians following, the rockets will scare them too
+much. When you have chased the herd for about two miles, draw aside
+half a mile on their side, and then listen for the Indians passing
+in pursuit of the cattle; wait ten minutes, and then blow your
+dog-whistle--a sharp, short note. If you hear Indians following
+you, or think there is danger, blow twice, and go still further to
+the right. God bless you, boys. I don't think there is much fear of
+your falling upon any scouts; they have been too badly cut up
+to-day, and must look upon our guns as witches. I need not say keep
+together, and, if attacked, light a blue-light and throw it down;
+ride a short way out of its circle of light, and I will come
+straight to you through everything. Don't be nervous about me.
+There is not the least danger."
+
+In another minute the boys lost sight of their father, and turning
+their horses proceeded in the direction he had ordered. Every now
+and then they stopped to listen, but not a sound could they hear.
+Their own horses' hoofs made no noise as they fell upon the soft
+turf.
+
+At the end of the ten minutes, just as Charley was thinking of
+stopping, they heard a sound which caused them to halt
+simultaneously. It was the low baa of a sheep, and seemed to come
+from directly ahead of them. Charley now alighted, and Hubert
+brought his horse up beside him, keeping his place, however, in the
+saddle, but leaning forward on the neck of his horse, for he felt
+that if he got off he should be unable to regain his seat hurriedly
+in case of alarm.
+
+"About a mile off, I should say, by the sound," Charley whispered;
+"and just in the direction we expected."
+
+The spot Charley had chosen for the halt was a slight hollow,
+running east and west; so that, even had the moon been up, they
+would not have been visible except to any one in the line of the
+hollow.
+
+Here, their carbines cocked and ready for instant use, they
+remained standing for what appeared to them ages, listening with
+the most intense earnestness for any sound which might tell of the
+failure or success of their father's enterprise.
+
+Mr. Hardy had ridden on for, as nearly as he could tell, two miles,
+so that he was now to the southwest of the enemy; then, turning
+west, he kept along for another mile, when he judged that he was,
+as nearly as possible, a mile in their direct rear. He now advanced
+with the greatest caution, every faculty absorbed in the sense of
+listening. He was soon rewarded by the sound of the baaing of the
+sheep; and dismounting and leading his horse, he gradually
+approached the spot. At last, on ascending a slight rise, he
+fancied that he could make out a black mass, at a distance of a
+quarter of a mile. Of this, however, he was not certain; but he was
+sure, from an occasional sound, that the herd was exactly in this
+direction, and at about that distance.
+
+He now left his horse, taking the precaution of tying all four
+legs, to prevent his starting off at the sound of the rockets. He
+next set to work to cut some turf, with which he formed a narrow
+sloping bank, with a hollow for the rocket to rest in--calculating
+the exact distance, and the angle required. During this operation
+he stopped every minute or two and listened with his ear on the
+ground; but except a faint stamping noise from the distant cattle
+all was quiet.
+
+All being prepared, Mr. Hardy took the signal rocket, and placing
+it at a much higher angle than that intended for the others, struck
+a match and applied it to the touch-paper. In a moment afterward
+there was a loud roar, and the rocket soared up, with its train of
+brilliant sparks behind it, and burst almost over the Indian camp.
+Five or six balls of an intense white light broke from it, and
+gradually fell toward the ground, lighting tip the whole
+surrounding plain.
+
+A yell of astonishment and fear broke from the Indians, and in a
+moment another rocket rushed out.
+
+Mr. Hardy watched its fiery way with anxiety, and saw with delight
+that its direction was true. Describing a slight curve, it rushed
+full at the black mass, struck something, turned abruptly, and then
+exploded with a loud report, followed instantly by a cracking
+noise, like a straggling fusillade of musketry.
+
+It had scarcely ceased before the third followed it, greeted, like
+its predecessors, with a yell from the Indians.
+
+Its success was equal to that of its predecessors, and Mr. Hardy
+was delighted by the sound of a dull, heavy noise, like distant
+thunder, and knew, that the success was complete, and that he had
+stampeded the cattle.
+
+He now ran to his horse, which was trembling in every limb and
+struggling wildly to escape, soothed it by patting it, loosed its
+bonds, sprang into the saddle, and went off at full gallop in the
+direction by which he had come. He had not ridden very far before
+he heard, in the still night air, the repeated sound of firearms,
+and knew that the boys were upon the trail of the cattle. Mr. Hardy
+had little fear of the Indians pursuing them; he felt sure that the
+slaughter of the day by the new and mysterious firearms, together
+with the effect of the rockets, would have too much terrified and
+cowed them for them to think of anything but flight. He was,
+however, much alarmed when, after a quarter of a hour's riding, he
+heard a single sharp whistle at about a few hundred yards'
+distance.
+
+"Hurrah! papa," the boys said as he rode up to them. "They have
+gone by at a tremendous rush--sheep and cattle and all. We started
+the moment we saw your first rocket, and got up just as they rushed
+past, and we joined in behind and fired, and yelled till we were
+hoarse. I don't think they will stop again to-night."
+
+"Did you see or hear anything of the Indians, boys?"
+
+"Nothing, papa. When the first rocket burst we saw several dark
+figures leap up from the grass--where they had been, no doubt,
+scouting--and run toward the camp but that was all. What are we to
+do now?"
+
+"Ride on straight for home. We need not trouble about the animals;
+they won't stop till they are back. We must go easily, for our
+horses have done a very long day's work already. They have been
+between fifty and sixty miles. I think that we had better ride on
+for another hour. By that time the moon will be up, and we shall be
+able to see for miles across the plain. Then we will halt till
+daybreak--it will only be three hours--and the horses will be able
+to carry us in at a canter afterward."
+
+And so it was done. In an hour the moon was fairly up, and,
+choosing a rise whence a clear view could be obtained, the horses
+were allowed to feed, and Mr. Hardy and Hubert lay down to sleep,
+Charley taking the post of sentry, with orders to wake the others
+at daybreak.
+
+The day was just dawning when he aroused them. "Wake up, papa.
+There are some figures coming over the plain."
+
+Mr. Hardy and Hubert were on their feet in an instant. "Where,
+Charley?"
+
+"From the north, papa. They must have passed us in their pursuit of
+the cattle, and are now returning--empty-handed, anyhow; for there
+are only seven or eight of them, and they are driving nothing
+before them."
+
+By this time all three were in the saddle again.
+
+"Shall we attack them, papa?"
+
+"No, boys; we have given them quite a severe lesson enough. At the
+same time, we will move a little across, so that we can get a good
+sight of them as they pass, and make sure that they have got
+nothing with them."
+
+"They are coming exactly this way, papa."
+
+"Yes, I see, Hubert; they are no doubt riding back upon their
+trail. They will turn off quickly enough when they see us."
+
+But the newcomers did not do so, continuing straight forward.
+
+"Get your carbines ready, boys; but don't fire till I tell you.
+They must belong to some other party, and cannot know what has
+happened. No doubt they take us for Indians."
+
+"I don't think they are Indians at all," Hubert said as the figures
+rapidly approached.
+
+"Don't you, Hubert? We shall soon see. Halloo!"
+
+"Halloo! hurrah!" came back to them; and in another five minutes
+they were shaking hands heartily with their three friends from
+Canterbury, the Jamiesons, and two or three other neighboring
+settlers.
+
+They told them that Farquhar, as soon as Lopez brought news of the
+attack, had sent mounted men off to all the other settlements,
+begging them to meet that night at Mount Pleasant. By nine o'clock
+they had assembled, and, after a consultation, had agreed that the
+Indians would be satisfied with their present booty, and that
+therefore no guard would be necessary at their own estancias.
+
+A good feed and four hours' rest had been given to their horses,
+and when the moon rose they had started. Two hours after leaving
+they had seen a dark mass approaching, and had prepared for an
+encounter; but it had turned out to be the animals, who were going
+toward home at a steady pace. There seemed, they said, to be a good
+many horses among them.
+
+Assured by this that some encounter or other had taken place with
+the Indians, they had ridden on with much anxiety, and were greatly
+relieved at finding Mr. Hardy and his boys safe.
+
+The whole party now proceeded at a rapid pace toward home, which
+they reached in four hours' riding. As they came in sight of the
+watch-tower Mr. Herries separated himself from the others, and rode
+thirty or forty yards away to the left, returning to the others.
+This he repeated three times, greatly to Mr. Hardy's surprise.
+
+"What are you doing, Herries?" he asked.
+
+"I am letting them know you are all well. We agreed upon that
+signal before we started. They would be able to notice one separate
+himself from the rest in that way as far as they could see us, and
+long before they could make out any other sort of signal."
+
+In a short time three black spots could be seen upon the plain in
+the distance. These the boys very shortly pronounced to be Mrs.
+Hardy and the girls.
+
+When they approached the rest of the party fell back, to allow Mr.
+Hardy and his sons to ride forward and have the pleasure of the
+first meeting to themselves. Needless is it to tell with what a
+feeling of delight and thankfulness Mrs. Hardy, Maud, and Ethel
+received them. After the first congratulations the girls observed
+that Mr. Hardy had his arm bound up with a handkerchief.
+
+"Are you hurt, papa?" they exclaimed anxiously.
+
+"Nothing to speak of--only an arrow in my arm. Old Hubert has got
+the worst of it: he has had one through the calf of his leg."
+
+"Poor old Hubert!" they cried. And Hubert had some difficulty in
+persuading the girls that he could wait on very fairly till he
+reached home without his being bandaged or otherwise touched.
+
+"And how did it all happen?" Mrs. Hardy asked.
+
+"I will tell you all about it when we have had breakfast, my dear,"
+her husband said. "I have told our friends nothing about it yet,
+for it is a long story, and one telling will do for it. I suppose
+the animals have got back? How many are missing?"
+
+"Lopez came in from counting them just as we started," Mrs. Hardy
+said. "He says there are only four or five cattle missing, and
+about a couple of hundred sheep; and, do you know, in addition to
+our own horses, there are a hundred and twenty-three Indian
+horses?"
+
+"Hurrah!" the boys shouted delightedly, "That is a triumph; isn't
+it, papa?"
+
+"It is indeed, boys; and explains readily enough how it was that
+there was not the slightest attempt at pursuit. The Indian horses
+evidently broke their lariats and joined in the stampede. I suppose
+Lopez has driven them all into the enclosure?"
+
+"Oh, yes, papa. They went in by themselves with our own animals,
+and Terence shut the gate at once."
+
+In another quarter of an hour they reached the house, received by
+Sarah and Terence--the latter being almost beside himself with joy
+at his master's safe return, and with vexation when he heard that
+there had been a fight, and that he had not been able to take part
+in it.
+
+Orders had been given to Sarah to prepare breakfast the instant the
+returning party had been seen, and their signal of "all safe" been
+made out. It was now ready; but before sitting down to it Mr. Hardy
+begged all present to join in a short thanksgiving to God for their
+preservation from extreme peril.
+
+All knelt, and as they followed Mr. Hardy's words, they were sure,
+from the emotion with which he spoke, that the peril, of the
+particulars of which they were at present ignorant, had been indeed
+a most imminent one.
+
+This duty performed, all fell to with great heartiness to
+breakfast; and when that was over Mr. Hardy related the whole
+story. Very greatly were Mrs. Hardy and the girls amazed at the
+thoughts of the great peril through which their father and the boys
+had passed, and at the account of the defense by the boys when
+their father was lying insensible. Mrs. Hardy could not restrain
+herself from sobbing in her husband's arms at the thought of his
+fearful danger, while the girls cried sore and kissed their
+brothers, and all their friends crowded round them and wrung their
+hands warmly; while Terence sought relief by going out into the
+garden, dancing a sort of jig, and giving vent to a series of wild
+war-whoops.
+
+It was some time before all were sufficiently calm to listen to the
+remainder of the story, which was received with renewed
+congratulations.
+
+When it was all over a council was held, and it was agreed that
+there was no chance whatever of the Indians returning to renew the
+contest, as they would be helpless on foot; but that if by a spy
+they found out that their horses were there, they might endeavor to
+recover them. It was therefore agreed that they should be driven
+over at once to Mr. Percy's, there to remain until a purchaser was
+obtained for them. In the afternoon the party dispersed, with many
+thanks from the Hardys for their prompt assistance.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+QUIET TIMES.
+
+
+"After a storm comes a calm:" a saying true in the case of the
+Hardys, as in that of most others. All their neighbors agreed that
+after the very severe loss of the Indians, and the capture of the
+whole of their horses, there was no chance whatever of another
+attack, at any rate for many months. After that it was possible,
+and indeed probable, that they would endeavor to take vengeance for
+their disastrous defeat; but that at present they would be too
+crippled and disheartened to think of it.
+
+The settlers were now, therefore, able to give their whole
+attention to the farm. The first operation was the sheep-shearing.
+Four men had been hired to do the shearing at Canterbury, and then
+to come over to Mount Pleasant. Charley rode over to their
+neighbors' with Mrs. Hardy and his sisters, Mr. Hardy and Hubert
+remaining at home--the latter laid up with the wound in his leg.
+
+It was an amusing sight to see three or four hundred sheep driven
+into an enclosure, and then dragged out by the shearers. These men
+were paid according to the number shorn, and were very expert, a
+good hand getting through a hundred a day. They were rather rough,
+though, in their work, and the girls soon went away from the
+shearing-place with a feeling of pity and disgust, for the shearers
+often cut the sheep badly. Each man had a pot of tar by his side,
+with which he smeared over any wound. A certain sum was stopped
+from their pay for each sheep upon which they made a cut of over a
+certain length; but although this made them careful to a certain
+extent, they still wounded a great many of the poor creatures.
+
+A much more exciting amusement was seeing the branding of the
+cattle, which took place after the shearing was over. The animals
+were let out, one by one, from their enclosure, and, as they passed
+along a sort of lane formed of hurdles, they were lassoed and
+thrown on to the ground. The hot branding-iron was then clapped
+against their shoulder, and was received by a roar of rage and
+pain. The lasso was then loosened, and the animal went off at a
+gallop to join his companions on the plain. Some caution was
+required in this process, for sometimes the animals, upon being
+released, would charge their tormenters, who then had to make a
+hasty leap over the hurdles; Terence, who stood behind them, being
+in readiness to thrust a goad against the animals' rear, and this
+always had the effect of turning them. For a few days after this
+the cattle were rather wild, but they soon forgot their fright and
+pain, and returned to their usual ways.
+
+Mr. Hardy had by this time been long enough in the country to feel
+sure of his position. He therefore determined to embark the rest of
+his capital in agricultural operations. He engaged ten native
+peons, and set-to to extend the land under tillage. The
+watercourses from the dam were deepened and lengthened, and side
+channels cut, so that the work of irrigation could be effectually
+carried on over the whole of the low-lying land, the water being
+sufficient for the purpose for nearly ten months in the year. Four
+plows were kept steadily at work, and the ground was sown with
+alfalfa or lucern as fast as it was got into condition. Patches of
+Indian corn, pumpkins, and other vegetables were also planted. Mr.
+Hardy resolved that until the country beyond him became so settled
+that there could be little danger from Indian incursions, he would
+not increase his stock of sheep and cattle, but would each year
+sell off the increase.
+
+He also decided upon entering extensively upon dairy operations. He
+had already ascertained that a ready sale could be obtained, among
+the European residents of Rosario and Buenos Ayres, of any amount
+of butter and fresh cheese that he could produce, and that European
+prices would be readily given for them. Up to the present time the
+butter made had been obtained from the milk of two cows only, but
+he now determined to try the experiment upon a large scale.
+
+A dairy was first to be made. This was partially cut out of the
+side of the slope, and lined with sun-baked bricks. Against the
+walls, which projected above the ground, earth was piled, to make
+them of a very considerable thickness. Strong beams were placed
+across the roof; over these rafters was nailed felt, whitewashed
+upon both sides to keep out insects. Upon this was placed a
+considerable thickness of rushes, and, over all, puddled clay was
+spread a foot deep. Ventilation was given by a wide chimney rising
+behind it, and light entered by two windows in front. The whole of
+the interior was whitewashed.
+
+In this way a dairy was obtained which, from the thickness of its
+walls, was cool enough for the purpose during the hottest weather.
+Preparations were now made for breaking in the cows to be milked. A
+sort of lane was made of two strong fences of iron wire. This lane
+was of the shape of a funnel, narrowing at one end to little more
+than the width of a cow. At the end of this was a gate, and
+attached to the gate a light trough filled with fresh alfalfa.
+
+Half a dozen cows which had recently calved were now separated from
+the herd, and driven into the wide end of the enclosure. One by one
+they approached the narrow end, and when one had reached the
+extremity, and had begun to devour the alfalfa, of which they are
+very fond, a bar was let down behind her, so that she could now
+neither advance, retreat, nor turn round.
+
+One of the boys now began cautiously and quietly to milk her, and
+the cows in few cases offered any resistance. One or two animals
+were, however, very obstreperous, but were speedily subdued by
+having their legs firmly fastened to the posts behind. In a few
+days all were reconciled to the process, and ere long would come in
+night and morning to be milked, with as much regularity as English
+cows would have done.
+
+The wives of the peons were now taught to milk; and more and more
+cows were gradually added to the number, until in six months there
+were fifty cows in full milk. Maud and Ethel had now no longer
+anything to do with the house, Mrs. Hardy undertaking the entire
+management of that department, while the girls had charge of the
+fowl-house and dairy.
+
+The milk was made partly into butter, partly into fresh cheese.
+These were sent off once a week to catch the steamer for Buenos
+Ayres. Mr. Hardy had a light cart made for one horse, and by this
+conveyance the butter--starting as soon as the sun went
+down--arrived in Rosario in time for the early boat to the capital.
+It was sent in large baskets made of rushes, and packed in many
+layers of cool, fresh leaves; so that it arrived at Buenos Ayres,
+forty hours after leaving Mount Pleasant, perfectly fresh and good.
+The skim milk was given to the pigs, who had already increased to
+quite a numerous colony.
+
+Although they had been planted less than a year, the fruit trees
+round the house had thriven in a surprising manner, and already
+bore a crop of fruit more than sufficient for the utmost wants of
+the household. Peaches and nectarines, apricots and plums, appeared
+at every meal, either fresh, stewed, or in puddings, and afforded a
+very pleasant change and addition to their diet. As Maud said one
+day, they would have been perfectly happy had it not been for the
+frogs.
+
+These animals were a very great nuisance. They literally swarmed.
+Do what they would, the Hardys could not get rid of them. If they
+would but have kept out of the house, no one would have minded
+them; indeed, as they destroyed a good many insects, they would
+have been welcome visitors in the garden; but this was just what
+they would not do. The door always stood open, and they evidently
+considered that as an invitation to walk in. There they would hide
+behind boxes, or get under beds, and into water-jugs and baths,
+and, in fact, into every possible corner, They would even get into
+boots; and these had always to be shaken before being put on, in
+case frogs or insects should have taken up their abode there.
+
+It used at first to be quite a matter of difficulty to know what to
+do with the frogs after they were caught; but after a time a
+covered basket was kept outside the door, and into this the frogs
+were popped, and taken once a day and emptied into the stream. At
+first they had got into the well, and had proved a great nuisance;
+and they were only got rid of by nearly emptying the well out with
+buckets, and by then building a wall round its mouth, with a
+tightly-fitting lid.
+
+Insects of all kinds were indeed a great pest, scorpions being by
+no means uncommon, while large centipedes occasionally intruded
+into the house. These creatures were a great trouble to the girls
+in their dairy, for the frogs and toads would climb up the walls,
+and fall squash into the milk-pans. The only way that they could be
+at all kept out was by having the door sawn asunder three feet from
+the ground, so that the lower half could be shut while the girls
+were engaged inside. However, in spite of the utmost pains, the
+little ones would crawl in through crevices, or leap in at the window;
+and at last the girls had to get wicker-work covers made
+for all the pans; and as the natives are very skillful at this
+work, they were thus enabled to keep the milk clean. Almost as
+great a trouble as the frogs were the brocachas, who committed
+terrible havoc in the garden and among the crops. They are about
+the size, and have somewhat the appearance of hares, and burrow in
+immense quantities in the pampas. The only way to get rid of them
+was by puffing the fumes of burning sulphur down into their holes;
+and it was quite a part of the boys' regular work to go out with
+the machine for the purpose, and to suffocate these troublesome
+creatures. Their holes, however, are not so dangerous to horsemen
+as are those of the armadillos, as the ground is always bare in
+their neighborhood.
+
+The armadillos are of three or four species, all of them small. The
+peludo is about a foot in length, and has hair sticking out between
+his scales. The muletas are smaller. Both are excellent eating; but
+the girls were some time before they could bring themselves to
+touch them. The matajo, in addition to the protection of his I
+scales, is able to roll himself into a ball at the approach of
+danger, and, clothed in his impervious armor, is proof against
+any attacks except those of man. These animals are so common that the
+plain is in many cases quite honeycombed with them.
+
+The girls had a great scare the first time they came upon an
+iguana, thinking that it was a crocodile. These great lizards are
+about five feet long, and are ferocious-looking, but very harmless
+unless attacked. Then they will defend themselves, and can inflict
+a sharp blow with their tails, or a severe bite with their teeth.
+They are very common, and the Indians eat them, and say that the
+meat is excellent; but the young Hardys could never be persuaded to
+taste it. Thus matters proceeded for some time without any
+noteworthy incident. Their circle of acquaintances grew little by
+little. Several neighboring plots had been taken up; and although
+the new settlers had little time for making visits, still the very
+fact of their presence near gave a feeling of companionship and
+security. Very frequently young men would arrive with letters of
+introduction, and would stay a few days with them while they
+inspected the country.
+
+Their household, too, had received an increase. A young Englishman
+named Fitzgerald, the son of some very old friend of the Hardys,
+had written expressing a very strong desire to come out, and asking
+their advice in the matter. Several letters had been exchanged, and
+at length, at Mr. Fitzgerald's earnest request, Mr. Hardy agreed to
+receive his son for a year, to learn the business of a pampas
+farmer, before he embarked upon his own account. A small room was
+accordingly cleared out for him, and Mr. Hardy never had any reason
+to regret having received him. He was a pleasant, light-hearted
+young fellow of about twenty years of age.
+
+One change, however, had taken place which deserves mention. Sarah
+one day came to her mistress, and with much blushing and hesitation
+said that Terence Kelly had asked her to marry him.
+
+Mrs. Hardy had long suspected that an attachment had sprung up
+between the Irishman and her servant, so she only smiled and said,
+"Well, Sarah, and what did you say to Terence? The year you agreed
+to stop with us is over, so you are at liberty to do as you like,
+you know."
+
+"Oh, ma'am, but I don't want to leave you. That is just what I told
+Terence. 'If master and mistress are willing that I shall marry you
+and stay on with them as before, I won't say no, Terence; but if
+they say that they would not take a married servant, then Terence,
+we must stay as we are.'"
+
+"I have no objection at all, Sarah, and I think I can answer for
+Mr. Hardy having none. Terence is a very good, steady fellow, and I
+know that Mr. Hardy has a high opinion of him; so you could not
+make a marriage which would please us more. We should be very sorry
+to Jose you, but we could not in any case have opposed you marrying
+whom you liked, and now we shall have the satisfaction of keeping
+you here with us."
+
+And so it was settled, and a fortnight afterward Terence and Sarah
+had two days' holiday, and went down to Buenos Ayres, where there
+was an English church, and came back again man and wife. After that
+each went back to work as usual, and the only change was, that
+Terence now took his meals and lived in the house instead of down
+in the men's huts. By this time they had begun to find out which of
+the crops peculiar to warm countries would pay, and which would
+not, or rather--for they all paid more or less--which was the most
+suitable.
+
+The cotton crop had proved a success; the field had in time been
+covered with cotton plants, which had burst first into a bright
+yellow blossom, and had then been covered with many balls of white
+fluff. The picking the cotton had been looked upon at first as
+great fun, although it had proved hard work before it was finished.
+
+Its weight had rather exceeded Mr. Hardy's anticipation. The
+process of cleaning the cotton from the pods and seeds had proved a
+long and troublesome operation, and had taken an immense time.
+Judging by the progress that they at first made with it, they
+really began to despair of ever finishing it, but with practice
+they became more adroit. Still it was found to be too great a labor
+during the heat of the day, although carried on within doors. It
+had been a dirty work too; the light particles of fluff had got
+everywhere, and at the end of a couple of hours' work the party had
+looked like a family of bakers. Indeed, before more than a quarter
+of the quantity raised was cleaned they were heartily sick of the
+job, and the remainder was sold in the pod to an Englishman who had
+brought out machinery, and was attempting to raise cotton near
+Buenos Ayres. Although the profits had been considerable, it was
+unanimously determined that the experiment should not be repeated,
+at any rate for the present.
+
+Mr. Hardy had not at first carried out his idea of planting a
+couple of acres with tobacco and sugar-cane, the ground having been
+required for other purposes. He had not, however abandoned the
+idea; and about two months before the marriage of Terence and Sarah
+he had planted some tobacco, which was, upon their return from
+Buenos Ayres, ready to be picked.
+
+The culture of tobacco requires considerable care. The ground is
+first prepared with great care, and is well and thoroughly manured;
+but this was not required in the present case, as the rich virgin
+soil needed no artificial aid. It is then dug in beds something
+like asparagus beds, about two feet wide, with a deep trench
+between each. The seeds are raised in a seed-bed, and when nine or
+ten inches high they are taken up and carefully transplanted into
+the beds, two rows being placed in each, and the plants being a
+foot apart.
+
+There are various methods of cultivation, but this was the one
+adopted by Mr. Hardy. The plants grew rapidly, the ground between
+them being occasionally hoed, and kept free from weeds. When they
+were four feet high the tops were nipped off, and any leaves which
+showed signs of disease were removed. Each stem had from eight to
+ten leaves. When the leaves began to turn rather yellow, Mr. Hardy
+announced that the time for cutting had arrived, and one morning
+all hands were mustered to the work. It consisted merely in cutting
+the stems at a level with the earth, and laying the plants down
+gently upon the ground. By breakfast-time the two acres were
+cleared. They were left all day to dry in the sun, and a little
+before sunset they were taken up, and carried up to one of the
+store-sheds, which had been cleared and prepared for the purpose.
+Here they were placed in a heap on the ground, covered over with
+raw hides and mats, and left for three days to heat. After this
+they were uncovered, and hung up on laths from the roof, close to
+each other, and yet sufficiently far apart to allow the air to
+circulate between them. Here they remained until they were quite
+dry, and were then taken down, a damp covering being chosen for the
+operation, as otherwise the dry leaves would have crumbled to dust.
+They were again laid in a heap, and covered up to allow them to
+heat once more, This second heating required some days to
+accomplish, and this operation required great attention, as the
+tobacco would have been worthless if the plants had heated too
+much.
+
+In ten days the operation was complete. The leaves were then
+stripped off, the upper leaves were placed by themselves, as also
+the middle and the lower leaves; the higher ones being of the
+finest quality. They were then tied in bundles of twelve leaves
+each, and were packed in layers in barrels, a great pressure being
+applied with a weighted lever, to press them down into an almost
+solid mass. In all they filled three barrels, the smallest of
+which, containing sixty pounds of the finest tobacco, Mr. Hardy
+kept for his own use and that of his friends; the rest he sold at
+Buenos Ayres at a profitable rate. The venture, like that of the
+cotton, had proved a success, but the trouble and care required had
+been very great, and Mr. Hardy determined in future to plant only
+sufficient for his own use and that of the men employed upon the
+estate.
+
+The next experiment which was perfected was that with the
+sugar-cane. In this, far more than in the others, Mrs. Hardy and
+the girls took a lively interest. Sugar had been one of the few
+articles of consumption which had cost money, and it had been used
+in considerable quantities for converting the fruit into fine
+puddings and preserves. It was not contemplated to make sugar for
+sale, but only for the supply of the house: two acres, therefore,
+was the extent of the plantation. Mr. Hardy procured the cuttings
+from a friend who had a small sugar plantation near Buenos Ayres.
+
+The cultivation of sugar is simple. The land having been got in
+perfect order, deep furrows were plowed at a distance of five feet
+apart. In these the cuttings, which are pieces of the upper part of
+the cane, containing two or three knots, were laid at a distance of
+three feet apart. The plow was then taken along by the side of the
+furrow, so as to fill it up again and cover the cuttings. In sugar
+plantations the rows of canes are close together, but Mr. Hardy had
+chosen this distance, as it enabled his horse-hoe to work between
+them, and thus keep the ground turned up and free from weeds,
+without the expense of hard labor. In a short time the shoots
+appeared above the soil. In four months they had gained the height
+of fourteen feet, and their glossy stems showed that they were
+ready to cut.
+
+"Now, Clara," Mr. Hardy said, "this is your manufacture, you know,
+and we are only to work under your superintendence. The canes are
+ready to cut: how do you intend to crush the juice out? because
+that is really an important question."
+
+The young Hardys looked aghast at each other, for in the pressure
+of other matters the question of apparatus for the sugar
+manufacture had been quite forgotten.
+
+"Have you really no idea how to do it, Frank?"
+
+"No, really I have not, my dear. We have certainly no wood on the
+place which would make the rollers; besides, it would be rather a
+difficult business."
+
+Mrs. Hardy thought for a minute, and then said, "I should think
+that the mangle would do it."
+
+There was a general exclamation of "Capital, mamma!" and then a
+burst of laughter at the idea of making sugar with a mangle. The
+mangle in question was part of a patent washing apparatus which Mr.
+Hardy had brought with him from England, and consisted of two
+strong iron rollers, kept together by strong springs, and turning
+with a handle.
+
+"I do think that the mangle would do, Clara," Mr. Hardy said, "and
+we are all much obliged to you for the idea. I had thought of the
+great washing copper for boiling the sugar, but the mangle
+altogether escaped me. We will begin to-morrow. Please get all the
+tubs scrubbed out and scalded, and put out in the sun to dry."
+
+"How long will it take, papa?"
+
+"Some days, Ethel; we must only cut the canes as fast as the boiler
+can boil the juice down."
+
+The next day the work began. The canes were cut at a level with the
+ground, the tops were taken off, and the canes cut into lengths of
+three feet. They were then packed on a bullock cart and taken up to
+the house. They were next passed through the mangle, which
+succeeded admirably, the juice flowing out in streams into the tub
+placed below to receive it. When all the canes had been passed
+through the mangle, the screws were tightened to increase the
+pressure, and they were again passed through; by which time,
+although the juice was not so thoroughly extracted as it would have
+been by a more powerful machine, the quantity that remained was not
+important. As the tub was filled the contents were taken to the
+great copper, under which a fire was then lighted. The crushing of
+the canes was continued until the copper was nearly full, when Mr.
+Hardy ordered the cutting of the canes to be discontinued for the
+day. The fire under the copper was fed with the crushed canes,
+which burned very freely. Mr. Hardy now added a small quantity of
+lime and some sheep's blood, which last ingredient caused many
+exclamations of horror from Mrs. Hardy and the young ones. The
+blood, however, Mr. Hardy informed them, was necessary to clarify
+the sugar, as the albumen contained in the blood would rise to the
+surface, bringing the impurities with it. The fire was continued
+until the thermometer showed that the syrup was within a few
+degrees of boiling, and the surface was covered with a thick,
+dark-colored scum. The fire was then removed, and the liquor
+allowed to cool, the family now going about other work, as so large
+a quantity of liquor would not be really cold until the next day.
+
+The following morning the tap at the bottom of the boiler was
+turned, and the syrup came out bright and clear--about the color of
+sherry wine. The scum descended unbroken on the surface of the
+liquor; and when the copper was nearly empty the tap was closed,
+and the scum and what little liquor remained was taken out. The
+bright syrup was now again poured into the boiler, the fire
+re-lighted, and the syrup was kept boiling, to evaporate the water
+and condense the syrup down to the point at which it would
+crystallize. It required many hours' boiling to effect this, any
+scum which rose to the surface being carefully taken off with a
+skimmer. At last it was found that the syrup on the skimmer began
+to crystallize, and Mr. Hardy pronounced it to be fit to draw off
+into the large washing tubs to crystallize. A fresh batch of canes
+was now crushed, and so the process was repeated until all the
+canes were cut. It took a fortnight altogether, but only five days
+of this were actually occupied in cutting and crushing the canes.
+As the sugar crystallized it was taken out-a dark, pulpy-looking
+mass, at which the young Hardys looked very doubtfully-and was
+placed in a large sugar hogshead, which had been procured for the
+purpose. In the bottom of this eight large holes were bored, and
+these were stopped up with pieces of plantain stalk. Through the
+porous substance of these stalks the molasses or treacle slowly
+drained off. As the wet sugar was placed in the cask, layers of
+slices of plantain stems were laid upon it, as the spongy substance
+draws the dark coloring matter out from the sugar. The plantain
+grows freely in South America, and Mr. Hardy had planted a number
+of this graceful tree near his house; but these had not been
+advanced enough to cut, and he had therefore procured a sufficient
+quantity from a friend at Rosario. It was three months before the
+drainage of the molasses quite ceased; and the Hardys were greatly
+pleased, on emptying the hogshead and removing the plantain stems,
+to find that their sugar was dry, and of a very fairly light color.
+The sugar-canes did not require planting again, as they will grow
+for many years from the same roots; and although the canes from old
+stools, as they are called, produce less sugar than those of the
+first year's planting, the juice is clearer, and requires far less
+trouble to prepare and refine. Before another year came round the
+boys made a pair of wooden rollers of eighteen inches in diameter.
+These were covered with strips of hoop iron, nailed lengthways upon
+them at short intervals from each other, thereby obtaining a better
+grip upon the canes, and preventing the wood from being bruised and
+grooved. These rollers were worked by a horse mill, which Mr. Hardy
+had ordered from England. It was made for five horses, and did a
+great deal of useful work, grinding the Indian corn into fine flour
+for home consumption and for sale to neighboring settlers, and into
+coarse meal, and pulping the pumpkins and roots for the pigs and
+other animals.
+
+Mr. Hardy also tried many other experiments, as the climate is
+suited to almost every kind of plant and vegetable. Among them was
+the cultivation of ginger, of the vanilla bean, of flax, hemp, and
+coffee. In all of them he obtained more or less success; but the
+difficulty of obtaining labor, and the necessity of devoting more
+and more attention to the increasing flocks, herds, and irrigated
+land, prevented him from carrying them out on a large scale.
+However, they served the purpose for which he principally undertook
+them--of giving objects of interest and amusement to his children.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+A STEADY HAND.
+
+
+It was now more than eighteen months since the Hardys had been
+fairly established at Mount Pleasant. A stranger who had passed
+along at the time the house was first finished would certainly fail
+to recognize it now. Then it was a bare, uninviting structure,
+looking, as has been said, like a small dissenting chapel built on
+the top of a gentle rise, without tree or shelter of any kind. Now
+it appeared to rise from a mass of bright green foliage, so rapidly
+had the trees grown, especially the bananas and other tropical
+shrubs planted upon each side of the house. At the foot of the
+slope were some sixty or seventy acres of cultivated ground, while
+to the right were three or four large and strong wire enclosures,
+in which the milch cows, the cattle, the sheep, and the pigs were
+severally driven at night.
+
+Everything was prospering beyond Mr. Hardy's most sanguine
+expectations. More and more land was monthly being broken up and
+irrigated. Large profits had been realized by buying lean cattle
+during the dry season, fattening them upon alfalfa, and sending
+them down to Rosario for sale. The pigs had multiplied
+astonishingly; and the profits from the dairy were increasing
+daily, as more cows were constantly added. The produce of Mount
+Pleasant was so valued at both Rosario and Buenos Ayres that the
+demand, at most remunerative prices, far exceeded the supply.
+
+Additions had been made to the number of peons, and the farm
+presented quite an animated appearance.
+
+The two years which had elapsed since the Hardys left England had
+effected a considerable change in their appearance. Charley was now
+eighteen--a squarely-built, sturdy young fellow. From his life of
+exposure in the open air he looked older than he was. He had a
+strong idea that he was now becoming a man; and Ethel had one day
+detected him examining his cheeks very closely in the glass, to see
+if there were any signs of whiskers. It was a debated question in
+his own mind whether a beard would or would not be becoming to him.
+Hubert was nearly seventeen: he was taller and slighter than his
+brother, but was younger both in appearance and manners. He had all
+the restlessness of a boy, and lacked somewhat of Charley's steady
+perseverance.
+
+The elder brother was essentially of a practical disposition. He
+took a lively interest in the affairs of the farm, and gave his
+whole mind to it. If he went out shooting he did so to get game for
+the table. He enjoyed the sport, and entered heartily into it, but
+he did so in a business sort of way.
+
+Hubert was a far more imaginative boy. He stuck to the work of the
+farm as conscientiously as his brother did, but his attention was
+by no means of the same concentrated kind. A new butterfly, an
+uncommon insect, would be irresistible to him; and not
+unfrequently, when he went out with his gun to procure some game
+which Mr. Hardy had wanted upon the arrival of some unexpected
+visitor, he would come back in a high state of triumph with some
+curious little bird, which he had shot after a long chase, the
+requirements of the household being altogether forgotten.
+
+Maud was fifteen. Her constant out-of-door exercise had made her as
+nimble and active as a young fawn. She loved to be out and about,
+and her two hours of lessons with her mamma in the afternoon were a
+grievous penance to her.
+
+Ethel wanted three months of fourteen, and looked under twelve. She
+was quite the home-bird of the family, and liked nothing better
+than taking her work and sitting by the hour, quietly talking to
+her mother.
+
+The time was now again approaching when the Indian forays were to
+be expected. It was still a month earlier than the attack of the
+year before, and Mr. Hardy, with the increased number of his men,
+had not the least fear of any successful assault upon Mount
+Pleasant; but he resolved, when the time came, to take every
+possible precaution against attacks upon the animals. He ordered
+that the iron gates of the enclosures should be padlocked at night,
+and that some of the native dogs should be chained there as
+sentinels. He looked forward with some little anxiety to the Indian
+moon, as it is called, because, when he had ridden out with Lopez
+and two of their Canterbury friends to the scene of the encounter a
+few days after it had taken place, they found that the Indians had
+fled so precipitately upon the loss of their horses that they had
+not even buried the bodies of their friends, and that, short as the
+time had been, the foxes had left nothing but a few bones remaining
+of these. From the moccasins, however, and from other relics of the
+Indians strewn about, Lopez had pronounced at once that two tribes
+had been engaged in the fray: the one, inhabitants of the pampas--a
+people which, although ready to murder any solitary whites, seldom
+attack a prepared foe; and the other, of Indians from the west, of
+a far more warlike and courageous character. The former tribe,
+Lopez affirmed--and the natives of the country agreed with
+him--would not of themselves have been likely to attempt a fresh
+attack upon antagonists who had proved themselves so formidable,
+but the latter would be almost certain to make some desperate
+attempt to wipe off the disgrace of their defeat. Under these
+circumstances, although perfectly confident of their power to beat
+off any attack, it was resolved that every precaution should be
+taken when the time approached.
+
+Late one afternoon, however, Mr. Fitzgerald had gone out for a ride
+with Mr. Hardy. Charley had gone down to the dam with his gun on
+his shoulder, and Hubert had ridden to a pool in the river at some
+distance off, where he had the day before observed a wild duck,
+which he believed to be a new sort. The cattle and flocks had just
+been driven in by Lopez and two mounted peons at an earlier hour
+than usual, as Mr. Hardy had that morning given orders that the
+animals were all to be in their enclosures before dusk. The
+laborers in the fields below were still at work plowing. Ethel was
+in the sitting-room working with Mrs. Hardy, while Maud was in the
+garden picking some fruit for tea.
+
+Presently the occupants of the parlor were startled by a sharp cry
+from Maud, and in another instant she flew into the room, rushed at
+a bound to the fireplace, snatched down her light rifle from its
+hooks over the mantel, and crying, "Quick, Ethel, your rifle!" was
+gone again in an instant.
+
+Mrs. Hardy and Ethel sprang to their feet, too surprised for the
+moment to do anything, and then Mrs. Hardy repeated Maud's words,
+"Quick, Ethel, your rifle!"
+
+Ethel seized it, and with her mother ran to the door. Then they saw
+a sight which brought a scream from both their lips. Mrs. Hardy
+fell on her knees and covered her eyes, while Ethel, after a
+moment's pause, grasped the rifle, which had nearly fallen from her
+hands, and ran forward, though her limbs trembled so that they
+could scarcely carry her on.
+
+The sight was indeed a terrible one. At a distance of two hundred
+yards Hubert was riding for his life. His hat was off, his gun was
+gone, his face was deadly pale. Behind him rode three Indians. The
+nearest one was immediately behind him, at a distance of scarce two
+horses' length; the other two were close to their leader. All were
+evidently gaining upon him.
+
+Maud had thrown the gate open, and stood by the post with the
+barrel of her rifle resting on one of the wires. "Steady, Ethel,
+steady," she said in a hard, strange voice, as her sister joined
+her; "Hubert's life depends upon your aim. Wait till I fire, and
+take the man on the right. Aim at his chest."
+
+The sound of Maud's steady voice acted like magic upon her sister;
+the mist which had swum before her eyes cleared off; her limbs
+ceased to tremble, and her hand grew steady. Hubert was now within
+a hundred yards, but the leading Indian was scarce a horse's length
+behind. He had his tomahawk already in his hand, in readiness for
+the fatal blow. Another twenty yards and he whirled it round his
+head with a yell of exultation.
+
+"Stoop, Hubert, stoop!" Maud cried in a loud, clear voice; and
+mechanically, with the wild war-whoop behind ringing in his ears,
+Hubert bent forward on to the horse's mane. He could feel the
+breath of the Indian's horse against his legs, and his heart seemed
+to stand still.
+
+Maud and her rifle might have been taken for a statue, so immovable
+and rigid did she stand; and then as the Indian's arm went back for
+the blow, crack, and without a word or a cry the Indian fell back,
+struck with the deadly little bullet in the center of the forehead.
+
+Not so silently did Ethel's bullet do its work. A wild cry followed
+the report: for an instant the Indian reeled in his saddle, and
+then, steadying himself, turned his horse sharp round, and with his
+companion galloped off.
+
+[Illustration: HUBERT'S ESCAPE FROM THE INDIANS]
+
+Hubert, as his horse passed through the gate and drew up, almost
+fell from his seat; and it was with the greatest difficulty that he
+staggered toward Maud, who had gone off in a dead faint as she saw
+him ride on alone.
+
+Ethel had sat down on the ground, and was crying passionately, and
+Terence came running down from the house with a gun in his hand,
+pouring out Irish threats and ejaculations after the Indians. These
+were changed into a shout of triumph as Charley stepped from behind
+the henhouse, as they passed at a short distance, and at the
+discharge of his double barrels the unwounded Indian fell heavily
+from his horse.
+
+Anxious as he was to assist his young mistresses, for Hubert was
+far too shaken to attempt to lift Maud from the ground, Terence
+stood riveted to the spot watching the remaining Indian. Twice he
+reeled in the saddle, and twice recovered himself, but the third
+time, when he was distant nearly half a mile, he suddenly fell off
+to the ground.
+
+"I thought the murdering thief had got it," muttered Terence to
+himself, as he ran down to raise Maud, and with the assistance of
+Sarah to carry her up to the house, against the doorway of which
+Mrs. Hardy was still leaning, too agitated to trust herself to
+walk.
+
+Hubert, now somewhat recovered, endeavored to pacify Ethel, and the
+two walked slowly up toward the house. In a minute or two Charley
+came running up, and the peons were seen hurrying toward them.
+After a silent shake of the hand to his brother, and a short "Thank
+God!" Charley, with his accustomed energy, took the command.
+
+"Hubert, do you and Terence get all the arms loaded at once. Lopez,
+tell the peons to hurry up the plow oxen, shut them in the
+enclosure, and padlock all the gates. I will warn you if there's
+any danger. Then bring all the men and women up here. I am going to
+run up the danger flag. Papa is out somewhere on the plains." So
+saying, and taking his Colt's carbine, he ran up the stairs.
+
+In a moment afterward his voice was heard again. "Hubert, Terence,
+bring all the guns that are loaded up here at once--quick, quick!"
+and then he shouted loudly in Spanish, "Come in all; come in for
+your lives!" In another minute they joined him on the tower with
+Mr. Hardy's long rifle, Hubert's carbine, and their double-barreled
+shotguns, into each of which Terence dropped a bullet upon the top
+of the shot. Hubert could scarcely help giving a cry. At a distance
+of a quarter of a mile Mr. Hardy and Fitzgerald were coming along,
+pursued by at least a dozen Indians, who were thirty or forty yards
+in their rear. They were approaching from behind the house, and
+would have to make a sweep to get round to the entrance, which was
+on the right, on the side facing the dam. This would evidently give
+their pursuers a slight advantage.
+
+"They hold their own," Charley said after a minute's silence;
+"there is no fear. Lopez!" he shouted, "run and see that the
+outside as well as the inside gates are open."
+
+It has been already said that a low wire fence had been placed at a
+distance of a hundred yards beyond the inner enclosure, to protect
+the young trees from the animals. It was composed of two wires,
+only a foot apart, and was almost hidden by the long grass. It had
+a low gate, corresponding in position to the inner one. Charley's
+quick eye saw at once the importance of the position.
+
+"I think you might use the long rifle now," Hubert said; "it might
+stop them if they feel that they are in reach of our guns."
+
+"No, no," Charley said, "I don't want to stop them; don't show the
+end of a gun above the wall." Then he was silent until his father
+was within three hundred yards. He then shouted at the top of his
+voice, "Mind the outside fence, mind the outside fence!"
+
+Mr. Hardy raised a hand to show that he heard, and as he
+approached, Charley shouted again, "Sweep well round the fence,
+well round it, for them to try and cut you off."
+
+Charley could see that Mr. Hardy heard, for he turned his horse's
+head so as to go rather wide of the corner of the fence. "Now,
+Hubert and Terence, get ready; we shall have them directly."
+
+Mr. Hardy and his companion galloped past, with the Indians still
+fifty yards behind them. Keeping twenty yards from the corner of
+the fence, the fugitives wheeled round to the right, and the
+Indians, with a cry of exultation, turned to the right also to cut
+them off. The low treacherous wire was unnoticed, and in another
+moment men and horses were rolling in a confused mass upon the
+ground.
+
+"Now," Charley said, "every barrel we have;" and from the top of
+the tower a rain of lead poured down upon the bewildered Indians.
+The horses, frightened and wounded, kicked and struggled
+dreadfully, and did almost as much harm to their masters as the
+deadly bullets of the whites; and when the fire ceased not more
+than half of them regained their seats and galloped off, leaving
+the rest, men and horses, in a ghastly heap. Seeing them in full
+retreat, the occupants of the tower descended to receive Mr. Hardy
+and Fitzgerald, Terence much delighted at having at last had his
+share in a skirmish.
+
+"Well done, boys! Very well planned, Charley!" Mr. Hardy said as he
+reined in his horse. "That was a near escape."
+
+"Not as near a one as Hubert has had, by a long way, papa."
+
+"Indeed!" Mr. Hardy said anxiously. "Let me hear all about it."
+
+"We have not heard ourselves yet," Charley answered. "It occurred
+only a few minutes before your own. The girls behaved splendidly;
+but they are rather upset now. If you will go up to the house to
+them, I will be up directly, but there are a few things to see about
+first. Lopez," he went on, "carry out what I told you before:
+get the men in from the plows and see all secured. Tell them to
+hurry, for it will be dark soon. Kill a couple of sheep and bring
+them up to the house; we shall be a large party, and it may be
+wanted. Then let the peons all have supper. Come up to the house in
+an hour for instructions. See yourself that the dogs are fastened
+down by the cattle. Terence, take your place on the lookout, and
+fire a gun if you see any one moving."
+
+Having seen that his various orders were obeyed, Charley went up to
+the house. He found the whole party assembled in the sitting-room.
+Maud and Ethel had quite recovered, although both looked pale. Mrs.
+Hardy, absorbed in her attention to them, had fortunately heard
+nothing of her husband's danger until the firing from above,
+followed by a shout of triumph, told her that any danger there was
+had been defeated.
+
+"Now, papa," Charley said, "you give us your account first."
+
+"I have not much to tell, Charley. Fitzgerald and I had ridden out
+some distance--five miles, I should say--when the dogs stopped at a
+thicket and put out a lion. Fitzgerald and I both fired with our
+left-hand barrels, which were loaded with ball. The beast fell, and
+we got off to skin him. Dash barked furiously, and we saw a couple
+of dozen Indians coming up close to us. We stopped a moment to give
+them our barrels with duck-shot, and then jumped into our saddles
+and rode for it. Unfortunately, we had been foolish enough to go
+out without our revolvers. They pressed us hard, but I was never in
+fear of their actually catching us; my only alarm was that one of
+us might repeat my disaster of the armadillo hole. So I only tried
+to hold my own thirty or forty yards ahead. I made sure that one or
+other of you would see us coming, and I should have shouted loudly
+enough, I can tell you, to warn you as I came up. Besides, I knew
+that at the worst the arms were hanging above the fireplace, and
+that we only wanted time to run in, catch them up, and get to the
+door, to be able to defend the house till you could help us. And
+now, what is your story, Charley?"
+
+"I have even less than you, papa. I was down at the dam, and then I
+went into the henhouse, and I was just thinking that I could make a
+better arrangement for the nests, when I heard an Indian war-yell
+between me and the house. It was followed almost directly by two
+cracks which I knew were the girls' rifles. I rushed to the door
+and looked out, and I saw two Indians coming along at full gallop.
+By the direction they were taking, they would pass only a little
+way from the henhouse; so I stepped back till I heard they were
+opposite, and then, going out, I gave both barrels to the nearest
+to me, and stopped his galloping about pretty effectually. When I
+reached the place I saw that Hubert had had a narrow squeak of it,
+for Maud had fainted, and Ethel was in a great state of cry. But I
+had no time to ask many questions, for I ran up to hoist the danger
+flag, and then saw you and Fitzgerald coming along with the Indians
+after you. Now, Hubert, let's hear your story."
+
+"Well, papa, you know I said yesterday that I was sure that I had
+seen a new duck, and this afternoon I rode out to the pools, in
+hopes that he might still be there. I left my horse and crept on
+very cautiously through the reeds till I got sight of the water.
+Sure enough, there was the duck, rather on the other side. I waited
+for a long half-hour, and at last he came over rather nearer. He
+dived at my first barrel, but as he came up I gave him my second.
+Flirt went in and brought him out. He was new, sure enough--two
+blue feathers under the eye--"
+
+"Bother the duck, Hubert," Charley put in. "We don't care for his
+blue feathers; we want to hear about the Indians."
+
+"Well, I am coming to the Indians," Hubert said; "but it was a new
+duck, for all that; and if you like it, I will show it you. There!"
+And he took it out of his pocket and laid it on the table. No one
+appeared to have the slightest interest in it, or to pay any
+attention to it. So Hubert went on: "Well, after looking at the
+duck, I put it into my pocket, and went out from the bushes to my
+horse. As I got to him I heard a yell, which nearly made me tumble
+down, it startled me so; and not a hundred yards away, and riding
+to cut me off from home, were thirty or forty Indians. I was not
+long, as you may guess, climbing into my saddle, and bolted like a
+shot. I could not make straight for home, but had to make a sweep
+to get round them. I was better mounted than all of them, except
+three; but they kept gradually gaining on me, while all the rest in
+turn gave up the chase; and, like papa, I had left my revolver
+behind. Black Tom did his best, and I encouraged him to the utmost;
+but I began to think that it was all up with me, for I was
+convinced that they would catch me before I could get in. When I
+was little more than three hundred yards from the gate I saw Maud
+come dashing down with her rifle toward the gate, and a little
+afterward Ethel came too. The Indians kept getting nearer and
+nearer, and I expected every moment to feel the tomahawk. I could
+not think why the girls did not fire, but I supposed that they did
+not feel sure enough of their aim: and I had the consolation that
+the Indian nearest could not be going to strike, or they would risk
+a shot. On I went: the Indian was so close that I could feel his
+horse's breath, and the idea came across my mind that the brute was
+trying to catch hold of the calf of my leg. At a hundred yards I
+could see Maud's face quite plain, and then I felt certain I was
+saved. She looked as steady as if she had been taking aim at a
+mark, and the thought flashed across me of how last week she had
+hit a small stone on a post, at eighty yards, first shot, when
+Charley and I had missed it half a dozen times each. Then there was
+a frightful yell, almost in my ear. Then I heard Maud cry out,
+'Stoop, Hubert, stoop!' I was stooping before, but my head went
+down to the horse's mane, I can tell you.' And then there was the
+crack of the two rifles, and a yell of pain. I could not look
+round, but I felt that the horse behind me had stopped, and that I
+was safe. That's my story, papa."
+
+A few more questions elicited from Mrs. Hardy all that she knew of
+it, and then the warmest commendations were bestowed upon the
+girls. Ethel, however, generously disclaimed all praise, as she
+said that she should have done nothing at all had it not been for
+Maud's steadiness and coolness.
+
+"And now let us have our tea," Mr. Hardy said; "and then we can
+talk over our measures for to-night."
+
+"Do you think that they will attack us, papa?" Ethel asked.
+
+"Yes, Ethel, I think that most likely they will. As we came across
+the plain I noticed several other parties quite in the distance.
+There must be a very strong body out altogether, and probably they
+have resolved upon vengeance for their last year's defeat. They had
+better have left it alone, for they have no more chance of taking
+this house, with us all upon our guard, than they have of flying.
+There is one advantage in it--they will get such a lesson that I do
+think we shall be perfectly free from Indian attacks for the
+future."
+
+After tea Lopez came up for orders. "You will place," Mr. Hardy
+said, "two peons at each corner of the outside fence. One of us
+will come round every half-hour to see that all is right. Their
+instructions are that in case they hear any movement one is to come
+up to us immediately with the news, and the other is to go round to
+tell the other sentries to do the same. All this is to be done in
+perfect silence. I do not want them to know that we are ready for
+their reception. Bring some fresh straw up and lay it down here on
+the floor: the women can sleep here."
+
+"What shall I do about your own horses, signor?" Lopez asked.
+
+Mr. Hardy thought a moment. "I think you had better send them down
+to the enclosure with the others; they might be driven off if they
+are left up here, and I do not see that we can require them."
+
+"But what about the cattle, papa?" Charley asked.
+
+"It would be a serious loss if they were driven off, especially the
+milch cows. If you like, I will go down with Terence, and we can
+take up our station among them. It would be a strong post, for the
+Indians of course could not attack us on horseback; and with my
+carbine, and Terence's gun, and a brace of revolvers, I think we
+could beat them off easily enough, especially as you would cover us
+with your guns."
+
+"I had thought of that plan, Charley; but it would be dangerous,
+and would cause us up here great anxiety, I imagine, too, that as
+no doubt their great object is vengeance, they will attack us first
+here, or they may make an effort upon the cattle at the same time
+that they attack here. They will not begin with the animals. They
+will find it a very difficult business to break down the fence,
+which they must do to drive them out; and while they are about it
+we shall not be idle, depend upon it."
+
+The preparations were soon made and it was agreed that Mr. Hardy
+and Hubert should go the rounds alternately with Charley and
+Fitzgerald. As a usual thing, the Indian attacks take place in the
+last hour or two of darkness. Mr. Hardy thought, however, that an
+exception would be made in the present case, in order that they
+might get as far as possible away before any pursuit took place.
+The wives of the peons lay down to sleep on the straw which had
+been thrown down for them. The men sat outside the door, smoking
+their cigarettes and talking in low whispers. Mrs. Hardy was in her
+room; Ethel kept her company, Maud dividing her time between them
+and the top of the tower, where Mr. Hardy, Fitzgerald, and the boys
+were assembled in the intervals between going their rounds.
+
+At about ten o'clock there was a sharp bark from one of the dogs
+fastened up by the fold, followed up by a general barking of all
+the dogs on the establishment.
+
+"There they are," Mr. Hardy said. "Charley, bring the mastiffs
+inside, and order them, and the retrievers too, to be quiet. We do
+not want any noise up here, to tell the Indians that we are on the
+watch. Now, Fitzgerald, you go to the sentries behind the house,
+and I will go to those in front, to tell them to fall back at
+once."
+
+This mission was, however, unnecessary, for the eight peons all
+arrived in a minute or two, having fled from their posts at the
+first barking of the dogs, and without obeying their orders to send
+round to each other to give notice of their retreat.
+
+Mr. Hardy was very angry with them, but they were in such abject
+fear of the Indians that they paid little heed to their master's
+words, but went and huddled themselves together upon the straw in
+the sitting-room, remaining there without movement until all was
+over. Terence was now recalled from the gate, which had been his
+post.
+
+"Did you hear anything, Terence?"
+
+"Sure, your honor, and I thought I heard a dull sound like a lot of
+horses galloping in the distance. I should say that there were a
+great many of them. It seemed to get a little louder, and then it
+stopped."
+
+"That was before the dogs began to bark, Terence?"
+
+"About five minutes before, your honor."
+
+"Yes. I have no doubt that they all dismounted to make the attack
+on foot. How quiet everything is!"
+
+The general barking of the dogs had now ceased: sometimes one or
+another gave a suspicious yelping bark, but between these no sound
+whatever was audible. The door was now closed and barred; candles
+were lighted and placed in every room, thick cloths having been
+hung up before the loopholes in the shutters, to prevent a ray of
+light from escaping; and the windows themselves were opened. Mr.
+Fitzgerald, the boys, and Maud took their station on the tower, Mr.
+Hardy remaining with his wife and Ethel, while Terence and Lopez
+kept watch in the other apartments. The arrangements for the
+defense were that Mr. Fitzgerald, Lopez, and Terence should defend
+the lower part of the house. There were in all six double-barreled
+guns--two to each of them; and three of the peons more courageous
+than the others offered to load the guns as they were discharged.
+
+Mr. Hardy and the boys had their place on the tower, from which
+they commanded the whole garden. They had the long rifle, the
+carbines, and four revolvers. Mrs. Hardy and the girls took their
+place in the upper room of the tower, where there was a light.
+Their rifles were ready in case of necessity, but their principal
+duty was to load the spare chambers of the carbines and pistols as
+fast as they were emptied, the agreement being that the girls
+should go up by turns to take the loaded ones and bring down the
+empties. Sarah's place was her kitchen, where she could hear all
+that was going on below, and she was to call up the ladder in case
+aid was required. And so, all being in readiness, they calmly
+awaited the attack.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+THE INDIAN ATTACK.
+
+
+For nearly half an hour the occupants of the tower remained without
+hearing the smallest sound. Then there was a slight jarring noise.
+
+"They are getting over the fence," Mr. Hardy whispered. "Go down
+now every one to his station. Keep the dogs quiet, and mind, let no
+one fire until I give the signal."
+
+Over and over again the clinking noise was repeated. Cautious as
+the Indians were, it was impossible even for them to get over that
+strange and difficult obstacle without touching the wires with
+their arms. Occasionally Mr. Hardy and the boys fancied that they
+could see dark objects stealing toward the house through the gloom;
+otherwise all was still.
+
+"Boys," Mr. Hardy said, "I have changed my mind. There will be
+numbers at the doors and windows, whom we cannot get at from here.
+Steal quietly downstairs, and take your position each at a window.
+Then, when the signal is given, fire both your revolvers. Don't
+throw away a shot. Darken all the rooms except the kitchen. You
+will see better to take aim through the loopholes; it will be quite
+light outside. When you have emptied your revolvers, come straight
+up here, leaving them for the girls to load as you pass."
+
+Without a word the boys slipped away. Mr. Hardy then placed on a
+round shelf nailed to the flagstaff, at about eight feet from the
+ground, a blue-light, fitting into a socket on the shelf. The shelf
+was made just so large that it threw a shadow over the top of the
+tower, so that those standing there were in comparative darkness,
+while everything around was in bright light. There, with a match in
+his hand to light the blue-light, he awaited the signal.
+
+It was a long time coming--so long that the pause grew painful, and
+every one in the house longed for the bursting of the coming storm.
+At last it came. A wild, long, savage yell from hundreds of throats
+rose on the still night air, and, confident as they were in their
+position, there was not one of the garrison but felt his blood grow
+cold at the appalling ferocity of the cry. Simultaneously there was
+a tremendous rush at the doors and windows, which tried the
+strength of frame and bar. Then, as they stood firm, came a rain of
+blows with hatchet and tomahawk.
+
+Then came a momentary pause of astonishment. The weapons, instead
+of splintering the wood, merely made deep dents, or glided off
+harmlessly. Then the blows redoubled, and then a bright light
+suddenly lit up the whole scene. As it did so, from every loophole
+a stream of fire poured out, repeated again and again. The guns,
+heavily loaded with buckshot, told with terrible effect upon the
+crowded mass of Indians around the windows, and the discharge of
+the four barrels from each of the three windows of the room at the
+back of the house, by Fitzgerald, Lopez, and Terence, for awhile
+cleared the assailants from that quarter. After the first yell of
+astonishment and rage, a perfect quiet succeeded to the din which
+had raged there, broken only by the ring of the ramrods, as the
+three men and their assistants hastily reloaded their guns, and
+then hurried to the front of the house, where their presence was
+urgently required.
+
+Knowing the tremendous rush there would be at the door, Charley and
+Hubert had posted themselves at its two loopholes, leaving the
+windows to take care of themselves for the present. The first rush
+was so tremendous that the door trembled on its posts, massive as
+it was; and the boys, thinking that it would come in, threw the
+weight of their bodies against it. Then with the failure of the
+first rush came the storm of blows; and the boys stood with their
+pistols leveled through the holes, waiting for the light which was
+to enable them to see their foes.
+
+As it came they fired together, and two Indians fell. Again and
+again they fired, until not an Indian remained standing opposite
+the fatal door. Then each took a window, for there was one at each
+side of the door, and these they held, rushing occasionally into
+the rooms on either side to check the assailants there.
+
+In this fight Sarah had certainly the honor of first blood. She was
+a courageous woman, and was determined to do her best in defense of
+the house. As an appropriate weapon, she had placed the end of the
+spit in the fire, and at the moment of the attack it was white-hot.
+Seeing the shutter bend with the pressure of the Indians against
+it, she seized the spit, and plunged it through the loophole with
+all her force. A fearful yell followed, which rose even above the
+tremendous din around.
+
+There was a lull so profound after the discharge of the last
+barrels of the boys' revolvers as to be almost startling. Running
+upstairs, they fitted fresh chambers to their weapons, left the
+empty ones with their sisters, and joined their father.
+
+"That's right, boys; the attack is beaten off for the present. Now
+take your carbines. There is a band of Indians down by the animals.
+I heard their war-whoops when the others began, but the light
+hardly reaches so far. Now look out, I am going to send up a rocket
+over them. The cows are the most important; so, Charley, you direct
+all your shots at any party there. Hubert, divide yours among the
+rest."
+
+In another moment the rocket flew up into the air, and as the
+bright light burst out a group of Indians could be seen at the
+gateway of each of the enclosures. As the brilliant light broke
+over them they scattered with a cry of astonishment. Before the
+light faded the twelve barrels had been fired among them.
+
+As the rocket burst Mr. Hardy had gazed eagerly over the country,
+and fancied that he could see a dark mass at a distance of half a
+mile. This he guessed to be the Indians' horses.
+
+By this time the blue-light was burning low, and Mr. Hardy,
+stretching his hand up, lit another at its blaze, and planted the
+fresh one down upon it. As he did so a whizzing of numerous arrows
+showed that they were watched. One went through his coat,
+fortunately without touching him; another went right through his
+arm; and a third laid Charley's cheek open from the lip to the ear.
+
+"Keep your heads below the wall, boys," their father shouted. "Are
+you hurt, Charley?"
+
+"Not seriously, papa, but it hurts awfully;" and Charley stamped
+with rage and pain.
+
+"What has become of the Indians round the house?" Hubert asked.
+"They are making no fresh attack."
+
+"No," Mr. Hardy said; "they have had enough of it. They are only
+wondering how they are to get away. You see the fence is exposed
+all round to our fire, for the trees don't go within twenty yards
+of it. They are neither in front nor behind the house, for it is
+pretty open in both directions, and we should see them. They are
+not at this side of the house, so they must be standing close to
+the wall between the windows, and must be crowded among the trees
+and shrubs at the other end. There is no window there, so they are
+safe as long as they stay quiet."
+
+"No, papa," Hubert said eagerly; "don't you remember we left two
+loopholes in each room, when we built it, on purpose, only putting
+in pieces of wood and filling up the cracks with clay to keep out
+the wind?"
+
+"Of course we did, Hubert. I remember all about it now. Run down
+and tell them to be ready to pull the wood out and to fire through
+when they hear the next rocket go off. I am going to send another
+light rocket over in the direction where I saw the horses; and
+directly I get the line I will send off cracker-rocket after
+cracker-rocket as quickly as I can at them. What with the fire from
+below among them, and the fright they will get when they see the
+horses attacked, they are sure to make a rush for it."
+
+In a minute Hubert came back with the word that the men below were
+ready. In a moment a rocket soared far away to behind the house;
+and just as its light broke over the plains another one swept over
+in the direction of a dark mass of animals, seen plainly enough in
+the distance.
+
+A cry of dismay burst from the Indians, rising in yet wilder alarm
+as three shots were fired from the wall of the house into their
+crowded mass. Again and again was the discharge repeated, and with
+a yell of dismay a wild rush was made for the fence. Then the boys
+with their carbines, and Mr. Hardy with the revolvers, opened upon
+them, every shot telling in the dense mass who struggled to
+surmount the fatal railings.
+
+Frenzied with the danger, dozens attempted to climb them, and,
+strong as were the wires and posts, there was a cracking sound, and
+the whole side fell. In another minute, of the struggling mass
+there remained only some twenty motionless forms. Three or four
+more rockets were sent off in the direction where the horses had
+been seen, and then another signal rocket, whose light enabled them
+to see that the black mass was broken up, and that the whole plain
+was covered with scattered figures of men and animals, all flying
+at the top of their speed.
+
+"Thank God, it is all over, and we are safe!" Mr. Hardy said
+solemnly. "Never again will an Indian attack be made upon Mount
+Pleasant. It is all over now, my dear," he said to Mrs. Hardy as he
+went down the stairs; "they are off all over the country, and it
+will take them hours to get their horses together again. Two of us
+have got scratched with arrows, but no real harm is done. Charley's
+is only a flesh wound. Don't be frightened," he added quickly, as
+Mrs. Hardy turned pale and the girls gave a cry at the appearance
+of Charley's face, which was certainly alarming. "A little warm
+water and a bandage will put it all right."
+
+"Do you think it will leave a scar?" Charley asked rather
+dolorously.
+
+"Well, Charley, I should not be surprised if it does; but it won't
+spoil your beauty long, your whiskers will cover it: besides, a
+scar won in honorable conflict is always admired by ladies, you
+know. Now let us go downstairs; my arm, too, wants bandaging, for
+it is beginning to smart amazingly; and I am sure we all must want
+something to eat."
+
+The supper was eaten hurriedly, and then all but Terence, who, as a
+measure of precaution, was stationed as watchman on the tower, were
+glad to lie down for a few hours' sleep. At daybreak they were up
+and moving.
+
+Mr. Hardy requested that neither his wife nor daughters should go
+outside the house until the dead Indians were removed and buried,
+as the sight could not but be a most shocking one. Two of the peons
+were ordered to put in the oxen and bring up two carts, and the
+rest of the men set about the unpleasant duty of examining and
+collecting the slain.
+
+These were even more numerous than Mr. Hardy had anticipated, and
+showed how thickly they must have been clustered round the door and
+windows. The guns had been loaded with buckshot; two bullets he
+dropped down each barrel in addition; and the discharge of these
+had been most destructive, more especially those fired through the
+loopholes at the end of the house. There no less than sixteen
+bodies were found, while around the door and windows were thirteen
+others. All these were dead. The guns, having been discharged
+through loopholes breast-high, had taken effect upon the head and
+body.
+
+At the fence were fourteen. Of these twelve were dead, another
+still breathed, but was evidently dying, while one had only a
+broken leg. Unquestionably several others had been wounded, but had
+managed to make off. The bullets of revolvers, unless striking a
+mortal point, disable a wounded man much less than the balls of
+heavier caliber. It was evidently useless to remove the Indian who
+was dying; all that could be done for him was to give him a little
+water, and to place a bundle of grass so as to raise his head. Half
+an hour later he was dead. The other wounded man was carried
+carefully down to one of the sheds, where a bed of hay was prepared
+for him. Two more wounded men were found down by the cattle
+enclosures, and these also Mr. Hardy considered likely to recover.
+They were taken up and laid by their comrade. Three dead bodies
+were found here. These were all taken in the bullock carts to a
+spot distant nearly half a mile from the house.
+
+Here, by the united labor of the peons, a large grave was dug, six
+feet wide, as much deep, and twelve yards long. In this they were
+laid side by side, two deep; the earth was filled in, and the turf
+replaced. At Hubert's suggestion, two young palm trees were taken
+out of the garden and placed one at each end, and a wire fence was
+erected all round, to keep off the animals.
+
+It was a sad task; and although they had been killed in an attack
+in which, had they been victorious, they would have shown no mercy,
+still Mr. Hardy and his sons were deeply grieved at having caused
+the destruction of so many lives.
+
+It was late in the afternoon before all was done, and the party
+returned to the house with lightened hearts, that the painful task
+was finished. Here things had nearly resumed their ordinary aspect.
+Terence had washed away the stains of blood; and save that many of
+the young trees had been broken down, and that one side of the
+fence was leveled, no one would have imagined that a sanguinary
+contest had taken place there so lately.
+
+Mr. Hardy stopped on the way to examine the wounded men. He had
+acquired a slight knowledge of rough surgery in his early life upon
+the prairies, and he discovered the bullet at a short distance
+under the skin in the broken leg. Making signs to the man that he
+was going to do him good, and calling in Fitzgerald and Lopez to
+hold the Indian if necessary, he took out his knife, cut down to
+the bullet, and with some trouble succeeded in extracting it. The
+Indian never flinched or groaned, although the pain must have been
+very great while the operation was being performed. Mr. Hardy then
+carefully bandaged the limb, and directed that cold water should be
+poured over it from time to time, to allay the inflammation.
+Another of the Indians had his ankle-joint broken: this was also
+carefully bandaged. The third had a bullet wound near the hip, and
+with this Mr. Hardy could do nothing. His recovery or death would
+depend entirely upon nature.
+
+It may here be mentioned at once that all three of the Indians
+eventually recovered, although two of them were slightly lamed for
+life. All that care and attention could do for them was done; and
+when they were in a fit condition to travel their horses and a
+supply of provisions were given to them. The Indians had maintained
+during the whole time the stolid apathy of their race. They had
+expressed no thanks for the kindness bestowed upon them. Only when
+their horses were presented to them, and bows and arrows placed in
+their hands, with an intimation that they were free to go, did
+their countenances change.
+
+Up to that time it is probable that they believed that they were
+only being kept to be solemnly put to death. Their faces lit up,
+and without a word they sprang on to the horses' backs, and dashed
+over the plains.
+
+Ere they had gone three hundred yards they halted, and came back at
+equal speed, stopping abruptly before the surprised and rather
+startled group. "Good man," the eldest of them said, pointing to
+Mr. Hardy. "Good," he repeated, motioning to the boys. "Good
+misses," and he included Mrs. Hardy and the girls; and then the
+three turned-and never slackened their speed as long as they were
+in sight.
+
+The Indians of the South American pampas and sierras are a very
+inferior race to the noble-looking Comanches and Apaches of the
+North American prairies. They are generally short, wiry men, with
+long black hair. They have flat faces, with high cheek bones. Their
+complexion is a dark copper color, and they are generally extremely
+ugly.
+
+In the course of the morning after the fight Mr. Cooper rode over
+from Canterbury, and was greatly surprised to hear of the attack.
+The Indians had not been seen or heard of at his estate, and he was
+ignorant of anything having taken place until his arrival.
+
+For the next few days there was quite a levee of visitors, who came
+over to hear of the particulars, and to offer their congratulations.
+All the outlying settlers were particularly pleased, as it was
+considered certain that the Indians would not visit that neighborhood
+again for some time.
+
+Shortly afterward the government sales for the land beyond Mount
+Pleasant took place. Mr. Hardy went over to Rosario to attend them,
+and bought the plot of four square leagues immediately adjoining
+his own, giving the same price that he had paid for Mount Pleasant.
+The properties on each side of this were purchased by the two
+Edwards, and by an Englishman who had lately arrived in the colony.
+His name was Mercer: he was accompanied by his wife and two young
+children, and his wife's brother, whose name was Parkinson. Mr.
+Hardy had made their acquaintance at Rosario, and pronounced them
+to be a very pleasant family. They had brought out a considerable
+capital, and were coming in a week with a strong force to erect
+their house. Mr. Hardy had promised them every assistance, and had
+invited Mrs. Mercer to take up her abode at Mount Pleasant with her
+children, until the frame house which they had brought out could be
+erected--an invitation which had been gladly accepted.
+
+There was great pleasure at the thought of another lady in the
+neighborhood; and Mrs. Hardy was especially pleased for the girls'
+sake, as she thought that a little female society would be of very
+great advantage to them.
+
+The plots of land next to the Mercers and Edwards were bought, the
+one by three or four Germans working as a company together, the
+other by Don Martinez, an enterprising young Spaniard; so that the
+Hardys began to be in quite an inhabited country. It is true that
+most of the houses would be six miles off; but that is close, on
+the pampas. There was a talk, too, of the native overseer of the
+land between Canterbury and the Jamiesons selling his ground in
+plots of a mile square. This would make the country comparatively
+thickly populated. Indeed, with the exception of Mr. Mercer, who
+had taken up a four-league plot, the other new settlers had in no
+case purchased more than a square league. The settlements would
+therefore be pretty thick together.
+
+In a few days Mrs. Mercer arrived with her children. The boys gave
+up their room to her--they themselves, with Mr. Fitzgerald and four
+peons, accompanying Mr. Mercer and the party he had brought with
+him, to assist in erecting his house, and in putting up a strong
+wire fence, similar to their own, for defense. This operation was
+finished in a week; and Mrs. Mercer, to the regret of Mrs. Hardy
+and the girls, then joined her husband. The house had been built
+near the northeast corner of the property. It was therefore little
+more than six miles distant from Mount Pleasant, and a constant
+interchange of visits was arranged to take place.
+
+Shortly afterward Mr. Hardy suggested that the time had now come
+for improving the house, and laid before his assembled family his
+plans for so doing, which were received with great applause.
+
+The new portion was to stand in front of the old, and was to
+consist of a wide entrance-hall, with a large dining and
+drawing-room upon either side. Upon the floor above were to be four
+bedrooms. The old sitting-room was to be made into the kitchen, and
+was to be lighted by a skylight in the roof. The present kitchen
+was to become a laundry, the windows of that and the bedroom
+opposite being placed in the side walls, instead of being in front.
+The new portion was to be made of properly baked bricks, and was to
+be surrounded by a wide veranda. Of the present bedrooms, two were
+to be used as spare rooms, one of the others being devoted to two
+additional indoor servants whom it was now proposed to keep.
+
+It was arranged that the carts should at once commence going
+backward and forward to Rosario, to fetch coal for the brickmaking,
+tiles, wood, etc., and that an experienced brickmaker should be
+engaged, all the hands at the farm being fully occupied. It would
+take a month or six weeks, it was calculated, before all would be
+ready to begin building; and then Mrs. Hardy and the girls were to
+start for a long promised visit to their friends the Thompsons,
+near Buenos Ayres, so as to be away during the mess and confusion
+of the building. An engagement was made on the following week with
+two Italian women at Rosario, the one as a cook, the other as
+general servant, Sarah undertaking the management of the dairy
+during her mistress' absence.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+TERRIBLE NEWS.
+
+
+Another two years passed over, bringing increased prosperity to the
+Hardys. No renewal of the Indian attacks had occurred, and in
+consequence an increased flow of emigration had taken place in
+their neighborhood. Settlers were now established upon all the lots
+for many miles upon either side of Mount Pleasant; and even beyond
+the twelve miles which the estate stretched to the south the lots
+had been sold. Mr. Hardy considered that all danger of the flocks
+and herds being driven off had now ceased, and had therefore added
+considerably to their numbers, and had determined to allow them to
+increase without further sales until they had attained to the
+extent of the supporting power of the immense estate.
+
+Two hundred acres of irrigated land were under cultivation; the
+dairy contained the produce of a hundred cows; and altogether Mount
+Pleasant was considered one of the finest and most profitable
+estancias in the province.
+
+The house was now worthy of the estate; the inside fence had been
+removed fifty yards further off, and the vegetable garden to a
+greater distance, the includes space being laid out entirely as a
+pleasure garden.
+
+Beautiful tropical trees and shrubs, gorgeous patches of flowers,
+and green turf surrounded the front and sides; while behind was a
+luxuriant and most productive orchard.
+
+The young Hardys had for come time given up doing any personal
+labor, and were incessantly occupied in the supervision of the
+estate and of the numerous hands employed: for them a long range of
+adobe huts had been built at some little distance in the rear of
+the enclosure.
+
+Maud and Ethel had during this period devoted much more time to
+their studies, and the time was approaching when Mrs. Hardy was to
+return with them to England, in order that they might pass a year
+in London under the instruction of the best masters. Maud was now
+seventeen, and could fairly claim to be looked upon as a young
+woman. Ethel still looked very much younger than her real age: any
+one, indeed, would have guessed that there was at least three
+years' difference between the sisters. In point of acquirements,
+however, she was quite her equal, her much greater perseverance
+more than making up for her sister's quickness.
+
+A year previously Mr. Hardy had, at one of his visits to Buenos
+Ayres, purchased a piano, saying nothing of what he had done upon
+his return; and the delight of the girls and their mother, when the
+instrument arrived in a bullock cart, was unbounded. From that time
+the girls practiced almost incessantly; indeed, as Charley
+remarked, it was as bad as living in the house with a whole
+boarding-school of girls.
+
+After this Mount Pleasant, which had always been considered as the
+most hospitable and pleasant estancia in the district, became more
+than ever popular, and many were the impromptu dances got up.
+Sometimes there were more formal affairs, and all the ladies within
+twenty miles would come in. These were more numerous than would
+have been expected. The Jamiesons were doing well, and in turn
+going for a visit to their native country, had brought out two
+bright young Scotchwomen as their wives.
+
+Mrs. Mercer was sure to be there, and four or five other English
+ladies from nearer or more distant estancias. Some ten or twelve
+native ladies, wives or daughters of native proprietors, would also
+come in, and the dancing would be kept up until a very late hour.
+Then the ladies would lie down for a short time, all the beds being
+given up to them, and a number of shake-downs improvised; while the
+gentlemen would sit and smoke for an hour or two, and then, as day
+broke, go down for a bathe in the river. These parties were looked
+upon by all as most enjoyable affairs; and as eatables of all sorts
+were provided by the estate itself, they were a very slight
+expense, and were of frequent occurrence. Only one thing Mr. Hardy
+bargained for--no wines or other expensive liquors were to be
+drunk. He was doing well--far, indeed, beyond his utmost
+expectation--but at the same time he did not consider himself
+justified in spending money upon luxuries.
+
+Tea, therefore, and cooling drinks made from fruits, after the
+custom of the country, were provided in abundance for the dancers;
+but wine was not produced. With this proviso, Mr. Hardy had no
+objection to his young people having their dances frequently; and
+in a country where all were living in a rough way, and wine was an
+unknown luxury, no one missed it. In other respects the supper
+tables might have been admired at an English ball. Of substantials
+there was abundance--turkeys and fowls, wild duck and other game.
+The sweets were represented by trifle, creams, and blanc-manges;
+while there was a superb show of fruit--apricots, peaches,
+nectarines, pineapples, melons, and grapes. Among them were vases
+of gorgeous flowers, most of them tropical in character, but with
+them were many old English friends, of which Mr. Hardy had procured
+seeds.
+
+Their neighbors at Canterbury were still their most intimate
+friends: they were shortly, however, to lose one of them. Mr.
+Cooper had heard six months before of the death of his two elder
+brothers in rapid succession, and he was now heir to his father's
+property, which was very extensive. It had been supposed that he
+would at once return to England, and he was continually talking of
+doing so; but he had, under one excuse or other, put off his
+departure from time to time. He was very frequently over at Mount
+Pleasant and was generally a companion of the boys upon their
+excursions.
+
+"I think Cooper is almost as much here as he is at Canterbury,"
+Charley said, laughing, one day.
+
+Mrs. Hardy happened to glance at Maud, and noticed a bright flush
+of color on her cheeks. She made no remark at the time, but spoke
+to Mr. Hardy about it at night.
+
+"You see, my dear," she concluded, "we are still considering Maud
+as a child, but other people may look upon her as a woman."
+
+"I am sorry for this," Mr. Hardy said after a pause, "We ought to
+have foreseen the possibility of such a thing. Now that it is
+mentioned, I wonder we did not do so before. Mr. Cooper has been
+here so much that the thing would have certainly struck us, had we
+not, as you say, looked upon Maud as a child. Against Mr. Cooper I
+have nothing to say. We both like him extremely. His principles are
+good, and he would, in point of money, be of course an excellent
+match for our little girl. At the same time, I cannot permit
+anything like an engagement. Mr. Cooper has seen no other ladies
+for so long a time that it is natural enough he should fall in love
+with Maud. Maud, on the other hand, has only seen the fifteen or
+twenty men who came here; she knows nothing of the world and is
+altogether inexperienced. They are both going to England, and may
+not improbably meet people whom they may like very much better, and
+may look upon this love-making in the pampas as a folly. At the end
+of another two years, when Maud is nineteen, if Mr. Cooper renew
+the acquaintance in England, and both parties agree, I shall of
+course offer no objection, and indeed should rejoice much at a
+match which would promise well for her happiness."
+
+Mrs. Hardy thoroughly agreed with her husband, and so the matter
+rested for a short time.
+
+It was well that Mr. Hardy had been warned by his wife, for a week
+after this Mr. Cooper met him alone when he was out riding, and
+after some introduction, expressed to him that he had long felt
+that he had loved his daughter, but had waited until she was
+seventeen before expressing his wishes. He said that he had delayed
+his departure for England on this account alone, and now asked
+permission to pay his addresses to her, adding that he hoped that
+he was not altogether indifferent to her.
+
+Mr. Hardy heard him quietly to the end.
+
+"I can hardly say that I am unprepared for what you say, Mr.
+Cooper, although I had never thought of such a thing until two days
+since. Then your long delay here, and your frequent visits to our
+house, opened the eyes of Mrs. Hardy and myself. To yourself,
+personally, I can entertain no objection. Still, when I remember
+that you are only twenty-six, and that for the last four years you
+have seen no one with whom you could possibly fall in love, with
+the exception of my daughter, I can hardly think that you have had
+sufficient opportunity to know your own mind. When you return to
+England you will meet young ladies very much prettier and very much
+more accomplished than my Maud, and you may regret the haste which
+led you to form an engagement out here."
+
+"You shake your head, as is natural that you should do; but I
+repeat, you cannot at present know your own mind. If this is true
+of you, it is still more true of my daughter. She is very young,
+and knows nothing whatever of the world. Next month she proceeds to
+England with her mother, and for the next two years she will be
+engaged upon finishing her education. At the end of that time I
+shall myself return to England, and we shall then enter into
+society. If at that time you are still of the same way of thinking,
+and choose to renew our acquaintance, I shall be very happy, in the
+event of Maud accepting you, to give my consent. But I must insist
+that there shall be no engagement, no love-making, no understanding
+of any sort or kind, before you start. I put it to your honor as a
+gentleman, that you will make no effort to meet her alone, and that
+you will say nothing whatever to her, to lead her to believe that
+you are in love with her. Only when you say good-by to her, you may
+say that I have told you that as the next two years are to be
+passed in study, to make up for past deficiencies, I do not wish
+her to enter at all into society, but that at the end of that time
+you hope to renew the acquaintance."
+
+Mr. Cooper endeavored in vain to alter Mr. Hardy's determination,
+and was at last obliged to give the required promise.
+
+Mr. and Mrs. Hardy were not surprised when, two or three days after
+this, Mr. Cooper rode up and said that he had come to say good-by,
+that he had received letters urging him to return at once, and had
+therefore made up his mind to start by the next mail from Buenos
+Ayres.
+
+The young Hardys were all surprised at this sudden determination,
+but there was little time to discuss it, as Mr. Cooper had to start
+the same night for Rosario.
+
+Very warm and earnest were the adieus; and the color, which had
+rather left Maud's face, returned with redoubled force as he held
+her hand, and said very earnestly the words Mr. Hardy had permitted
+him to use.
+
+Then he leaped into his saddle and galloped off, waving his hand,
+as he crossed the river, to the group which were still standing in
+the veranda watching him.
+
+For a few days after this Maud was unusually quiet and subdued, but
+her natural spirits speedily recovered themselves, and she was soon
+as lively and gay as ever.
+
+About a fortnight after the departure of Mr. Cooper an event took
+place which for awhile threatened to upset all the plans which they
+had formed for the future.
+
+One or other of the girls were in the habit of frequently going
+over to stay for a day or two with Mrs. Mercer.
+
+One evening Hubert rode over with Ethel, and Mrs. Mercer persuaded
+the latter to stay for the night; Hubert declining to do so, as he
+had arranged with Charley to go over early to Canterbury to assist
+at the branding of the cattle at that station.
+
+In the morning they had taken their coffee, and were preparing for
+a start, when, just as they were mounting their horses, one of the
+men drew their attention to a man running at full speed toward the
+house from the direction of Mr. Mercer's.
+
+"What can be the matter?" Charley said. "What a strange thing that
+a messenger should come over on foot instead of on horseback!"
+
+"Let's ride and meet him, Charley," Hubert said; and putting spurs
+to their horses, they galloped toward the approaching figure.
+
+As they came close to him he stumbled and fell, and lay upon the
+ground, exhausted and unable to rise.
+
+The boys sprang from their horses with a feeling of vague
+uneasiness and alarm.
+
+"What is the matter?" they asked.
+The peon was too exhausted to reply for a moment or two; then he
+gasped out, "Los Indies! the Indians!"
+
+The boys gave a simultaneous cry of dread.
+
+"What has happened? Tell us quick, man; are they attacking the
+estancia?" The man shook his head.
+
+"Estancia burnt. All killed but me," he said.
+
+The news was too sudden and terrible for the boys to speak. They
+stood white and motionless with horror. "All killed! Oh, Ethel,
+Ethel!" Charley groaned.
+
+Hubert burst into tears. "What will mamma do?"
+
+"Come, Hubert," Charley said, dashing away the tears from his eyes,
+"do not let us waste a moment. All hope may not be over. The
+Indians seldom kill women, but carry them away, and she may be
+alive yet. If she is, we will rescue her, if we go right across
+America. Come, man, jump up behind me on my horse."
+
+The peon obeyed the order, and in five minutes they reached the
+gate. Here they dismounted.
+
+"Let us walk up to the house, Hubert, so as not to excite
+suspicion. We must call papa out and tell him first, so that he may
+break it to mamma. If she learn it suddenly, it may kill her."
+
+Mr. Hardy had just taken his coffee, and was standing at the door,
+looking with a pleased eye upon the signs of comfort and prosperity
+around him. There was no need, therefore, for them to approach
+nearer. As Mr. Hardy looked round upon hearing the gate shut,
+Charley beckoned to him to come down to them. For a moment he
+seemed puzzled, and looked round to see if the signal was directed
+to himself. Seeing that no one else was near him, he again looked
+at the boys, and Charley earnestly repeated the gesture.
+
+Mr. Hardy, feeling that something strange was happening, ran down
+the steps and hurried toward them.
+
+By the time he reached them, he had no need to ask questions.
+Hubert was leaning upon the gate, crying as if his heart would
+break; Charley stood with his hand on his lips, as if to check the
+sobs from breaking out, while the tears streamed down his cheeks.
+
+"Ethel?" Mr. Hardy asked.
+
+Charley nodded, and then said, with a great effort, "The Indians
+have burned the estancia; one of the men has escaped and brought
+the news. We know nothing more. Perhaps she is carried off, not
+killed."
+
+Mr. Hardy staggered under the sudden blow. "Carried off!" he
+murmured to himself. "It is worse than death."
+
+"Yes, papa" Charley said, anxious to give his father's thoughts a
+new turn. "But we will rescue her, if she is alive, wherever they
+may take her."
+
+"We will, Charley; we will, my boys," Mr. Hardy said earnestly, and
+rousing himself at the thought. "I must go up and break it to your
+mother; though how I shall do so, I know not. Do you give what
+orders you like for collecting our friends. First, though, let us
+question this man. When was it?"
+
+"Last night, signor, at eleven o'clock. I had just lain down in my
+hut, and I noticed that there were still lights downstairs at the
+house, when, all of a sudden, I heard a yell as of a thousand
+fiends, and I knew the Indians were upon us. I knew that it was too
+late to fly, but I threw myself out of the window, and lay flat by
+the wall, as the Indians burst in. There were eight of us, and I
+closed my ears to shut out the sound of the others' cries. Up at
+the house, too, I could hear screams and some pistol shots, and
+then more screams and cries. The Indians were all round,
+everywhere, and I dreaded lest one of them should stumble up
+against me. Then a sudden glare shot up, and I knew they were
+firing the house. The light would have shown me clearly enough, had
+I remained where I was; so I crawled on my stomach till I came to
+some potato ground a few yards off. As I lay between the rows, the
+plants covered me completely. In another minute or two the men's
+huts were set fire to, and then I could hear a great tramping, as
+of horses and cattle going away in the distance. They had not all
+gone, for I could hear voices all night, and Indians were moving
+about everywhere, in search of any one who might have escaped. They
+came close to me several times, and I feared that they would tread
+on me. After a time all became quiet; but I dared not move till
+daylight. Then, looking about carefully, I could see no one, and I
+jumped up, and never stopped running until you met me."
+
+[Illustration: ETHEL'S CAPTURE BY THE INDIANS.]
+
+Mr. Hardy now went up to the house to break the sad tidings to his
+wife. Charley ordered eight peons to saddle horses instantly, and
+while they were doing so he wrote on eight leaves of his
+pocketbook: "The Mercers' house destroyed last night by Indians;
+the Mercers killed or carried off. My sister Ethel with them. For
+God's sake, join us to recover them. Meet at Mercer's as soon as
+possible. Send this note round to all neighbors."
+
+One of these slips of paper was given to each peon, and they were
+told to ride for their lives in different directions, for that Miss
+Ethel was carried off by the Indians.
+
+This was the first intimation of the tidings that had arrived, and
+a perfect chorus of lamentation arose from the women, and of
+execrations of rage from the men. Just at this moment Terence came
+running down from the house. "Is it true, Mister Charles? Sarah
+says that the mistress and Miss Maud are gone quite out of their
+minds, and that Miss Ethel has been killed by the Indians!"
+
+"Killed or carried away, Terence; we do not know where to yet"
+
+Terence was a warm-hearted fellow, and he set up a yell of
+lamentation which drowned the sobs and curses of the natives.
+
+"Hush, Terence," Charley said. "We shall have time to cry for her
+afterward; we must be doing now."
+
+"I will, Mister Charles; but you will let me go with you to search
+for her. Won't you, now, Mister Charles?"
+
+"Yes, Terence; I will take you with us, and leave Lopez in charge.
+Send him here."
+
+Lopez was close. He, too, was really affected at the loss of his
+young mistress; for Ethel, by her unvarying sweetness of temper,
+was a favorite with every one.
+
+"Lopez, you will remain here in charge. We may be away two days--we
+may be away twenty. I know I can trust you to look after the place
+just as if we were here."
+
+The _capitaz_ bowed with his hand on his heart. Even the
+peasants of South America preserve the grand manner and graceful
+carriage of their Spanish ancestors. "And now, Lopez, do you know
+of any of the Gauchos in this part of the country who have ever
+lived with the Indians, and know their country at all?"
+
+"Martinez, one of the shepherds at Canterbury, Signor Charles, was
+with them for seven months; and Perez, one of Signor Jamieson's
+men, was longer still."
+
+Charles at once wrote notes asking that Perez and Martinez might
+accompany the expedition, and dispatched them by mounted peons.
+
+"And now, Lopez, what amount of _charqui_ have we in store?"
+
+"A good stock, signor; enough for fifty men for a fortnight."
+
+Charqui is meat dried in the sun. In hot climates meat cannot be
+kept for many hours in its natural state. When a bullock is killed,
+therefore, all the meat which is not required for immediate use is
+cut up into thin strips, and hung up in the sun to dry. After this
+process it is hard and strong, and by no means palatable; but it
+will keep for many months, and is the general food of the people.
+In large establishments it is usual to kill several animals at
+once, so as to lay in sufficient store of charqui to last for some
+time.
+
+"Terence, go up to the house and see what biscuit there is. Lopez,
+get our horses saddled, and one for Terence--a good one--and give
+them a feed of maize. Now, Hubert, let us go up to the house, and
+get our carbines and pistols."
+
+Mr. Hardy came out to meet them as they approached. "How are mamma
+and Maud, papa?"
+
+"More quiet and composed now, boys. They have both gone to lie
+down. Maud wanted sadly to go with us, but she gave way directly. I
+pointed out to her that her duty was to remain here by her mother's
+side. And now, Charley, what arrangements have you made?"
+
+Charley told his father what he had done.
+
+"That is right. And now we will be off at once. Give Terence orders
+to bring on the meat and biscuit in an hour's time. Let him load a
+couple of horses, and bring a man with him to bring them back."
+
+"Shall we bring any rockets, papa?"
+
+"It is not likely that they will be of any use, Hubert; but we may
+as well take three or four of each sort. Roll up a poncho, boys,
+and fasten it on your saddles. Put plenty of ammunition in your
+bags; see your brandy flasks are full, and put out half a dozen
+bottles to go with Terence. There are six pounds of tobacco in the
+storeroom; let him bring them all. Hubert, take our water-skins;
+and look in the storeroom--there are three or four spare skins;
+give them to Terence, some of our friends may not have thought of
+bringing theirs, and the country may, for aught we know, be badly
+watered. And tell him to bring a dozen colored blankets with him."
+
+In a few minutes all these things were attended to, and then, just
+as they were going out of the house, Sarah came up, her face
+swollen with crying.
+
+"Won't you take a cup of tea and just something to eat, sir? You've
+had nothing yet, and you will want it. It is all ready in the
+dining-room."
+
+"Thank you, Sarah. You are right. Come, boys, try and make a good
+breakfast. We must keep up our hearts, you know, and we will bring
+our little woman back ere long."
+
+Mr. Hardy spoke more cheerfully, and the boys soon, too, felt their
+spirits rising a little. The bustle of making preparations, the
+prospect of the perilous adventure before them, and the thought
+that they should assuredly, sooner or later, come up with the
+Indians, all combined to give them hope. Mr. Hardy had little fear
+of finding the body of his child under the ruins of the Mercers'
+house. The Indians never deliberately kill white women, always
+carrying them off; and Mr. Hardy felt confident that, unless Ethel
+had been accidentally killed in the assault, this was the fate
+which had befallen her.
+
+A hasty meal was swallowed, and then, just as they were starting,
+Mrs. Hardy and Maud came out to say "Good-by," and an affecting
+scene occurred. Mr. Hardy and the boys kept up as well as they
+could, in order to inspire the mother and sister with hope during
+their absence, and with many promises to bring their missing one
+back they galloped off.
+
+They were scarcely out of the gate, when they saw their two friends
+from Canterbury coming along at full gallop. Both were armed to the
+teeth, and evidently prepared for an expedition, They wrung the
+hands of Mr. Hardy and his sons.
+
+"We ordered our horses the moment we got your note, and ate our
+breakfasts as they were being got ready. We made a lot of copies of
+your note, and sent off half a dozen men in various directions with
+them. Then we came on at once. Of course most of the others cannot
+arrive for some time yet, but we were too anxious to hear all about
+it to delay, and we thought that we might catch you before you
+started, to aid you in your first search. Have you any more certain
+news than you sent us?"
+
+"None," Mr. Hardy said, and then repeated the relation of the
+survivor.
+
+There was a pause when he had finished, and then Mr. Herries said:
+
+"Well, Mr. Hardy, I need not tell you, if our dear little Ethel is
+alive, we will follow you till we find her, if we are a year about
+it."
+
+"Thanks, thanks," Mr. Hardy said earnestly. "I feel a conviction
+that we shall yet recover her."
+
+During this conversation they had been galloping rapidly toward the
+scene of the catastrophe, and, absorbed in their thoughts, not
+another word was spoken until they gained the first rise, from
+which they had been accustomed to see the pleasant house of the
+Mercers. An exclamation of rage and sorrow burst from them all, as
+only a portion of the chimney and a charred post or two showed
+where it had stood. The huts of the peons had also disappeared; the
+young trees and shrubs round the house were scorched up and burned
+by the heat to which they had been exposed, or had been broken off
+from the spirit of wanton mischief.
+
+With clinched teeth, and faces pale with rage and anxiety, the
+party rode on past the site of the huts, scattered round which were
+the bodies of several of the murdered peons. They halted not until
+they drew rein, and leaped off in front of the house itself.
+
+It had been built entirely of wood, and only the stumps of the
+corner posts remained erect. The sun had so thoroughly dried the
+boards of which it was constructed that it had burned like so much
+tinder, and the quantity of ashes that remained was very small.
+Here and there, however, were uneven heaps; and in perfect silence,
+but with a sensation of overpowering dread, Mr. Hardy and his
+friends tied up their horses, and proceeded to examine these heaps,
+to see if they were formed by the remains of human beings.
+
+Very carefully they turned them over, and as they did so their
+knowledge of the arrangements of the different rooms helped them to
+identify the various articles. Here was a bed, there a box of
+closely-packed linen, of which only the outer part was burned, the
+interior bursting into flames as they turned it over; here was the
+storeroom, with its heaps of half-burned flour where the sacks had
+stood.
+
+In half an hour they were able to say with tolerable certainty that
+no human beings had been burned, for the bodies could not have been
+wholly consumed in such a speedy conflagration.
+
+"Perhaps they have all been taken prisoners," Hubert suggested, as
+with a sigh of relief they concluded their search, and turned from
+the spot.
+
+Mr. Hardy shook his head. He was too well acquainted with the
+habits of the Indians to think such a thing possible. Just at this
+moment Dash, who had followed them unnoticed during their ride, and
+who had been ranging about uneasily while they had been occupied by
+the search, set up a piteous howling. All started and looked round.
+The dog was standing by the edge of the ditch which had been dug
+outside the fence. His head was raised high in air, and he was
+giving vent to prolonged and mournful howls.
+
+All felt that the terrible secret was there. The boys turned
+ghastly pale, and they felt that not for worlds could they approach
+to examine the dreadful mystery.
+
+Mr. Hardy was almost as much affected.
+
+Mr. Herries looked at his friend, and then said gravely to Mr.
+Hardy, "Do you wait here, Mr. Hardy; we will go on."
+
+As the friends left them the boys turned away, and leaning against
+their horses, covered their eyes with their hands. They dared not
+look round. Mr. Hardy stood still for a minute, but the agony of
+suspense was too great for him. He started off at a run, came up to
+his friends, and with them hurried on to the fence.
+
+Not as yet could they see into the ditch. At ordinary times the
+fence would have been an awkward place to climb over; now they
+hardly knew how they scrambled over, and stood by the side of the
+ditch. They looked down, and Mr. Hardy gave a short, gasping cry,
+and caught at the fence for support.
+
+Huddled together in the ditch was a pile of dead bodies, and among
+them peeped out a piece of a female dress. Anxious to relieve their
+friend's agonizing suspense, the young men leaped down into the
+ditch, and began removing the upper bodies from the ghastly pile.
+
+First were the two men employed in the house; then came Mr. Mercer;
+then the two children and an old woman-servant; below them were the
+bodies of Mrs. Mercer and her brother. There were no more. Ethel
+was not among them.
+
+When first he had heard of the massacre Mr. Hardy had said, "Better
+dead than carried off," but the relief to his feelings was so great
+as the last body was turned over, and that it was evident that the
+child was not there, that he would have fallen had not Mr. Herries
+hastened to climb up and support him, at the same time crying out
+to the boys, "She is not here."
+
+Charley and Hubert turned toward each other, and burst into tears
+of thankfulness and joy. The suspense had been almost too much for
+them, and Hubert felt so sick and faint that he was forced to lie
+down for awhile, while Charley went forward to the others. He was
+terribly shocked at the discovery of the murder of the entire
+party, as they had cherished the hope that Mrs. Mercer at least
+would have been carried off. As, however, she had been murdered,
+while it was pretty evident that Ethel had been spared, or her body
+would have been found with the others, it was supposed that poor
+Mrs. Mercer had been shot accidentally, perhaps in the endeavor to
+save her children.
+
+The bodies were now taken from the ditch, and laid side by side
+until the other settlers should arrive. It was not long before they
+began to assemble, riding up in little groups of twos and threes.
+Rage and indignation were upon all their faces at the sight of the
+devastated house, and their feelings were redoubled when they found
+that the whole of the family, who were so justly liked and
+esteemed, were dead. The Edwards and the Jamiesons were among the
+earliest arrivals, bringing the Gaucho Martinez with them. Perez,
+too, shortly after arrived from Canterbury, he having been out on
+the farm when his master left.
+
+Although all these events have taken some time to relate, it was
+still early in the day. The news had arrived at six, and the
+messengers were sent off half an hour later. The Hardys had set out
+before eight, and had reached the scene of the catastrophe in half
+an hour. it was nine o'clock when the bodies were found, and half
+an hour after this friends began to assemble. By ten o'clock a
+dozen more had arrived, and several more could be seen in the
+distance coming along at full gallop to the spot.
+
+"I think," Mr. Hardy said, "that we had better employ ourselves,
+until the others arrive, in burying the remains of our poor
+friends."
+
+There was a general murmur of assent, and all separated to look for
+tools. Two or three spades were found thrown down in the garden,
+where a party had been at work the other day. And then all looked
+to Mr. Hardy.
+
+"I think," he said, "we cannot do better than lay them where their
+house stood. The place will never be the site of another
+habitation. Any one who may buy the property would choose another
+place for his house than the scene of this awful tragedy. The gate
+once locked, the fence will keep out animals for very many years."
+
+A grave was accordingly dug in the center of the space once
+occupied by the house. In this the bodies of Mr. Mercer and his
+family were laid. And Mr. Hardy having solemnly pronounced such
+parts of the burial service as he remembered over them, all
+standing by bareheaded, and stern with suppressed sorrow, the earth
+was filled in over the spot where a father, mother, brother, and
+two children lay together. Another grave was at the same time dug
+near, and in this the bodies of the three servants whose remains
+had been found with the others were laid.
+
+By this time it was eleven o'clock, and the number of those present
+had reached twenty. The greater portion of them were English, but
+there were also three Germans, a Frenchman, and four Gauchos, all
+accustomed to Indian warfare.
+
+"How long do you think it will be before all who intend to come can
+join us?" Mr. Hardy asked.
+
+There was a pause; then one of the Jamiesons said:
+
+"Judging by the time your message reached us, you must have set off
+before seven. Most of us, on the receipt of the message, forwarded
+it by fresh messengers on further; but of course some delay
+occurred in so doing, especially as many of us may probably have
+been out on the plains when the message arrived. The persons to
+whom we sent might also have been out. Our friends who would be
+likely to obey the summons at once all live within fifteen miles or
+so. That makes thirty miles, going and returning. Allowing for the
+loss of time I have mentioned, we should allow five hours. That
+would bring it on to twelve o'clock."
+
+There was a general murmur of assent.
+
+"In that case," Mr. Hardy said, "I propose that we eat a meal as
+hearty as we can before starting. Charley, tell Terence to bring
+the horses with the provisions here."
+
+The animals were now brought up, and Mr. Hardy found that, in
+addition to the charqui and biscuit, Mrs. Hardy had sent a large
+supply of cold meat which happened to be in the larder, some bread,
+a large stock of tea and sugar, a kettle, and some tin mugs.
+
+The cold meat and bread afforded an ample meal, which was much
+needed by those who had come away without breakfast.
+
+By twelve o'clock six more had arrived, the last comer being Mr.
+Percy. Each newcomer was filled with rage and horror upon hearing
+of the awful tragedy which had been enacted.
+
+At twelve o'clock exactly Mr. Hardy rose to his feet. "My friends,"
+he said, "I thank you all for so promptly answering to my summons.
+I need say no words to excite your indignation at the massacre that
+has taken place here. You know, too, that my child has been carried
+away. I intend, with my sons and my friends from Canterbury, going
+in search of her into the Indian country. My first object is to
+secure her, my second to avenge my murdered friends. A heavy
+lesson, too, given the Indians in their own country, will teach
+them that they cannot with impunity commit their depredations upon
+us. Unless such a lesson is given, a life on the plains will become
+so dangerous that we must give up our settlements. At the same
+time, I do not conceal from you that the expedition is a most
+dangerous one. We are entering a country of which we know nothing.
+The Indians are extremely numerous, and are daily becoming better
+armed. The time we may be away is altogether vague; for if it is a
+year I do not return until I have found my child. I know that there
+is not a man here who would not gladly help to rescue Ethel--not
+one who does not long to avenge our murdered friends. At the same
+time, some of you have ties, wives and children, whom you may not
+consider yourselves justified in leaving, even upon an occasion
+like this. Some of you, I know, will accompany me; but if any one
+feels any doubts, from the reasons I have stated--if any one
+considers that he has no right to run this tremendous risk--let him
+say so at once, and I shall respect his feelings, and my friendship
+and good-will will in no way be diminished."
+
+As Mr. Hardy ceased, his eye wandered round the circle of
+stalwart-looking figures around him, and rested upon the Jamiesons.
+No one answered for a moment, and then the elder of the brothers
+spoke:
+
+"Mr. Hardy, it was right and kind of you to say that any who might
+elect to stay behind would not forfeit your respect and esteem, but
+I for one say that he would deservedly forfeit his own. We have all
+known and esteemed the Mercers. We have all known, and I may say,
+loved you and your family. From you we have one and all received
+very great kindness and the warmest hospitality. We all know and
+love the dear child who has been carried away; and I say that he
+who stays behind is unworthy of the name of a man. For myself and
+brother, I say that if we fall in this expedition--if we never set
+eyes upon our wives again--we shall die satisfied that we have only
+done our duty. We are with you to the death."
+
+A loud and general cheer broke from the whole party as the usually
+quiet Scotchman thus energetically expressed himself. And each man
+in turn came up to Mr. Hardy and grasped his hand, saying, "Yours
+till death."
+
+Mr. Hardy was too much affected to reply for a short time; then he
+briefly but heartily expressed his thanks. After which he went on:
+"Now to business. I have here about three hundred pounds of
+charqui. Let every man take ten pounds, as nearly as he can guess.
+There are also two pounds of biscuit a man. The tea, sugar, and
+tobacco, the kettle, and eighty pounds of meat, I will put on to a
+spare horse, which Terence will lead. If it is well packed, the
+animal will be able to travel as quickly as we can."
+
+There was a general muster round the provisions. Each man took his
+allotted share. The remainder was packed in two bundles, and
+secured firmly upon either side of the spare horse; the tobacco,
+sugar, and tea being enveloped in a hide, and placed securely
+between them, and the kettle placed at the top of all. Then,
+mounting their horses, the troop sallied out; and, as Mr. Hardy
+watched them start, he felt that in fair fight by day they could
+hold their own against ten times their number of Indians.
+
+Each man, with the exception of the young Hardys, who had their
+Colt's carbines, had a long rifle; in addition to which all had
+pistols--most of them having revolvers, the use of which, since the
+Hardys had first tried them with such deadly effect upon the
+pampas, had become very general among the English settlers. Nearly
+all were young, with the deep sunburned hue gained by exposure on
+the plains. Every man had his poncho--a sort of native blanket,
+used either as a cloak or for sleeping in at will--rolled up before
+him on his saddle. It would have been difficult to find a more
+serviceable-looking set of men; and the expression of their faces,
+as they took their last look at the grave of the Mercers, boded
+very ill for any Indian who might fall into their clutches.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+THE PAMPAS ON FIRE.
+
+
+The party started at a canter--the pace which they knew their
+horses would be able to keep up for the longest time--breaking
+every half-hour or so into a walk for ten minutes, to give them
+breathing time. All were well mounted on strong, serviceable
+animals; but these had not in all cases been bought specially for
+speed, as had those of the Hardys. It was evident that the chase
+would be a long one. The Indians had twelve hours' start; they were
+much lighter men than the whites, and carried less additional
+weight. Their horses, therefore, could travel as fast and as far as
+those of their pursuers. The sheep would, it is true, be an
+encumbrance; the cattle could scarcely be termed so; and it was
+probable that the first day they would make a journey of fifty or
+sixty miles, traveling at a moderate pace only, as they would know
+that no instant pursuit could take place. Indeed their strength,
+which the peon had estimated at five hundred men, would render them
+to a certain extent careless, as upon an open plain the charge of
+this number of men would sweep away any force which could be
+collected short of obtaining a strong body of troops from Rosario.
+
+For the next two days it was probable that they would make as long
+and speedy journeys as the animals could accomplish. After that,
+being well in their own country, they would cease to travel
+rapidly, as no pursuit had ever been attempted in former instances.
+
+There was no difficulty in following the track. Mr. Mercer had
+possessed nearly a thousand cattle and five thousand sheep, and the
+ground was trampled, in a broad, unmistakable line. Once or twice
+Mr. Hardy consulted his compass. The trail ran southwest by west.
+
+There was not much talking. The whole party were too impressed with
+the terrible scene they had witnessed, and the tremendously
+hazardous nature of the enterprise they had undertaken, to indulge
+in general conversation. Gradually, however, the steady, rapid
+motion, the sense of strength and reliance in themselves and each
+other, lessened the somber expression, and a general talk began,
+mostly upon Indian fights, in which most of the older settlers had
+at one time or other taken a part.
+
+Mr. Hardy took a part in and encouraged this conversation. He knew
+how necessary, in an expedition of this sort, it was to keep up the
+spirits of all engaged; and he endeavored, therefore, to shake off
+his own heavy weight of care, and to give animation and life to
+them all.
+
+The spirits of the younger men rose rapidly, and insensibly the
+pace was increased, until Mr. Hardy, as leader of the party, was
+compelled to recall to them the necessity of saving their animals,
+many of which had already come from ten to fifteen miles before
+arriving at the rendezvous at the Mercers'.
+
+After three hours' steady riding they arrived at the banks of a
+small stream. There Mr. Hardy called a halt, for the purpose of
+resting the animals.
+
+"I think," he said, "that we must have done twenty-five miles. We
+will give them an hour's rest, and then do another fifteen. Some of
+them have already done forty, and it will not do to knock them up
+the first day."
+
+Girths were loosened, and the horses were at work cropping the
+sweet grass near the water's edge. The whole party threw themselves
+down on a sloping bank, pipes were taken out and lit, and the
+probable direction of the chase discussed.
+
+In a short time Charley rose, and saying, "I will see if I can get
+anything better than dried meat for supper," exchanged his rifle
+for Mr. Hardy's double-barreled gun, which was carried by Terence,
+and whistling for the retriever, strolled off up the stream. In ten
+minutes the double-barrels were heard at a short distance, and a
+quarter of an hour afterward again, but this time faintly. Ten
+minutes before the hour was up he appeared, wiping the perspiration
+from his face, with seven and a half brace of plump duck.
+
+"They were all killed in four shots," he said, as he threw them
+down. "They were asleep in the pools, and I let fly right into the
+middle of them before they heard me."
+
+There was a general feeling of satisfaction at the sight of the
+birds, which were tied in couples, and fastened on the horses.
+
+In two minutes more they were again in the saddles, Hubert saying
+to his father as they started, "There is one satisfaction, papa, we
+can't miss the way. We have only to ride far enough, and we must
+overtake them."
+
+Mr. Hardy shook his head. He knew enough of Indian warfare to be
+certain that every artifice and maneuver would have to be looked
+for and baffled; for even when believing themselves safe from
+pursuit, Indians never neglect to take every possible precaution
+against it.
+
+After riding for two hours longer Mr. Hardy consulted the Gauchos
+if there were any stream near, but they said that it would be at
+least two hours' riding before they reached another, and that that
+was a very uncertain supply. Mr. Hardy therefore decided to halt at
+once, as the men knew this part of the plain thoroughly, from
+hunting ostriches on it, and from frequent expeditions in search of
+strayed cattle. They had all lived and hunted at one time or
+another with the Indians. Many of the Gauchos take up their abode
+permanently with the Indians, being adopted as members of the
+tribe, and living and dressing like the Indians themselves. These
+visits are generally undertaken to avoid the consequences of some
+little difficulty--a man killed in a gambling quarrel, or for
+rivalry in love. Sometimes they make their peace again, satisfy the
+blood-relations with a bull, secure absolution readily enough by
+confession and a gift of a small sum to the Church, and return to
+their former life; but as often as not they remain with the
+Indians, and even attain to the rank of noted chiefs among them.
+
+The men who accompanied the expedition were all of the former
+class. All had taken to the pampas to escape the consequences of
+some crime or other, but had grown perfectly sick of it, and had
+returned to civilized life. In point of morals they were not,
+perhaps, desirable companions; but they were all brave enough,
+thoroughly knew the country further inland, and, if not
+enthusiastic in the adventure, were yet willing enough to follow
+their respective masters, and ready to fight for their lives upon
+occasion.
+
+Just as they halted Mr. Herries thought that he caught sight of
+some deer a short way ahead. He therefore started at once for a
+stalk, several of the others going off in other directions. Mr.
+Herries proceeded very cautiously, and the wind being fortunately
+toward him, he was enabled to creep up tolerably close. The
+animals, which are extremely shy, had, however, an idea that danger
+was about before he could get within a fair shot. As he knew that
+they would be off in another instant, he at once practiced a trick
+which he had often found to be successful.
+
+He threw himself on his back, pulled a red handkerchief from his
+neck, tied it to one of his boots so as to let it float freely in
+the air, and then threw up both legs in the form of a letter V.
+Then he began moving them slowly about, waving them to and fro. The
+deer, which were upon the point of flight, paused to gaze at this
+strange object; then they began to move in a circle, their looks
+still directed at this unknown thing, to which they gradually kept
+approaching as they moved round it. At last they were fairly in
+shot, and Herries, whose legs were beginning to be very weary,
+sprang to his feet, and in another instant the foremost of the deer
+lay quivering in death.
+
+Taking it upon his shoulders, he proceeded to the camp, where his
+arrival was hailed with acclamation. A fire was already alight,
+made of grass and turf, the former being pulled up in handfuls by
+the roots, and making a fierce but short-lived blaze. A large
+quantity had been collected at hand, and the ducks were already cut
+up. Half a one was handed to each; fur every man is his own cook
+upon the pampas.
+
+The other hunters shortly returned, bringing in another of the
+little deer; for the stag of the pampas is of small size. They were
+speedily skinned by the Gauchos, and cut up, and all the party were
+now engaged in roasting duck and venison steaks on their steel
+ramrods over the fire.
+
+When all were satisfied, a double handful of tea was thrown into
+the kettle, which was already boiling, pipes were lighted, and a
+general feeling of comfort experienced. The horses had been
+picketed close at hand, each man having cut or pulled a heap of
+grass and placed it before his beast; beside which, the picket
+ropes allowed each horse to crop the grass growing in a small
+circle, of which he was the center.
+
+Mr. Hardy chatted apart for some time with the Gauchos, anxious to
+know as much as possible of the country into which he was entering.
+The others chatted and told stories. Presently Mr. Hardy joined
+again in the general conversation, and then, during a pause, said,
+"Although, my friends, I consider it most improbable that any
+Indians are in the neighborhood, still it is just possible that
+they may have remained, on purpose to fall at night upon any party
+who might venture to pursue. At any rate, it is right to begin our
+work in a businesslike way. I therefore propose that we keep
+watches regularly. It is now nine o'clock. We shall be moving by
+five: that will make four watches of two hours each. I should say
+that three men in a watch, stationed at fifty yards from the camp
+upon different sides would suffice."
+
+There was a general assent to the proposal.
+
+"To save trouble," Mr. Hardy went on, "I suggest that we keep watch
+in the alphabetical order of our names. Twelve of us will be on
+to-night, and the next twelve to-morrow night."
+
+The proposal was at once agreed to; and the three who were first on
+duty at once rose, and, taking their rifles, went off in various
+directions, first agreeing that one of them should give a single
+whistle as a signal that the watch was up, and that two whistles
+close together would be a warning to retreat at once toward the
+center.
+
+The watch also ascertained which were the next three men to be
+roused, and these and the succeeding watches agreed to lie next to
+each other, in order that they might be roused without awakening
+their companions.
+
+In a few minutes there was a general unrolling of ponchos, and soon
+afterward only sleeping figures could be seen by the dim light of
+the smoldering fire. Mr. Hardy, indeed, was the only one of the
+party who did not fall to sleep. Thoughts of the events of the last
+twenty-four hours, of the best course to be adopted, and of the
+heavy responsibility upon himself as leader of this perilous
+expedition, prevented him from sleeping. He heard the watch return,
+rouse the relief, and lay down in their places. In another half
+hour he himself rose, and walked out toward the sentry.
+
+It was a young man named Cook, one of the new settlers to the east
+of Mount Pleasant. "Is that you, Mr. Hardy?" he asked, as he
+approached. "I was just coming in to wake you."
+
+"What is it, Mr. Cook?"
+
+"It strikes me, sir, that there is a strange light away to the
+southwest. I have only noticed it the last few minutes, and thought
+it was fancy, but it gets more distinct every minute."
+
+Mr. Hardy looked out anxiously into the gloom and quickly perceived
+the appearance that his friend alluded to.
+
+For a minute or two he did not speak, and then, as the light
+evidently increased, he said, almost with a groan, "It is what I
+feared they would do: they have set the prairie on fire. You need
+not keep watch any longer. We are as much separated from the
+Indians as if the ocean divided us."
+
+Cook gave the two short whistles agreed upon to recall the other
+men on guard, and then returned with Mr. Hardy to the rest of the
+party. Then Mr. Hardy roused all his companions. Every man leaped
+up, rifle in hand, believing that the Indians were approaching.
+
+"We must be up and doing," Mr. Hardy said cheerfully; "the Indians
+have fired the pampas."
+
+There was a thrill of apprehension in the bosom of many present,
+who had heard terrible accounts of prairie fires, but this speedily
+subsided at the calm manner of Mr. Hardy.
+
+"The fire," he said, "may be ten miles away yet. I should say that
+it was, but it is difficult to judge, for this grass does not flame
+very high, and the smoke drifts between it and us. The wind,
+fortunately, is light, but it will be here in little over half an
+hour. Now, let the four Gauchos attend to the horses, to see they
+do not stampede. The rest form a line a couple of yards apart, and
+pull up the grass by the roots, throwing it behind them, so as to
+leave the ground clear. The wider we can make it the better."
+
+All fell to work with hearty zeal. Looking over their shoulders,
+the sky now appeared on fire. Flickering tongues of flame seemed to
+struggle upward. There was an occasional sound of feet, as herds of
+deer flew by before the danger.
+
+"How far will it go, papa, do you think?" Hubert asked his father,
+next to whom he was at work.
+
+"I should say that it would most likely stop at the stream where we
+halted to-day, Hubert. The ground was wet and boggy for some
+distance on the other side."
+
+The horses were now getting very restive, and there was a momentary
+pause from work to wrap ponchos round their heads, so as to prevent
+their seeing the glare.
+
+The fire could not have been more than three miles distant, when
+the space cleared was as wide as Mr. Hardy deemed necessary for
+safety. A regular noise, something between a hiss and a roar, was
+plainly audible; and when the wind lifted the smoke the flames
+could be seen running along in an unbroken wall of fire. Birds flew
+past overhead with terrified cries, and a close, hot smell of
+burning was very plainly distinguishable.
+
+Starting about halfway along the side of the cleared piece of
+ground, Mr. Hardy set the dry grass alight. For a moment or two it
+burned slowly, and then, fanned by the wind, It gained force, and
+spread in a semicircle of flame.
+
+The horses were already unpicketed, and half of the party held them
+at a short distance in the rear, while the rest stood in readiness
+to extinguish the fire if it crossed the cleared space.
+
+Over and over again the fire crept partially across--for the
+clearing had been done but roughly--but it was speedily stamped out
+by the heavy boots of the watchers.
+
+The spectacle, as the fire swept away before the wind, was fine in
+the extreme. The party seemed includes between two walls of fire.
+The main conflagration was now fearfully close, burning flakes were
+already falling among them, and the sound of the fire was like the
+hiss of the surf upon a pebbly beach.
+
+"Now," Mr. Hardy said, "forward with the horses. Every one to his
+own animal. Put your ponchos over your own heads as well as your
+horses."
+
+In another minute the party stood clustered upon the black and
+smoking ground which the fire they had kindled had swept clear.
+There, for five minutes, they remained without moving unscorched by
+the raging element around them, but half-choked with the smoke.
+
+Then Mr. Hardy spoke: "It is over now. You can look up."
+
+There was a general expression of astonishment as the heads emerged
+from their wrappers, and the eyes recovered sufficiently from the
+effects of the blinding smoke to look round. Where had the fire
+gone? Where, indeed! The main conflagration had swept by them, had
+divided in two when it reached, the ground already burned, and
+these columns, growing further and further asunder as the newly
+kindled fire had widened, were already far away to the right and
+left, while beyond and between them was the fire that they
+themselves had kindled, now two miles wide, and already far in the
+distance.
+
+These fires in the pampas, although they frequently extend over a
+vast tract of country, are seldom fatal to life. The grass rarely
+attains a height exceeding three feet, and burns out almost like so
+much cotton. A man on horseback, having no other method of escape,
+can, by blindfolding his horse and wrapping his own face in a
+poncho, ride fearless through the wall of fire without damage to
+horse or rider.
+
+It was only, therefore, the young hands who had felt any uneasiness
+at the sight of the fire; for the settlers were in the habit of
+regularly setting fire to the grass upon their farms every year
+before the rains, as the grass afterward springs up fresh and green
+for the animals. Care has to be taken to choose a calm day, when
+the flames can be confined within bounds; but instances have
+occurred when fires so commenced have proved most disastrous,
+destroying many thousands of animals.
+
+"There is nothing to do but to remain where we are until morning,"
+Mr. Hardy said. "The horses had better be picketed, and then those
+who can had better get a few hours' more sleep. We shall want no
+more watch to-night." In a few minutes most of the party were again
+asleep; and the young Hardys were about to follow their example,
+when Mr. Hardy came up to them and said quietly, "Come this way,
+boys; we are going to have a council."
+
+The boys followed their father to where some eight or nine men were
+sitting down at a short distance from the sleepers, and these the
+boys made out, by the glow from their pipes, to consist of Herries
+and Farquhar, the two Jamiesons, Mr. Percy, and the four Gauchos.
+
+"This is a terribly bad business," Mr. Hardy began, when he and his
+sons had taken their seats on the ground. "I expected it, but it is
+a heavy blow nevertheless."
+
+"Why, what is the matter, papa?" the boys exclaimed anxiously.
+"Have we lost anything?"
+
+"Yes, boys," Mr. Hardy said; "we have lost what is at this moment
+the most important thing in the world--we have lost the trail."
+
+Charley and Hubert uttered a simultaneous exclamation of dismay as
+the truth flashed across their minds. "The trail was lost!" They
+had never thought of this. In the excitement of the fire, it had
+never once occurred to them that the flames were wiping out every
+trace of the Indian track.
+
+Mr. Hardy then went on, addressing himself to the others: "Of
+course this fire was lit with the especial intent of throwing us
+off the scent. Have you any idea how far it is likely to have
+come?" he asked the Gauchos. "That is, are you aware of the
+existence of any wide stream or damp ground which would have
+checked it, and which must therefore be the furthest boundary of
+the fire?"
+
+The Gauchos were silent a minute; then Perez said, "The next stream
+is fifteen miles further; but it is small, and would not stop the
+fire going with the wind. Beyond that there is no certain stream,
+as far as I know of."
+
+"The ground rises, and the grass gets thinner and poorer thirty
+miles or so on. I should say that they would light it this side of
+that," Martinez said. The other Gauchos nodded assent.
+
+"We took the bearings of the track by our compass," Farquhar said.
+"Could we not follow it on by compass across the burned ground, and
+hit it upon the other side?"
+
+Mr. Percy and Mr. Hardy both shook their heads. "I do not pretend
+to say where the trail is gone," the former said, "but the one
+place where I am quite sure it is not, is on the continuation of
+the present line."
+
+"No," Mr. Hardy continued. "As you say, Percy, there it certainly
+is not. The Indians, when they got to some place which is probably
+about half across the burned ground, turned either to the right or
+left, and traveled steadily in that direction, sending one or two
+of their number in the old direction to light the grass, so as to
+sweep away all trace of the trail. They may have gone to the right
+or to the left, or may even have doubled back and passed us again
+at only a few miles' distance. We have no clew whatever to guide us
+at present, except the certainty that sooner or later the Indians
+will make for their own camping-ground. That is the exact state of
+the affair." And Mr. Hardy repeated what he had just said in
+Spanish to the Gauchos, who nodded assent.
+
+"And in which direction do the Gauchos believe that their
+camping-ground lies?" Mr. Jamieson asked after a pause; "because it
+appears to me that it is a waste of time to look for the trail, and
+that our only plan is to push straight on to their villages, which
+we may reach before they get there. And in that case, if we found
+them unguarded, we might seize all their women, and hold them as
+hostages until they return. Then we could exchange them for Ethel;
+and when we had once got her, we could fight our way back."
+
+"Capital, capital!" the other English man exclaimed. "Don't you
+think so, papa?" Hubert added, seeing that Mr. Hardy did not join
+in the general approval.
+
+"The plan is an admirably conceived one, but there is a great
+difficulty in the way. I observed yesterday that the trail did not
+lead due south, as it should have done if the Indians were going
+straight back to their camping ground. I questioned the Gauchos,
+and they all agree with me on the subject. The trail is too
+westerly for the camping-grounds of the Pampas Indians; too far to
+the south for the country of the Flat-faces of the Sierras. I fear
+that there is a combination of the two tribes, as there was in the
+attack upon us, and that they went the first day in the direction
+which would be most advantageous for both; and that, on reaching
+their halting-place--perhaps twenty or thirty miles from here--they
+made a division of their booty, and each tribe drew off toward its
+own hunting-grounds. In this case we have first to find the two
+trails, then to decide the terrible question, which party have
+taken Ethel?"
+
+Again the Gauchos, upon this being translated to them, expressed
+their perfect accordance with Mr. Hardy's views, and some surprise
+at his idea as having been so identical with their own upon the
+subject.
+
+As for the six young men, they were too dismayed at the unexpected
+difficulties which had started up in their way to give any opinion
+whatever. This uncertainty was terrible, and all felt that it would
+have a most depressing effect upon themselves and upon the whole
+expedition; for how could they tell, after journeying for hundreds
+of miles, whether every step might not take them further from the
+object of their search?
+
+In this state of depression they remained for some minutes, when
+Perez the Gaucho said, in his broken English, "Most tribe take most
+plunder, most cattle, most sheep--take girl."
+
+"Well thought of, Perez!" Mr. Hardy exclaimed warmly. "That is the
+clew for us, sure enough. As you say, the tribe who has furnished
+most men will, as a matter of course, take a larger share of the
+booty; and Ethel being the only captive, would naturally go to the
+strongest tribe."
+
+The rest were all delighted at this solution of a difficulty which
+had before appeared insuperable, and the most lively satisfaction
+was manifested.
+
+The plans for the day were then discussed. Propositions were made
+that they should divide into two parties, and go one to the right
+and the other to the left until they arrived at unburned ground,
+the edge of which they should follow until they met. This scheme
+was, however, given up, as neither party would have seen the trail
+inspected by the other and no opinion could therefore be formed as
+to the respective magnitude of the parties who had passed--a matter
+requiring the most careful examination and comparison, and an
+accurate and practiced judgment.
+
+It was finally resolved, therefore, to keep in a body, and to
+proceed, in the first place, to search for the trail of the party
+to the south. A calculation was made, upon the supposition that the
+Indians had traveled for another twenty-five miles upon their old
+course, and then separated, each party making directly for home. To
+avoid all mistakes, and to allow for a detour, it was determined to
+shape a direct course to a point considerably to the east of that
+given by the calculation, to follow the edge of the burned ground
+until the trail was arrived at, and then to cut straight across, in
+order to find and examine the trail of the western Indians.
+
+As this conclusion was arrived at, the first dawn of light appeared
+in the east, and Mr. Hardy at once roused the sleepers.
+
+He then gave them a brief account of the conclusions to which he
+had arrived in the night, and of his reason for so doing. There was
+a general expression of agreement, then the girths were tightened,
+and in five minutes the troop was in motion.
+
+How great was the change since the preceding evening! Then, as far
+as the eye could reach stretched a plain of waving grass. Birds had
+called to their mates, coveys of game had risen at their approach;
+deer had been seen bounding away in the distance; ostriches had
+gazed for an instant at the unusual sight of man, and had gone off
+with their heads forward and their wings outstretched before the
+wind.
+
+Now, the eye wandered over a plain of dingy black, unbroken by a
+single prominence, undisturbed by living creatures except
+themselves. As Hubert remarked to his father, "It looked as if it
+had been snowing black all night."
+
+Both men and horses were anxious to get over these dreary plains,
+and the pace was faster, and the halts less frequent, than they had
+been the day before.
+
+It was fortunate that the fire had not taken place at an earlier
+hour of the evening, as the horses would have been weakened by want
+of food. As it was, they had had five hours to feed after their
+arrival.
+
+Both men and horses, however, suffered much from thirst; and the
+former had good reason to congratulate themselves on having
+filled every water-skin at the first halting-place of the preceding
+day.
+
+Clouds of black impalpable dust rose as they rode along. The eyes,
+mouth, and nostrils were filled with it, and they were literally as
+black as the ground over which they rode.
+
+Twice they stopped and drank, and sparingly washed out the nostrils
+and mouths of the horses, which was a great relief to them, for
+they suffered as much as did their masters, as also did Dash, who,
+owing to his head being so near the ground, was almost suffocated;
+indeed, Hubert at last dismounted, and took the poor animal up on
+to the saddle before him.
+
+At last, after four hours' steady riding, a gleam of color was seen
+in the distance, and in another quarter of an hour they reached the
+unburned plains, which, worn and parched as they were, looked
+refreshing indeed after the dreary waste over which they had
+passed.
+
+The Gauchos, after a consultation among themselves, agreed in the
+opinion that the little stream of which they had spoken was but a
+short distance further, and that, although the channel might be
+dry, pools would no doubt be found in it. It was determined,
+therefore, to push on, and half an hour's riding by the edge of the
+burned grass brought them to the spot, when, following the course
+of the channel, they soon came to a pool, from which men and horses
+took a long drink.
+
+At their approach an immense number of wild duck rose, and, as soon
+as the horses were picketed Charley again started with the gun,
+taking Terence with him to assist in bringing home the birds. They
+soon heard his gun, and Terence presently returned with six brace
+of ducks and a goose, and a request that another man would go back
+with him, for that the birds were so abundant, and so apparently
+stupefied from flying over the smoke and flame, that he could bring
+in any quantity.
+
+One of the Jamiesons and Herries therefore went out, and returned
+in less than an hour with Charley, bringing between them four more
+geese and eighteen brace of ducks.
+
+Charley was greeted with a round of applause, and was I soon at
+work with his friends upon the meal which was now ready.
+
+After breakfast there was a comparison of opinion, and it was at
+last generally agreed that they had ridden nearly forty miles since
+daybreak, and that they could not be far from the spot where the
+Indians ought to have passed if they had kept the direction as
+calculated. It was also agreed that it would be better to let the
+horses remain where they were till late in the afternoon, when they
+might accomplish another fifteen miles or so.
+
+Mr. Hardy then proposed that those who were inclined should
+accompany him on a walk along the edge of the burned ground. "We
+cannot be very far off from the trail," he said, "if our
+calculations are correct; and if we can find and examine it before
+it is time to start, we may be able to-night to cross to the other
+side, and thus gain some hours."
+
+Herries, Farquhar, the two Jamiesons, Cook, and the young Hardys at
+once volunteered for the walk, and shouldering their rifles,
+started at a steady pace.
+
+They had not walked much over a mile when a shout of pleasure broke
+from them, as, upon ascending a slight rise, they saw in the hollow
+below them the broad line of trampled grass, which showed that a
+large body of animals had lately passed along. All hurried forward,
+and a close and anxious examination took place.
+
+Opinions differed a good deal as to the number that had passed;
+nor, accustomed as they all were to seeing the tracks made by herds
+of cattle and flocks of sheep, could they come to any approximate
+agreement on the subject. Had the number been smaller, the task
+would have been easier; but it is a question requiring extreme
+knowledge and judgment to decide whether four hundred cattle and
+two thousand sheep, or six hundred cattle and three thousand sheep,
+have passed over a piece of ground.
+
+Mr. Hardy at last sent Charley back, accompanied by Mr. Cook, to
+request Mr. Percy to come on at once with the Gauchos to give their
+opinion. Charley and his companions were to remain with the horses,
+and were to request those not specially sent for to stay there
+also, as it would be imprudent in the extreme to leave the horses
+without a strong guard.
+
+Pending the arrival of Mr. Percy, Mr. Hardy and his friends
+followed up the trail for some distance, so as to examine it both
+in the soft bottoms and on the rises. They returned in half an hour
+to their starting place, and were shortly after joined by Mr. Percy
+and the Gauchos. Again a careful and prolonged examination, took
+place, and a tolerably unanimous opinion was at last arrived at,
+that a very large number of animals had passed, apparently the
+larger half, but that no positive opinion could be arrived at until
+a comparison was made with the trail on the western side.
+
+Although this conclusion was arrived at unanimously, it appeared to
+be reluctantly conceded to by most of them, and the reason of this
+became apparent as they were walking back toward the horses. "I
+have little doubt that the conclusion we have arrived at is
+correct," Herries remarked, "although somehow I am sorry for it;
+for ever since our talk last night I have made up my mind that she
+was most likely to be taken to the west. I suppose because the
+Indians there are more warlike than those of the pampas, and
+therefore likely to have furnished a larger contingent. Of course I
+had no reason for thinking so, but so it was."
+
+"That was just what I thought," Hubert said; and I the other
+Englishmen admitted that they had all entertained a somewhat
+similar idea.
+
+At four in the afternoon they were again in the saddle, having
+taken the precaution of filling their water-skins, and of watering
+the horses the last thing.
+
+"How far do you think it is across, papa?" Hubert asked.
+
+"It cannot be very far, Hubert. We are so much nearer the place
+where the fire began that I do not think it can have spread more
+than ten miles or so across."
+
+Mr. Hardy's conjecture proved to be correct. An hour and a half's
+riding brought them to the other side of the burned prairie,
+striking a point which they felt sure was to the south of the place
+where the trail would have left it.
+
+As they had done more than fifty miles since the morning, and the
+horses were much distressed with the effect of the dust, it was
+resolved to encamp at once. The horses received a little water, and
+were picketed out to graze. The fire was soon lit, and the ducks
+cut up and spitted upon the ramrods.
+
+All were so much exhausted with the heat, the ashes, the fatigue,
+and the want of sleep of the previous night that, the tea and pipes
+finished and the watch posted, the rest lay down to sleep before
+the sun had been an hour below the horizon.
+
+All rose at daybreak, refreshed with their quiet night's rest, and
+were soon in the saddle and on their way northward.
+
+They had nearly an hour's ride before they came upon the trail.
+
+There it was unmistakably--at first sight as broad and as much
+trampled as the other; but after a careful examination of it there
+was but one opinion, namely, that the number of animals who had
+passed was decidedly less than those who had gone south.
+
+One of the Gauchos now told Mr. Hardy that he knew that at a short
+distance further to the west there was a spring of water much used
+by the Indians, and where he had no doubt they had halted on the
+night of the fire. Finding that it was not more than half an hour's
+ride, Mr. Hardy, after a brief consultation, determined to go over
+there to water the horses and breakfast, before retracing their
+footsteps across the burned prairie.
+
+In little over the time named they came to a small pool of bright
+water, from which a little stream issued, running nearly due north
+across the plain. After drinking heartily themselves, and filling
+the water-skins and kettle, the horses were allowed to drink; and
+Dash plunged in with the greatest delight, emerging his usual
+bright chestnut color, whereas he had gone into the water perfectly
+black.
+
+After he had come out and had shaken himself, he commenced hunting
+about, sniffing so violently that Hubert's attention was attracted
+to him. Presently the dog ran forward a few paces and gave a sharp
+bark of pleasure, and Hubert, running forward, gave so loud a cry
+that all the party rushed up.
+
+Hubert could not speak. There, half-buried in the ground, and
+pointing west, was an Indian arrow, and! round the head was twisted
+a piece of white calico, with little blue spots upon it, which Mr.
+Hardy instantly recognized as a piece of the dress Ethel had worn
+when she left home.
+
+Surprise kept all quiet for awhile, and then exclamations of
+pleasure and excitement broke from all, while Mr. Hardy and his
+sons wore greatly affected at this proof of the recent presence of
+their lost one. The arrow was deeply sunk in the ground, but it was
+placed at a spot where the grass happened to be particularly short,
+so that any one passing outward from the spring could hardly have
+failed to notice the piece of calico upon the grass. There was a
+perfect shower of congratulations; and it was some time before they
+were recovered sufficiently to renew their preparations for
+breakfast.
+
+At last they sat down round the fire, all their faces radiant with
+excitement.
+
+Perez and Martinez, however, sat somewhat apart, talking in an
+animated undertone to each other. They did not even approach the
+fire to roast their food; and Mr. Hardy's attention being attracted
+by this circumstance, he asked what they were talking so earnestly
+about.
+
+Neither of them answered him, and he repeated the question. Then
+Perez replied: "Martinez and I think same. All trick; girl gone
+other way."
+
+Conversation and eating were alike suspended at these ominous
+words, and each looked blankly into the others' faces.
+
+Now that their attention was called to it, the whole circumstances
+of the case rushed to their minds; and as they felt the probable
+truth of what Perez said, their hopes fell to zero.
+
+Mr. Percy was the first who, after a long silence, spoke. "I am
+afraid, Hardy, that what Perez says is right, and that we have been
+very nearly thrown off the scent by a most transparent trick.
+Watched as Ethel must have been, is it probable that she could have
+possessed herself of that arrow, and have fastened a strip of her
+dress to it, without being noticed? Still more impossible is it
+that she could have placed the arrow where we found it. No one
+could have passed without noticing it; so unless we suppose that
+she was allowed to linger behind every one, which is out of the
+question, the arrow could not have been put there by her."
+
+"Too true, Percy," Mr. Hardy said with a sigh, after a short
+silence; "it is altogether impossible, and I should call it a
+clumsy artifice, were it not that it deceived us all for awhile.
+However, there is one comfort; it decides the question as we had
+ourselves decided it: Ethel is gone with the larger party to the
+south."
+
+Breakfast was continued, but with a very subdued feeling. Hubert
+had now finished his, and, being a lad of restless habit, he took
+up the arrow which lay beside him, and began toying with it. First
+he untied the piece of stuff, smoothed it, and put it into his
+pocketbook, while his eyes filled with tears; then he continued
+listlessly twisting the arrow in his fingers, while he listened to
+the conversation around him.
+
+Presently his eyes fell upon the arrow. He started, a flush of
+excitement rushed across his face, and his hands and lips trembled
+as he closely examined the feather.
+
+All-gazed at him with astonishment.
+
+"Oh, papa, papa," he cried at last, "I know this arrow!"
+
+"Know the arrow!" all repeated.
+
+"Yes, I am quite, quite sure I know it. Don't you remember,
+Charley, the day that those wounded Indians started, as we were
+taking the quivers down to them, I noticed that one arrow had two
+feathers which I had never seen before, and could not guess what
+bird they came from. They were light blue, with a crimson tip. I
+pulled one off to compare it with my others. It is at home now. I
+remember that I chose the one I did because the other one had two
+of the little side feathers gone. This is the feather, I can most
+solemnly declare, and you see the fellow one is gone. That arrow
+belongs to one of the men we recovered."
+
+All crowded round to examine the arrow, and then Mr. Hardy said
+solemnly, "Thank God for his mercy, He has decided our way now.
+Undoubtedly, as Hubert says, one of the men we aided is of the
+party, and wishes to show his gratitude. So he has managed to get a
+piece of Ethel's dress, and has tied it to this arrow, hoping that
+we should recognize the feather. Thank God, there is no more doubt,
+and thank Him, too, that Ethel has at least one friend near her."
+
+All was now joy and congratulation, and Hubert rubbed his hands,
+and said triumphantly, "There, Charley, you were always chaffing
+me, and wanting to know what was the good of my collection, and now
+you see what was the good. It has put us on the right trail for
+Ethel, and you will never be able to laugh at me about my
+collection again."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+AT THE STAKE.
+
+
+It was on the evening of the fifth day after her capture by the
+Indians that Ethel Hardy rode into a wide valley in the heart of
+the mountains. It was entered by a narrow gorge, through which ran
+a stream. Beyond this the hill receded, forming a nearly circular
+basin a mile in diameter, from the sides of which the rocks
+ascended almost perpendicularly, so that the only means of entering
+it was through the gorge. Clumps of trees were scattered everywhere
+about, and nearly in the center stood a large Indian village,
+numbering about three hundred lodges, the population of which,
+consisting almost entirely of women and children, came out with
+shrill cries of welcome to meet the returning band. This was two
+hundred strong. Before them they drove about four hundred cattle
+and fifteen hundred sheep. In the midst of the band Ethel Hardy
+rode, apparently unwatched, and forming part of it.
+
+The girl was very pale, and turned even more so at the wild yells
+of triumph which rose around her, when those who had been left
+behind learned how signal had been the success of their warriors,
+and heard that the captive in their midst was one of the family
+which had inflicted such terrible loss upon the tribe two years
+previously. Fortunately she could not understand the volleys of
+threats and curses which the women of the tribe heaped upon her,
+although she could not mistake their furious ejaculations.
+
+Ethel had cried at first until she could cry no more, and had now
+nerved herself for the worst. She had heard that the Indians have
+neither mercy nor pity for any one who may exhibit fear of death;
+she knew that no entreaties or tears would move them in the
+slightest, but that courage and firmness would at any rate command
+their respect and admiration. She had therefore schooled herself to
+show no emotion when the time came; and now, except that she had
+given an involuntary shudder at the sight of the gesticulating
+throng, she betrayed no sign whatever of her emotion, but looked
+round so calmly and unflinchingly that the violent abuse and
+gesticulations died away in a murmur of admiration of the
+pale-faced child who looked so calmly on death.
+
+Nevertheless, as the troop drew up in front of the council hut, and
+alighted, the women pressed round as usual to heap abuse upon the
+prisoner; but one of the Indians stepped up to her, and waved them
+back, and saying, "She is the child of a great chief," took her by
+the arm, and handed her over to the care of the wife of one of the
+principal chiefs. The selection was a good one; for the woman, who
+was young, was known in the tribe as the Fawn for her gentle
+disposition. She at once led the captive away to her lodge, where
+she bade her sit down, offered her food, and spoke kindly to her in
+her low, soft, Indian tongue. Ethel could not understand her, but
+the kindly tones moved her more than the threats of the crowd
+outside had done, and she broke down in a torrent of tears.
+
+The Indian woman drew the girl to her as a mother might have done,
+stroked her long fair hair, and soothed her with her low talk. Then
+she motioned to a pile of skins in the corner of the hut; and when
+Ethel gladly threw herself down upon them the Indian woman covered
+her up as she would have done a child, and with a nod of farewell
+tripped off to welcome her husband and hear the news, knowing that
+there was no possibility of the captive making her escape.
+
+Exhausted with fatigue and emotion, Ethel's sobs soon ceased, and
+she fell into a sound sleep.
+
+Of that terrible catastrophe at the Mercers' she had but a confused
+idea. They were sitting round the table talking, when, without the
+slightest notice or warning, the windows and doors were burst in,
+and dozens of dark forms leaped into the room. She saw Mr. Mercer
+rush to the wall and seize his pistols, and then she saw no more.
+She was seized and thrown over the shoulder of an Indian before she
+had time to do more than leap to her feet. There was a confused
+whirl of sounds around her--shrieks, threats, pistol shots, and
+savage yells--then the sounds swam in her ears, and she fainted.
+
+When she recovered consciousness she found that she was being
+carried on a horse before her captor, and that the air was full of
+a red glare, which she supposed to arise from a burning house. On
+the chief, who carried her, perceiving that she had recovered her
+senses, he called to one of his followers, who immediately rode up,
+bringing a horse upon which a side-saddle had been placed. To this
+Ethel was transposed, and in another minute was galloping along by
+the side of her captor.
+
+Even now she could hardly persuade herself that she was not
+dreaming. That instantaneous scene at the Mercers'--those confused
+sounds--this wild cavalcade of dark figures who rode round
+her--could not surely be real. Alas! she could not doubt it; and as
+the thought came across her, What would they say at home when they
+heard it? she burst into an agony of silent tears. Toward daybreak
+she was often startled to hear the words, "Hope, Ethel, hope!" in
+Spanish distinctly spoken close to her. She turned hastily, but
+there rode the dark forms as usual. Still she felt sure that she
+was not mistaken. Her own name she had distinctly heard; and
+although she could not form a conjecture who this unknown friend
+could be, still it was a great consolation to her to feel that she
+had at any rate one well-wisher among her enemies. He had told her
+to hope, too; and Ethel's spirits, with the elasticity of youth,
+rose at the word.
+
+Why should she not hope? she thought. They were sure to hear it at
+home next morning, even if no one escaped and took them the news
+earlier; and she was certain that within a few hours of hearing it
+her father and friends Would be on their trail. Before the night
+fell, at latest, they would be assembled. Twenty-four hours' start
+would be the utmost that the Indians could possibly obtain, and her
+friends would travel as fast or faster than they could, for they
+would be free from all encumbrances. How far she was to be taken
+she could not say, but she felt sure that in a week's traveling her
+friends would make up for the day lost at starting. She knew that
+they might not be able to attack the Indians directly they came up,
+for they could not be a very strong party, whereas the Indians were
+several hundred strong; but she believed that sooner or later, in
+some way or other, her father and brothers would come to her
+rescue. Ethel from that time forward did not doubt for a moment.
+Trusting thus firmly in her friends, she gained confidence and
+courage; and when the troops halted at nine in the morning, after
+nine hours' riding, Ethel was able to look round with some sort of
+curiosity and interest.
+
+It was here that an incident occurred, which, although she knew it
+not at the time, entirely altered her destination and prospects.
+
+She was sitting upon the ground, when a man, who by his bearing
+appeared to be the principal chief present, passed in earnest talk
+with another chief. In the latter she recognized at once one of the
+wounded Indian prisoners.
+
+"Tawaina," she said, leaping to her feet.
+
+He paid no attention to her call, and she repeated it in a louder
+tone.
+
+The principal chief stopped; Tawaina did the same. Then he walked
+slowly toward the captive.
+
+"Save me, Tawaina," she said, "and send me back again home."
+
+Tawaina shook his head.
+
+"Not can," he said. "Tawaina friend. Help some time--not now." And
+he turned away again.
+
+"Does the Raven know the White Bird," the chief asked him, "that
+she sings his name?"
+
+Tawaina paused and said:
+
+"Tawaina knows her. Her father is the great white brave."
+
+The Indian chief gave a bound of astonishment and pleasure.
+
+"The white brave with the shooting flames?"
+
+Tawaina nodded.
+
+The Raven's meeting with Ethel had been apparently accidental, but
+was in reality intentional. Her actual captor was one of the
+chiefs, although not the principal one, of the Pampas Indians; and
+in the division of the spoil, preparations for which were going on,
+there was no doubt that she would be assigned to that tribe,
+without any question upon the part of the Raven's people.
+
+Now, however, that the Stag knew who the prisoner I was, he
+determined to obtain her for his tribe. He therefore went direct to
+the chief of the Pampas Indians, and asked that the white girl
+might fall to his tribe.
+
+The chief hesitated.
+
+"She is our only captive," he said. "The people will like to see
+her, and she will live in the lodge of the Fox, who carried her
+off."
+
+"The Stag would like her for a slave to his wife. He will give
+fifty bullocks and two hundred sheep to the tribe, and will make
+the Fox's heart glad with a present."
+
+The offer appeared so large for a mere puny girl that the chief
+assented at once; and the Fox was content to take a gun, which
+proved part of the spoil, for his interest in his captive.
+
+The Indians of Stag's tribe murmured to themselves at this costly
+bargain upon the part of their chief. However, they expressed
+nothing of this before him, and continued the work of counting and
+separating the animals in proportion to the number of each tribe
+present--the tribes from the plains being considerably the more
+numerous.
+
+Not until four o'clock were they again in motion, when each tribe
+started for home.
+
+In three hours' riding they reached the spring, and then the Stag
+ordered a small tent of skins to be erected for Ethel's
+accommodation.
+From this she came out an hour later to gaze upon the great wave of
+fire which, kindled at a point far away by their scouts, now swept
+along northward, passing at a distance of three or four miles from
+the spring.
+
+It was when sitting gravely round the fire later on that the Stag
+deigned to enlighten his followers as to his reasons for giving
+what seemed to them so great a price for a pale-faced child.
+
+The delight of the Indians, when they found that they had the
+daughter of their twice victorious enemy in their hands was
+unbounded. Vengeance is to the Indian even more precious than
+plunder; and the tribe would not have grudged a far higher price
+even than had been paid for the gratification of thus avenging
+themselves upon their enemy. The news flew from mouth to mouth, and
+triumphant whoops resounded throughout the camp; and Ethel inside
+her tent felt her blood run cold at the savage exultation which
+they conveyed.
+
+She was greatly troubled by the fire, for she saw that it must
+efface all signs of the trail, and render the task of her friends
+long and difficult, and she felt greatly depressed at what she
+looked upon as a certain postponement of her rescue. She lay
+thinking over all this for a long time, until the camp had subsided
+into perfect quiet. Then the skins were slightly lifted near her
+head, and she heard a voice whisper:
+
+"Me, Tawaina--friend. Great chief come to look for girl. Two
+trails--eyes blinded. Tawaina make sign--point way. Give piece
+dress that great chief may believe."
+
+Ethel at once understood. She cautiously tore off a narrow strip
+from the bottom of her dress, and put it under the skin to the
+speaker.
+
+"Good," he said. "Tawaina friend. Ethel, hope."
+
+Greatly relieved by knowing that a clew would be now given to her
+friends, and overpowered by fatigue, Ethel was very shortly fast
+asleep.
+
+At daybreak they set off again, having thus thirty hours' start of
+their pursuers. They traveled six hours, rested from eleven till
+three, and then traveled again until dark. Occasionally a sheep
+lagged behind, footsore and weary. He was instantly killed and
+cut up.
+
+For four days was their rate of traveling, which amounted to upward
+of fifty miles a day, continued, and they arrived, as has been
+said, the last evening at their village.
+
+During all this time Ethel was treated with courtesy and respect.
+The best portion of the food was put aside for her, the little tent
+of skins was always erected at night, and no apparent watch was
+kept over her movements.
+
+The next morning she was awake early, and had it not been for the
+terrible situation in which she was placed she would have been
+amused by the busy stir in the village, and by the little
+copper-colored urchins at play, or going out with the women to
+collect wood or fetch water. There was nothing to prevent Ethel
+from going out among them, but the looks of scowling hatred which
+they cast at her made her draw back again into the hut, after a
+long, anxious look around.
+
+It was relief at least to have halted, great as her danger
+undoubtedly was. She felt certain now that hour by hour her father
+must be approaching. He might even now be within a few miles. Had
+it not been for the fire, she was certain that he would already
+have been up, but she could not tell how long he might have been
+before he recovered the trail.
+
+Toward the middle of the day two or three Indians might have been
+seen going through the village, summoning those whose position and
+rank entitled them to a place at the council.
+
+Soon they were seen approaching, and taking their seats gravely on
+the ground in front of the hut of the principal chief. The women,
+the youths, and such men as had not as yet by their feats in battle
+distinguished themselves sufficiently to be summoned to the
+council, assembled at a short distance off. The council sat in the
+form of a circle, the inner ring being formed of the elder and
+leading men of the tribe, while the warriors sat round them.
+
+Struck by the hush which had suddenly succeeded to the noise of the
+village, Ethel again went to the door. She was greatly struck by
+the scene, and was looking wonderingly at it, when she felt a touch
+on her shoulder, and on looking round saw the Fawn gazing pityingly
+at her, and at the same time signing to her to come in.
+
+The truth at once flashed across Ethel's mind. The council had met
+to decide her fate, and she did not doubt for a moment what that
+decision would be. She felt that all hope was over, and retiring
+into the hut passed the time in prayer and in preparation for the
+fearful ordeal which was at hand.
+
+After the council had met there was a pause of expectation, and the
+Stag then rose.
+
+"My brothers, my heart is very glad. The Great Spirit has ceased to
+frown upon his children. Twice we went out, and twice returned
+empty-handed, while many of our lodges were empty. The guns which
+shoot without loading were too strong for us, and we returned
+sorrowful. Last year we did not go out; the hearts of our braves
+were heavy. This year we said perhaps the Great Spirit will no
+longer be angry with his children, and we went out. This time we
+have not returned empty-handed. The lowing of cattle is in my ear,
+and I see many sheep. The white men have felt the strength of our
+arms; and of the young men who went out with me there is not one
+missing. Best of all, we have brought back a captive, the daughter
+of the white chief of the flying fires and the guns which load
+themselves. Let me hand her over to our women; they will know how
+to make her cry; and we will send her head to the white chief, to
+show that his guns cannot reach to the Indian country. Have I
+spoken well?"
+
+A murmur of assent followed the chief's speech; and supposing that
+no more would be said upon the matter, the Stag was about to
+declare the council closed, when an Indian sitting in the inner
+circle rose.
+
+"My brothers, I will tell you a story. The birds went out to attack
+the nest of an eagle, but the eagle was too strong for them; and
+when all had gone he went out from his nest with his children, the
+young eagles, and he found the raven and two other birds hurt and
+unable to fly, and instead of killing them, as they might have
+done, the eagles took them up to their nest, and nursed them and
+tended them until they were able to fly, and then sent them home to
+their other birds. So was it with Tawaina and his two friends." And
+the speaker indicated with his arm two Indians sitting at the outer
+edge of the circle. "Tawaina fell at the fence where so many of us
+fell, and in the morning the white men took him and gave him water,
+and placed him in shelter, and bandaged his wound; and the little
+White Bird and her sister brought him food and cool drinks every
+day and looked pitifully at him. But Tawaina said to himself, The
+white men are only curing Tawaina that when the time comes they may
+see how an Indian can die. But when he was well they brought
+horses, and put a bow and arrows into our hands and bade us go
+free. It is only in the battle that the great white chief is
+terrible. He has a great heart. The enemies he killed he did not
+triumph over. He laid them in a great grave. He honored them, and
+planted trees with drooping leaves at their head and at their feet,
+and put a fence round that the foxes might not touch their bones.
+Shall the Indian be less generous than the white man? Even those
+taken in battle they spared and sent home. Shall we kill the White
+Bird captured in her nest? My brothers will not do so. They will
+send back the White Bird to the great white chief. Have I spoken
+well?"
+
+This time a confused murmur ran round the circle. Some of the
+younger men were struck with this appeal to their generosity, and
+were in favor of the Raven's proposition; the elder and more
+ferocious Indians were altogether opposed to it.
+
+Speaker succeeded speaker, some urging one side of the question,
+some the other.
+
+At last the Stag again rose. "My brothers," he said, "my ears have
+heard strange words, and my spirit is troubled. The Raven has told
+us of the ways of the whites after a battle; but the Indians' ways
+are not as the whites' ways, and the Stag is too old to learn new
+fashions. He looks round, he sees many lodges empty, he sees many
+women who have no husbands to hunt game, he hears the voices of
+children who cry for meat. He remembers his brothers who fell
+before the flying fire and the guns which loaded themselves, and
+his eyes are full of blood. The great white chief has made many
+wigwams desolate: let there be mourning in the house of the white
+chief. Have I spoken well?"
+
+The acclamations which followed this speech were so loud and
+general that the party of the Raven was silenced, and the council
+at once broke up.
+
+A cry of exultation broke from the women when they heard the
+decision, and all prepared for the work of vengeance before them.
+
+At a signal from the Stag two of the young Indians went to the hut
+and summoned Ethel to accompany them. She guessed at once that her
+death was decided upon and, pale as marble, but uttering no cry or
+entreaty, which she knew would be useless, she walked between them.
+
+For a moment she glanced at the women around her, to see if there
+was one look of pity or interest; but faces distorted with hate and
+exultation met her eyes, and threats and imprecations assailed her
+ears. The sight, though it appalled, yet nerved her with courage. A
+pitying look would have melted her--this rage against one so
+helpless as herself nerved her; and, with her eyes turned upward
+and her lips moving in prayer, she kept along.
+
+The Indians led her to a tree opposite the center of the village,
+bound her securely to it, and then retired.
+
+There was a pause before the tragedy was to begin. Some of the
+women brought fagots for the pile, others cut splinters to thrust
+under the nails and into the flesh. The old women chattered and
+exulted over the tortures they would inflict; a few of the younger
+ones stood aloof, looking on pityingly.
+
+The men of the tribe gathered in a circle, but took no part in the
+preparations--the torture of women was beneath them.
+
+At last all was ready. A fire was lit near; the hags lit their
+firebrands and advanced. The chief gave the signal, and with a yell
+of exultation they rushed upon their victim, but fell back with a
+cry of surprise, rudely thrust off by three Indians who placed
+themselves before the captive.
+
+The women retreated hastily, and the men advanced to know the
+reason of this strange interruption. The Raven and his companions
+were unarmed. The Indians frowned upon them, uncertain what course
+to pursue.
+
+"My brothers," the Raven said, "I am come to die. The Raven's time
+is come. He has flown his last flight. He and his brothers will die
+with the little White Bird. The Raven and his friends are not dogs.
+They have shed their blood against their enemies, and they do not
+know how to cry out. But their time has come, they are ready to
+die. But they must die before the little White Bird. If not, her
+spirit will fly to the Great Spirit, and will tell him that the
+Raven and his friends, whom she had sheltered and rescued, had
+helped to kill her; and the Great Spirit would shut the gates of
+the happy hunting grounds against them. The Raven has spoken."
+
+There was a pause of extreme astonishment, followed by a clamor of
+voices. Those who had before espoused the cause of the Raven again
+spoke out loudly, while many of the others hesitated as to the
+course to be pursued.
+
+The Stag hastily consulted with two or three of his principal
+advisers, and then moved forward, waving his hand to command
+silence. His countenance was calm and unmoved, although inwardly he
+was boiling with rage at this defiance of his authority. He was too
+politic a chief, however to show this. He knew that the great
+majority of the tribe was with him; yet the employment of force to
+drag the Raven and his companions from their post would probably
+create a division in the tribe, the final results of which none
+could see, and for the consequences of which he would, in case of
+any reverse, be held responsible and looked upon with disapproval
+by both parties.
+
+"The Ravens and his friends have great hearts," he said
+courteously. "They are large enough to shelter the little White
+Bird. Let them take her. Her life is spared. She shall remain with
+our tribe."
+
+The Raven inclined his head, and taking a knife from a warrior
+near, he cut the cords which bound Ethel, and beckoning to the
+Fawn, handed the astonished girl again into her charge saying as he
+did so, "Stop in hut. Not go out; go out, bad." And then,
+accompanied by his friends, he retired without a word to one of
+their huts.
+
+A perfect stillness had hung over the crowd during this scene; but
+when it became known that Ethel was to go off unscathed a murmur
+broke out from the elder females, disappointed in their work of
+vengeance. But the Stag waved his hand peremptorily, and the crowd
+scattered silently to their huts, to talk over the unusual scene
+that had taken place.
+
+The Raven and his friends talked long and earnestly together. They
+were in no way deceived by the appearance of friendliness which the
+Stag had assumed. They knew that henceforth there was bitter hatred
+between them, and that their very lives were insecure. As to Ethel,
+it was, they knew, only a short reprieve which had been granted
+her. The Stag would not risk a division in the tribe for her sake,
+nor would attempt to bring her to a formal execution; but the first
+time she wandered from the hut she would be found dead with a knife
+in her heart.
+
+The Raven, however, felt certain that help was at hand. He and his
+friends, who knew Mr. Hardy, were alone of the tribe convinced that
+a pursuit would be attempted. The fact that no such attempt to
+penetrate into the heart of the Indian country had ever been made
+had lulled the rest into a feeling of absolute security. The Raven,
+indeed, calculated that the pursuers must now be close at hand, and
+that either on that night or the next they would probably enter the
+gorge and make the attack.
+
+The result of the council was that he left his friends and walked
+in a leisurely way back to his own hut, taking no notice of the
+hostile glances which some of the more violent of the Stag's
+supporters cast toward him.
+
+On his entrance he was welcomed by his wife, a young girl whom he
+had only married since his return from the expedition, and to whom,
+from what he had learned of the position of women among the whites,
+he allowed more freedom of speech and action than are usually
+permitted to Indian women. She had been one of the small group who
+had pitied the white girl.
+
+"The Raven is a great chief," she said proudly; "he has done well.
+The Mouse trembled, but she was glad to see her lord stand forth.
+The Stag will strike, though," she added anxiously. "He will look
+for the blood of the Raven."
+
+"The Stag is a great beast," the Indian said sententiously; "but
+the Raven eat him at last."
+
+Then, sitting down upon a pile of skins, the chief filled his pipe,
+and made signs to his wife to bring fire. Then he smoked in silence
+for some time until the sun went down, and a thick darkness closed
+over the valley.
+
+At length he got up, and said to his wife, "If they ask for the
+Raven, say that he has just gone out; nothing more. He will not
+return till daybreak; and remember," and he laid his hand upon her
+arm to impress the caution, "whatever noise the Mouse hears in the
+night, she is not to leave the hut till the Raven comes back to
+her."
+
+The girl bowed her head with an Indian woman's unquestioning
+obedience; and then, drawing aside the skin which served as a door,
+and listening attentively hear if any one were near, the Raven went
+out silently into the darkness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+RESCUED.
+
+
+In spite of their utmost efforts Mr. Hardy's party had made slower
+progress than they had anticipated. Many of the horses had broken
+down under fatigue; and as they had no spare horses to replace them
+as the Indians had in like case done from those they had driven off
+from Mr. Mercer, they were forced to travel far more slowly than at
+first. They gained upon the Indians, however, as they could tell by
+the position of the camping ground for the night.
+
+At three o'clock on the afternoon of the last day they passed the
+place their enemy had left that morning; but although they kept on
+until long after sunset, many of them having led their horses all
+day, they were still more than thirty miles away from the mountains
+among which they knew that the Indian village was situated,
+
+None of the Gauchos had ever been there, but they knew its
+situation and general features by report. There had been no
+difficulty in following the trail since they had struck it. The
+broad line of trodden ground and the frequent carcasses of sheep
+sufficiently told the tale.
+
+That was a night of terrible anxiety to all. They knew that already
+Ethel was in the Indian village, and they thought with a sickening
+dread of what might happen the next day. Nothing, however, could be
+done. Many of the party were already exhausted by their long day's
+walk under a burning sun. It was altogether impossible to reach the
+village that night.
+
+Before lying down for the night, Mr. Hardy asked all the party to
+join in a prayer for the preservation of his daughter during the
+following day; and it was a strange and impressing sight to see the
+group of sunburned, travel-worn men standing uncovered while their
+leader offered up an earnest prayer.
+
+Mr. Hardy then said for that night it was unnecessary to keep watch
+as usual. The Indians had pushed on and could no longer dread
+pursuit, and therefore there was no risk of a night attack. Besides
+which, there was little chance of his sleeping. This proposition
+was a most acceptable one, and in a very short time a perfect
+silence reigned in the camp.
+
+Before daybreak they were again on the march, all on foot and
+leading their horses, in order to spare them as much as possible
+should they be required at night. Speed was now no object. It was,
+they knew, hopeless to attack in broad daylight, as the Indians
+would be probably more than a match for them, and Ethel's life
+would be inevitably sacrificed. They walked, therefore, until
+within six or seven miles of the gorge, nearer than which they
+dared not go, lest they might be seen by any straggling Indian.
+
+Their halting-place was determined by finding a stream with an
+abundance of fresh grass on its banks. They dared not light a fire,
+but chewed some of the tough charqui, and watched the distant cleft
+in the hill which led to the ardently wished-for goal.
+
+As evening fell they were all in the saddle, and were pleased to
+find that the horses were decidedly fresher for their rest. They
+did not draw rein until the ground became stony, and they knew that
+they must be at the mouth of the gorge. Then they dismounted and
+picketed the horses. Two of the Gauchos were stationed with them as
+guards, and the rest went stealthily forward--the rockets being
+interested to the care of Terence, who fastened them tightly
+together with a cord, and then hung them by a loop, like a gun,
+over his shoulder, in order that he might have his hands free.
+
+It was still only eight o'clock--dangerously early for a surprise;
+but the whole party were quite agreed to risk everything, as no one
+could say in what position Ethel might be placed, and what
+difference an hour might make. Their plan was to steal quietly up
+to the first hut they found, to gag its inmates, and compel one of
+them, under a threat of instant death, to guide them to the hut in
+which Ethel was placed.
+
+Suddenly Mr. Hardy was startled by a dark figure rising from a rock
+against which he had almost stumbled, with the words: "White man
+good. Tawaina friend. Come to take him to child."
+
+Then followed a few hurried questions; and no words can express the
+delight and gratitude of Mr. Hardy and his sons, and the intense
+satisfaction of the others, on finding that Ethel was alive and for
+the present free from danger.
+
+It was agreed to wait now for two hours, to give time for the
+Indians to retire to rest; and while they waited the Raven told
+them all that had happened up to the arrival at the village,
+passing over the last day's proceedings by saying briefly that
+Ethel had run a great risk of being put to death, but that a delay
+had been obtained by her friends. Having told his story, he said,
+"Tawaina friend to great white chief. Gave signal with arrow; save
+little White Bird to-day. But Tawaina Indian--not like see Indian
+killed. White chief promise not kill Indian women and children?"
+
+Mr. Hardy assured the Indian that they had no thought of killing
+women and children.
+
+"If can take little White Bird without waking village, not kill
+men?" Tawaina asked again.
+
+"We do not want to wake the village if we can help it, Tawaina; but
+I do not see any chance of escaping without a fight. Our horses are
+all dead beat, and the Indians will easily overtake us, even if we
+get a night's start."
+
+"Mustn't go out on plain," the Raven said earnestly. "If go out on
+plain, all killed. Indian two hundred and fifty braves--eat up
+white men on plain."
+
+"I am afraid that is true enough, Tawaina, though we shall prove
+very tough morsels. Still we should fight at a fearful disadvantage
+in the open. But what are we to do?"
+
+"Come back to mouth of canyon--hold that; can keep Indians off as
+long as like. Indians have to make peace."
+
+"Capital!" Mr. Hardy said delightedly; for he had reviewed the
+position with great apprehension, as he had not seen how it would
+be possible to make good their retreat on their tired horses in the
+teeth of the Indians. "The very thing! As you say, we can hold the
+gorge for a month if necessary, and sooner or later they will be
+sick of it, and agree to let us retreat in quiet. Besides, a week's
+rest would set our horses up again, and then we could make our
+retreat in spite of them."
+
+"One more thing," the Raven said. "When great chief got little
+White Bird safe, Tawaina go away--not fight one way, not fight
+other way. When meet again, white chief not talk about to-night.
+Not great Indian know Tawaina white chief's friend."
+
+"You can rely upon us all, Tawaina. They shall never learn from us
+of your share in this affair. And now I think that it is time for
+us to be moving forward. It will be past ten o'clock before we are
+there."
+
+Very quietly the troop crept along, Tawaina leading the way, until
+he approached closely to the village. Here they halted for a
+moment.
+
+"Only six of us will go in," Mr. Hardy said; "there will be less
+chance of detection--Jamieson, Percy, Herries, my boys, and myself.
+The others take post close to the hut we see ahead. If you find
+that we are discovered, be in readiness to support us. And,
+Farquhar, two or three of you get matches ready, and stick a blue
+light into the straw roof of the hut. We must have light, or we
+lose all the advantage of our firearms. Besides, as we retreat we
+shall be in darkness, while they will be in the glare."
+
+Thus speaking, Mr. Hardy followed his guide, the men he had
+selected treading cautiously in his rear. Presently they stopped
+before one of the huts, and pointing to the door, Tawaina said,
+"Little White Bird there;" and then gliding away, he was lost in
+the darkness.
+
+Mr. Hardy cautiously pushed aside the skin and entered, followed by
+his friends. It was perfectly dark, and they stood for a moment
+uncertain what to do. Then they heard a low voice saying, "Papa, is
+that you?" while at the same instant they saw a gleam of light in
+the other corner of the tent, and heard a rustling noise, and they
+knew that an Indian had cut a slit in the hide walls and had
+escaped; and as Mr. Hardy pressed his child to his heart, a
+terrific war-whoop rose on the air behind the hut.
+
+"Come," Mr. Hardy said, "keep together, and make a run of it."
+
+Ethel had lain down without taking off even her shoes, so strong
+had been her hope of her father's arrival. She was therefore no
+impediment to the speed of their retreat. For a short distance they
+were unopposed. The Indians, indeed, rushed from their huts like
+swarms of bees disturbed by an intruder. Ignorant of the nature of
+the danger, and unable to see its cause, all was for a minute wild
+confusion; and then guided by the war-whoop of the Indian who had
+given the alarm, all hurried toward the spot, and as they did so,
+several saw the little party of whites. Loud whoops gave the
+intimation of this discovery and a rush toward them was made.
+
+"Now, your revolvers," Mr. Hardy said. "We are nearly out of the
+village."
+
+Not as yet, however, were the Indians gathered thickly enough to
+stop them. A few who attempted to throw themselves in the way were
+instantly shot down, and in less time than it has occupied to read
+this description they reached the end of the village. As they did
+so a bright flame shot up from the furthest hut, and the rest of
+the party rushed out and joined them. The Indians in pursuit paused
+at seeing this fresh accession of strength to their enemies, and
+then, as they were joined by large numbers, and the flame shooting
+up brightly enabled them to see how small was the body of whites,
+they rushed forward again with fierce yells.
+
+But the whites were by this time a hundred and fifty yards away,
+and were already disappearing in the gloom.
+
+"Stop!" Mr. Hardy cried. "Steady with your rifles! Each man single
+out an Indian. Fire!"
+
+A yell of rage broke from the Indians as fourteen or fifteen of
+their number fell, and a momentary pause took place again. And
+then, as they were again reinforced, they continued the pursuit.
+
+But the two hundred yards which the whites had gained was a long
+start in the half a mile's distance to be traversed, and the whites
+well knew that they were running for their lives; for once
+surrounded in the plain, their case was hopeless.
+
+Well was it, then, that Ethel was so accustomed to an out-of-door
+life. Hope and fear lent speed to her feet, and running between her
+father and brothers, she was able to keep up a speed equal to their
+own.
+
+Scarce a word was spoken, as with clinched teeth and beating hearts
+they dashed along. Only once Mr. Jamieson said, "Can Ethel keep
+up?" and she gasped out "Yes."
+
+The whites had this great advantage in the race, that they knew
+that they had only half a mile in all to run, and therefore put out
+their best speed; whereas, although a few of the Indians saw the
+importance of overtaking the fugitives on the plain, the greater
+portion believed that their prey was safe in their hands, and made
+no great effort to close with them at once. The whites, too, had
+the advantage of being accustomed to walking exercise, whereas the
+Indians, almost living on horseback, are seldom in the habit of
+using their feet. Consequently the whites reached the narrow mouth
+of the gorge a full hundred and fifty yards ahead of the main body
+of the pursuers, although a party of their fastest runners was not
+more than half that distance in their rear.
+
+There was a general ejaculation of thankfulness as the parties now
+halted and turned to face the enemy.
+
+It was now that the full advantage of Mr. Hardy's precaution of
+firing the Indian hut had become manifest.
+
+The fire had communicated to the next two or three dwellings, and a
+broad flame rose up, against the glare of which the Indians stood
+out distinctly, while the whites were posted in deep gloom.
+
+"Now, boys," Mr. Hardy said, "pick off the first lot with your
+carbines, while we load our rifles. Ethel, get behind that rock.
+Take shelter all till the last moment. The arrows will soon be
+among us."
+
+Steadily as if firing at a mark the boys discharged their five
+shots each; and as the enemy was not more than fifty yards off,
+every shot told.
+
+The rest of the leading band hesitated, and throwing themselves
+down, waited until the others came up. There was a momentary pause,
+then a volley of arrows and musket halls was discharged in the
+direction of their hidden foe, and then, with a wild yell, the
+whole mass charged.
+
+Not till they were within thirty yards was there a return shot
+fired; but as they entered the narrow gorge, the whites leaped to
+their feet with a cheer, and poured in a volley from twenty-four
+rifles,
+
+The effect was terrible; and those in front who were unwounded
+hesitated, but, pressed on from behind, they again rushed forward.
+Then, as they closed, a desperate combat began.
+
+The boys had hastily handed their carbines to Ethel to fit in the
+spare chamber, and had taken their place by their father's side.
+The gorge was so narrow that there was not room to stand abreast,
+and by previous arrangement those who had no revolvers placed
+themselves in front, clubbing their rifles, while those with
+revolvers fired between them.
+
+Mr. Percy, one of the Jamiesons, and Herries stood a pace or two in
+the rear, with their revolvers in hand, as a reserve.
+
+For a few minutes the contest was terrific. The rush of the Indians
+partially broke the line, and the whirl of gleaming hatchets, the
+heavy crash of the blows with the rifles, the sharp incessant
+cracks of the revolvers, the yells of the Indians, the short shouts
+of encouragement from the English, and the occasional Irish cry of
+Terence, made up a total of confusion and noise which was
+bewildering.
+
+Scarce a shot of the whites was thrown away, and a heap of dead lay
+across the pass.
+
+Still the Indians pressed on.
+
+The fight was more silent now, the cracks of the revolvers had
+ceased, and the whites were fighting silently and desperately with
+their rifles. They had not given way a foot, but the short panting
+breath told that the tremendous exertion was telling, as they stood
+in a line at short intervals, and their weapons rose and fell with
+a force and might that the Indian hatchets could seldom stem or
+avert.
+
+Not bloodless on their part had the fight been up to this time.
+Most of them had received gashes more or less severe, and Martinez
+the Gaucho and Cook lay dead at their feet.
+
+Charley and Hubert, upon emptying their revolvers, had fallen back
+and taken their carbines, and now stood with the reserve upon a
+flat rock a few paces in the rear, all burning with impatience to
+take part in the strife.
+
+At this moment they were joined by the two Gauchos who had been
+left with the horses, but who now, hearing the firing, had arrived
+to take part in the fray.
+
+At last Mr. Hardy judged that the time had come, and shouted:
+
+"Take aim into the middle of the mass, and fire as quick as you
+can, then all charge together. Now!"
+
+In less than half a minute the four barrels of the Gauchos' guns,
+and the thirty shots from the revolvers, had been discharged into
+the densely packed throng; then the seven men leaped from the rock,
+and with a cheer the whites threw themselves upon the Indians,
+already recoiling and panic-struck by the tremendous and deadly
+fire.
+
+The Indians in front, surprised and confused, were mown down by the
+long rifles like grass before the mower, and those behind, after
+one moment's hesitation, broke and fled; in another two minutes the
+fight was over, and the Indians in full flight to their village.
+After a few words of hearty congratulation the whites threw
+themselves on the ground, panting and exhausted, after their
+tremendous exertions.
+
+Their first care, upon recovering a little, was to load their
+revolvers; as for the rifles, there was not one, with the exception
+of those of the three men who had formed the reserve, and the boys'
+carbines, which were not disabled. The stocks were broken, the
+hammers wrenched off, and the barrels twisted and bent.
+
+The party now crowded round Ethel, with whom not a single word had
+yet been exchanged since her rescue, and warm and hearty were the
+congratulations and welcome bestowed upon her. There was then an
+examination of wounds.
+
+These had been many, and in some cases severe. Mr. Farquhar was
+completely disabled by a deep wound in the shoulder. Mr. Percy had
+received a fearful gash on the arm. Charley had one ear nearly cut
+off, and the side of his face laid completely open with a sweeping
+blow. Four others were seriously wounded, and six had less
+important wounds. All, however, were too much elated with their
+success to make anything but light of their hurts.
+
+"You seem fated to have your beauty spoiled, Charley," Mr. Hardy
+said, as he bandaged up his son's face. "A few more fights, and you
+will be as seasoned with scars as any Chelsea pensioner."
+
+Charley joined in the general laugh at his own expense.
+
+"Yes, papa, if I go on like this, I shall certainly get rid of my
+looking-glass."
+
+"You have not lost the rockets, I hope, Terence?" Mr. Hardy asked.
+
+"Sure and I've not, your honor. I put them down behind a big rock
+before the little shindy began."
+
+"We will fire them off," Mr. Hardy said. "They will heighten the
+impression, and make the Indians more anxious to come to terms,
+when they see that we can reach their village. We will not let them
+off all at once; but as we have four of each sort, we will send off
+a pair every half hour or so, as they may think, if we fire them
+all at once and then stop, that we have no more left. We may as
+well give them a few shots, too, with our carbines and the rifles
+that remain serviceable. They will carry as far as half a mile if
+we give them elevation enough, and it is well to impress them as
+much as possible."
+
+Mr. Hardy's suggestion was carried out. The first signal rocket
+showed the village crowded with Indians, over whose heads the
+cracked rocket slowly whizzed. The light of the next rocket did not
+disclose a single person, and it was apparent that the place was
+deserted. The third rocket happened to strike one of the roofs, and
+exploding there, set the thatch on fire.
+
+"Good!" Mr. Percy said. "We shall have them asking for terms
+to-morrow."
+
+Four of the unwounded men were now placed as a guard at the mouth
+of the gorge, the others retiring further into it, so as to be
+beyond the dead Indians, who lay there literally in piles.
+
+The morning broke over the white men occupied in the burial of
+their two fallen companions, and upon the Indians assembled at a
+short distance beyond the village. The men sat upon the ground in
+sullen despair; the women wailed and wrung their hands.
+
+Now that it was day, they could see how terrible had been their
+loss. Upward of sixty of their number were missing. The Stag had
+fallen, as had several of the most valiant braves of the tribe.
+
+Presently the Raven rose from the midst of the warriors. His
+absence the preceding evening had not been noticed; and although
+all knew that he had taken no part in the fight, this was
+considered natural enough, when his advice to give up the captive
+had been rejected.
+
+"My brothers," he began, "the Great Spirit is very angry. He has
+hidden his face from his children. Yesterday he blinded their eyes
+and made them foolish; last night he made them as water before the
+white men. Why were the ears of the chiefs closed to the words of
+the Raven? If the Raven had set out with the little White Bird, the
+great white chief would have been glad, and the hatchet would have
+been buried in peace. But the chiefs would not hear the words of
+the Raven. The Stag said, Kill! and the war chiefs shouted, Kill!
+and where are they now? Their wigwams are empty, and their women
+have none to bring in the deer for food. The Great Spirit is
+angry."
+
+The Raven then took his seat; but, as he anticipated, no one rose
+to speak after him. The depression was too general; and the fact
+that, had the Raven's advice been followed, the evils would have
+been avoided, was too manifest for any one to attempt to utter a
+word.
+
+After a profound silence of some minutes' duration, the Raven again
+rose.
+
+"What will my brothers do? The flying fires will burn down our
+village, and there is no retreat. The guns that shoot without
+loading carry very far. We are as water before them. We are in the
+hands of the white chief, and our bones will feed the crows. What
+will my brothers do?"
+
+There was still a profound silence, and then he continued: "The
+Raven is a great chief, and he will tell them what to do. The Raven
+has stood by the side of the little White Bird, and the great white
+chief will listen to his voice. He will say, Let there be peace
+between us. The men who would have harmed the Little White Bird are
+dead; there is no more cause of quarrel. Let us bury the hatchet.
+Take horses and cattle for your journey, and forgive us if we have
+done wrong. If the white men were on the plains, the Raven would
+say, Let my young men charge; but they hold the pass, and the guns
+that shoot without loading are too strong. Have I spoken well?"
+
+There was a low murmur of applause. The feeling that the position
+of the white men was impregnable was general; and they all felt
+convinced that those terrible enemies would devise some unknown
+scheme which would end in the total annihilation of the tribe.
+
+The Raven's proposition was therefore unanimously assented to.
+
+The Raven then laid aside his arms, and attended by six of the
+principal chiefs, carrying green boughs in token of amity, advanced
+toward the mouth of the gorge. Mr. Hardy, with five of the whites,
+and with Perez to interpret, advanced to meet him.
+
+When the two groups met the Raven commenced gravely, in the Indian
+language: "The white chief of the flying fire is mighty, and the
+Great Spirit has blinded his children. They carried off the little
+White Bird, but they did not harm her. Bad men would have harmed
+her, but the Raven stood by her side. The great white chief has taken
+back his little White Bird, and he has killed the men whom
+the Great Spirit blinded. Why should there be any more war? The
+Indians are brave; they have cattle, and sheep, and water. They can
+live out of reach of the white chief's guns, and can fight if the
+white chief comes out against them. The white chief is strong, and
+he can defend the pass, but he cannot venture out to attack. They
+are equal. There is no cause of quarrel any longer. Let us bury the
+hatchet. The white chief's young men can take horses--for the
+Indians have many--to take them back to their homes. They can take
+cattle to eat. Let there be peace."
+
+This address of the Raven was a very politic one. He already knew
+that Mr. Hardy was willing to grant terms, but he wished to show
+the other chiefs that he supported the honor of the tribe by
+boasting of their power and resources, and by making the peace as
+upon equal terms.
+
+When the Gaucho had translated their proposal, Mr. Hardy spoke,
+using the phraseology which would be most intelligible to the
+Indians.
+
+"The Raven is a great chief; he has spoken wisely. The little White
+Bird has sung in the white chief's ear that the Raven stood by her
+side when bad Indians would have hurt her. The bad Indians are
+dead. The Great Spirit frowned upon them. The white chief has no
+quarrel with the Raven and his friends. Let there be peace."
+
+A general expression of satisfaction pervaded both parties when it
+was known that peace was arranged; and one of each side hurrying
+back with the news, the rest went into the village, where, sitting
+down before the principal hut, the pipe of peace was solemnly
+smoked.
+
+The two parties then mingled amicably, mutually pleased at the
+termination to the hostilities; and no one would have guessed that
+a few hours before they had met in deadly strife. The Raven
+courteously invited the whites to stop for a night at the village;
+but the invitation was declined, as all were very anxious to return
+home.
+
+Some Indians were dispatched by the Raven, who had now naturally
+assumed the position of chief of the tribe, to catch horses to take
+the place of those which had broken down upon the journey. The
+offer of cattle was declined, as they were confident that they
+should be able to procure game. They took, however, as large a
+supply of fresh meat as their horses could carry.
+
+Mr. Hardy saw that the Raven wished to avoid any private
+conversation with him. He therefore drew the boys aside, and made a
+proposal to them, to which they cordially agreed.
+
+As the horses were brought up, and the whole tribe assembled, he
+advanced toward the Raven with one of the boys' carbines in his
+hand.
+
+"The Raven is a great chief," he said. "He has a great heart, and
+stood by the side of the little White Bird. But he has not a good
+rifle. The white chief gives him a rifle which will shoot many
+times. Let him promise that he will never use it in fight against
+the white men."
+
+This gift the Raven received with great pleasure, and readily gave
+the required promise, adding, on behalf of his tribe, that the
+hatchet which was buried should never again be dug up against the
+whites. An extra chamber and all the spare ammunition was given to
+him, and a further supply promised when he chose to send for it;
+instructions were also given to him in the use of the weapon, then
+a solemn farewell was exchanged, and the party of whites turned
+their faces toward home.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+AND LAST.
+
+
+With this memorable conflict, and the lesson taught to the Indians,
+that even in the heart of their own country they could not consider
+themselves secure from retaliations and from the vengeance of the
+white settlers, the Indian troubles of the Hardys were over.
+Occasionally, indeed, raids were made upon the outlying
+settlements, and the young Hardys were summoned to beat off their
+savage foes. Upon the estate of Mount Pleasant, however, hostile
+foot was not again placed. Occasionally the Raven, with two or
+three of his braves, would pay a visit for a day or two, and depart
+with presents of blankets, and such things as his tribe needed.
+Upon the first of these visits Hubert questioned him respecting the
+bird whose remarkable feather had been the means of saving Ethel's
+life. At his next visit the chief brought two very perfect skins of
+the bird. It turned out, to Hubert's great delight, to be a new
+species; and one of them is now, with many other hitherto 'unknown
+birds which had fallen to his gun, in the British Museum, with the
+specific names of Hardiensis, in compliment to their discoverer.
+The Raven's tribe honorably performed their agreement with Mr.
+Hardy, and never joined in any subsequent attacks upon the whites.
+Being much weakened by the loss of so many of their fighting men,
+they would probably have been exterminated by hostile tribes; but
+Mr. Hardy subsequently furnished them with a supply of military
+muskets, which he had bought chiefly for the purpose, together with
+ammunition, and they were then able to oppose a resolute front to
+their enemies, and to support themselves by hunting. The Raven is
+now one of the most powerful and respected chiefs upon the plains
+of the pampas.
+
+The return of the expedition, after the rescue of Ethel and the
+chastisement of the Indians in the heart of their own country,
+caused quite a sensation throughout the Republic. Of Mrs. Hardy's
+and Maud's joy we need not speak, but the adventure was considered
+a matter of congratulation and joy throughout the whole district.
+It was felt that a signal blow had been struck to the Indians, and
+that for a long time life and property would be secure. There was,
+in consequence, quite a rush to the neighborhood and land was taken
+up and occupied in all directions.
+
+It was well for Mrs. Hardy and the girls that they were to sail by
+the next mail for England. The effect of those terrible four days
+upon Ethel, and of that week of anxiety upon her mother and sister,
+had so shaken them that the change, even if it had not been
+previously determined upon, would have been imperatively necessary.
+It is not too much to say that Mrs. Hardy and Maud had suffered
+even more than Ethel. She at least had known and seen her danger,
+and was sustained, except during that morning when she was fastened
+to the stake, with a strong hope and belief of rescue. Those left
+behind could do nothing but picture up scenes of horror, and pass
+their time in alternately praying and weeping. They were all sadly
+shaken and nervous during the short time that remained for them at
+Mount Pleasant; but the sea voyage and the fresh breezes soon
+brought health and color into their cheeks, and none of them ever
+after felt any bad effects from that terrible week.
+
+And now our story is drawing to a close. The stormy period of the
+Mount Pleasant settlement was over. The hard work, the difficulties
+and dangers of the life of a new settler on the extreme edge of
+civilization, had been passed, and nothing remained but to continue
+to devote attention and energy to the estate, and to reap the
+fruits of the labor.
+
+For two years after the departure of his wife and daughters Mr.
+Hardy remained at his post. It was now nearly six years since he
+had left England, and he longed to return to it. He felt that he
+could do so without any uneasiness as to the future. Rosario was,
+according to his anticipation, rising into a large and important
+town; the country was fairly settled for leagues beyond the estate;
+land was rapidly rising in value; and there was now no fear
+whatever of Indian attacks. His flocks and herds had multiplied
+greatly, and were doubling every two years. The income obtained by
+the sale of cattle fatted on the alfalfa, and upon the sale of wool
+and other farm produce, was considerable. The dairy alone brought
+in a large yearly amount. Charley was now twenty-two, Hubert a year
+younger; both were as capable of managing the estate as he was
+himself.
+
+He one day, therefore, unfolded his plans to them. "As you know,
+boys, I am going to England shortly; and although I shall perhaps
+now and then come over here, I shall make England my permanent
+home. You boys will therefore jointly manage the estate. The income
+this year will reach six thousand dollars, and would be much more
+did we not keep the greater portion of our animals to increase our
+stock. I have now twelve thousand five hundred dollars in the bank.
+After the busy life I have led here, I could not remain inactive.
+My present intention is to take a large farm upon a long lease with
+the option of purchase. My object will be to obtain a lease upon
+large acreage and poor land, but improvable with irrigation or
+drainage and an outlay of capital. I shall risk no more than twelve
+thousand five hundred dollars in this, and also the income I draw
+from here for the next two years. The profits will increase each
+year. I shall therefore in two years have sunk twenty-five thousand
+dollars in the farm--a portion being devoted to building a suitable
+house. You will, of course, during the two years spend whatever
+money you may require; but, in fact, it is impossible for you to
+spend much money here. At the end of two years I propose that first
+you, Charley, as the elder, shall come home to England for a year,
+and then that Hubert shall take his turn. You will then stay a year
+here together, and again have each a year in England, and so on
+regularly. From the end of this two years I shall draw half the
+income of this estate, and you will take the other half between
+you, to invest or use as you may think fit. At the end of six years
+I calculate that the estate will be stocked with as many cattle and
+sheep as it can support. Fifteen thousand cattle, say, and thirty
+thousand sheep. You will then sell all your annual increase, and
+the profits will be greater every year. At the end of ten years
+from this time, if, as I think probable, you will have had enough
+of this life, we will sell the estate. By that time it will be the
+center of a populous district, the land will be greatly increased
+in value, and will be equal to any in the country--so much so,
+indeed, that it will probably be out of the question to find a
+purchaser for the whole. We could therefore break it up to suit
+purchasers, dividing it into lots of one, two, three, or four
+square miles, or a square league, and dividing the stock in
+proportion. The house would, of course, go with the arable land and
+a mile or two of pasture beyond it. My share of the yearly income I
+shall devote to buying my estate. Say the price is fifty thousand
+dollars. This I shall, with my income from here and my income from
+the estate itself, probably be able to make in ten years. The
+estate, with the twenty-five thousand dollars I propose to risk in
+drainage, etc., ought then to be worth one hundred thousand
+dollars. The value of this estate of fifty thousand acres, with the
+flocks and herds, ought to be at least double that amount; so that
+at the end of ten years I shall be a rich man. You, with care, can
+certainly save twenty-five thousand dollars each in the ten years,
+and will receive another fifty thousand dollars each as your share
+of the estate. You will consequently, boys, at the age of
+thirty-one and thirty-two, be able to settle down in England in
+very comfortable circumstances. Your sisters will of course be
+provided for out of my share. Do you approve of my plans?"
+
+The boys warmly expressed their satisfaction at the plan, and their
+gratitude to their father for his intentions.
+
+And so things were carried out.
+
+Six months after Mr. Hardy's arrival in England, the boys heard of
+Maud's marriage to Mr. Cooper, now, by the death of his father, a
+wealthy country gentleman. Charley, during his first visit to
+England, also married--an example which Hubert followed the next
+year.
+
+The two now took it by turn to manage the estate--the one in
+England always passing a considerable portion of his time at Mr.
+Hardy's, and spending the rest in traveling.
+
+Ethel was married the year after Hubert to a rising barrister in
+London.
+
+Everything prospered at Mount Pleasant, and at the sale it was
+broken up into lots and fetched rather a larger sum than Mr. Hardy
+had calculated.
+
+Mr. Hardy's own plan had been fully carried out, but by the end of
+the ten years he began to wish for a quiet town life. He therefore
+made an arrangement with Charley, whereby the latter, who had
+obtained some money with his wife, has taken his place as master of
+the estate, and has settled down into the life of a country
+gentleman, which exactly suits him.
+
+Hubert lives in London. His income is sufficient for his wants, he
+has become a member of a number of scientific societies, and his
+collection of the fauna of the pampas of America is considered to
+be unequaled.
+
+The girls are very happy with the men of their choice; and Mr. and
+Mrs. Hardy have always some of their children or grandchildren
+staying with them, and often amuse the young ones with tales of how
+their fathers or mothers fought the Indians on the pampas of South
+America.
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of On the Pampas, by G. A. Henty
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ON THE PAMPAS ***
+
+This file should be named ntpmp10.txt or ntpmp10.zip
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, ntpmp11.txt
+VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, ntpmp10a.txt
+
+Produced by Robert Prince, Juliet Sutherland, Charles Franks
+and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team.
+
+Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we usually do not
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance
+of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
+Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
+even years after the official publication date.
+
+Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
+midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
+The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at
+Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month.  A
+preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
+and editing by those who wish to do so.
+
+Most people start at our Web sites at:
+http://gutenberg.net or
+http://promo.net/pg
+
+These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
+Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
+eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
+
+
+Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement
+can get to them as follows, and just download by date.  This is
+also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
+indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
+announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or
+ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03
+
+Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
+
+Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
+as it appears in our Newsletters.
+
+
+Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
+
+We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work.  The
+time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
+to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
+searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc.   Our
+projected audience is one hundred million readers.  If the value
+per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
+million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text
+files per month:  1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+
+We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002
+If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
+will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end.
+
+The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks!
+This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
+which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
+
+Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated):
+
+eBooks Year Month
+
+    1  1971 July
+   10  1991 January
+  100  1994 January
+ 1000  1997 August
+ 1500  1998 October
+ 2000  1999 December
+ 2500  2000 December
+ 3000  2001 November
+ 4000  2001 October/November
+ 6000  2002 December*
+ 9000  2003 November*
+10000  2004 January*
+
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
+to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
+and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut,
+Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois,
+Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts,
+Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
+Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio,
+Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South
+Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West
+Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
+
+We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones
+that have responded.
+
+As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
+will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
+Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
+
+In answer to various questions we have received on this:
+
+We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
+request donations in all 50 states.  If your state is not listed and
+you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
+just ask.
+
+While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
+not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
+donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
+donate.
+
+International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
+how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
+deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
+ways.
+
+Donations by check or money order may be sent to:
+
+Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+PMB 113
+1739 University Ave.
+Oxford, MS 38655-4109
+
+Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
+method other than by check or money order.
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
+the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
+[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154.  Donations are
+tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law.  As fund-raising
+requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
+made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+You can get up to date donation information online at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html
+
+
+***
+
+If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
+you can always email directly to:
+
+Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>
+
+Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
+
+We would prefer to send you information by email.
+
+
+**The Legal Small Print**
+
+
+(Three Pages)
+
+***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START***
+Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
+They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
+your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from
+someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
+fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
+disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
+you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to.
+
+*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK
+By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
+eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
+this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
+a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by
+sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
+you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical
+medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
+
+ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS
+This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks,
+is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
+through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
+Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
+on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
+distribute it in the United States without permission and
+without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
+below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook
+under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
+
+Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
+any commercial products without permission.
+
+To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable
+efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
+works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any
+medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
+things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
+disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer
+codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
+
+LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
+But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
+[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
+receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims
+all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
+legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
+UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
+INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
+OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of
+receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
+you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
+time to the person you received it from. If you received it
+on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
+such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
+copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
+choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
+receive it electronically.
+
+THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
+TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
+the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
+above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
+may have other legal rights.
+
+INDEMNITY
+You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
+and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
+with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
+texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
+legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
+following that you do or cause:  [1] distribution of this eBook,
+[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook,
+or [3] any Defect.
+
+DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
+You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by
+disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
+"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
+or:
+
+[1]  Only give exact copies of it.  Among other things, this
+     requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
+     eBook or this "small print!" statement.  You may however,
+     if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable
+     binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
+     including any form resulting from conversion by word
+     processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
+     *EITHER*:
+
+     [*]  The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
+          does *not* contain characters other than those
+          intended by the author of the work, although tilde
+          (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
+          be used to convey punctuation intended by the
+          author, and additional characters may be used to
+          indicate hypertext links; OR
+
+     [*]  The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at
+          no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
+          form by the program that displays the eBook (as is
+          the case, for instance, with most word processors);
+          OR
+
+     [*]  You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
+          no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
+          eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
+          or other equivalent proprietary form).
+
+[2]  Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this
+     "Small Print!" statement.
+
+[3]  Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
+     gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
+     already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  If you
+     don't derive profits, no royalty is due.  Royalties are
+     payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
+     the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
+     legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
+     periodic) tax return.  Please contact us beforehand to
+     let us know your plans and to work out the details.
+
+WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
+Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
+public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
+in machine readable form.
+
+The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
+public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
+Money should be paid to the:
+"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
+software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
+hart@pobox.com
+
+[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only
+when distributed free of all fees.  Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by
+Michael S. Hart.  Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be
+used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be
+they hardware or software or any other related product without
+express permission.]
+
+*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END*
+
diff --git a/old/ntpmp10.zip b/old/ntpmp10.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d990fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/ntpmp10.zip